.
HD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HC900CHU/GY-HC900CHE
GY-HC900STU/GY-HC900RCHE
INSTRUCTIONS
.
.
In this illustration, the supplied viewfinder is attached to the GY-HC900CHU/GY-HC900CHE.
Wireless LAN antenna and viewfinder are not included in GY-HC900STU and GY-HC900RCHE.
The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement
without prior notice.
Please check the latest version of the INSTRUCTIONS from the following Mobile User Guide. You can
also download the PDF from the Mobile User Guide.
Mobile User Guide
When you are outside, you can refer to the instructions from your Android phone or iPhone.
http://manual3.jvckenwood.com/pro/mobile/global/
You can view the Mobile User Guide using the browser on your Android phone or iPhone.
Please read the following before getting started:
Thank you for purchasing this product.
Before operating this unit, please read the
instructions carefully to ensure the best
For Customer Use:
possible performance.
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the body.
In this manual, each model number is
described without the last letter (U/E) which
means the shipping destination.
Retain this information for future reference.
(U: for USA and Canada, E: for Europe)
Only “U” models (GY-HC900CHU/
GY-HC900STU) have been evaluated by UL.
Model No. GY-HC900CHU/GY-HC900STU
Serial No.
IM 2.07
B5A-2755-10
FOR USA
These are general Important Safety Instructions and certain items may not
apply to all appliances.
Important Safety Instructions
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
10. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
11. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as
power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped.
For USA-California Only
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
.
Important Safety Instructions
3
POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS
Ces informations sont des CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES et
certains points peuvent ne pas s’appliquer à tous les appareils.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
1. Lire ces instructions.
2. Conserver ces instructions.
3. Tenir compte de tous les avertissements.
4. Respecter toutes les instructions.
5. Ne pas utiliser cet appareil à proximité de l’eau.
6. Ne nettoyer qu’avec un chiffon sec.
7. Ne pas boucher les ouvertures de ventilation.
Installer selon les instructions du fabricant.
8. Ne pas installer à proximité de sources de chaleur telles que des radiateurs,
des accumulateurs de chaleur, des poêles, ou d’autres appareils
(comprenant les amplificateurs) qui produisent de la chaleur.
9. Protéger le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter qu’il ne soit piétiné ou ne se coince, tout
particulièrement au niveau de la fiche, de la prise de courant et du point où il sort de l’appareil.
10. Utiliser uniquement des équipements/accessoires spécifiés par le fabricant.
11. N’utiliser qu’avec le chariot, le stand, le trépied, le support ou
la table spécifié par le fabricant, ou vendu avec l’appareil.
Lorsqu’un chariot est utilisé, faire attention pour déplacer
la combinaison chariot/appareil pour éviter des blessures
causées par un basculement.
12. Débrancher cet appareil pendant un orage ou quand il
n’est pas utilisé pendant une longue durée.
13. L’entretien ou la réparation de l’appareil doit être effectué par du personnel qualifié uniquement.
Un dépannage est nécessaire lorsque l’appareil a été endommagé d’une façon ou d’une autre,
telle que lorsque le cordon d’alimentation ou la fiche est endommagé, si du liquide a été renversé
ou si des objets sont tombés à l’intérieur de l’appareil, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou
à l’humidité, ne fonctionne pas normalement ou a fait une chute.
Pour Californie des États-Unis seulement
Cet appareil contient une pile-bouton CR au lithium qui contient du perchlorate – une
manipulation spéciale peut être requise.
Voir www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
.
Important Safety Instructions
4
Safety Precautions
POUR CANADA
ATTENTION
FOR USA AND CANADA
RISQUE
CAUTION
D’ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION:
POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION NE PAS
OUVRIR LE BOITER. AUCUNE
PIECE INTERIEURE N’EST A
REGLER PAR L’UTILISATEUR. SE
REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE
EN CAS DE PROBLEME.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
Le symbole de l’éclair à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’une “tension
dangereuse” non isolée dans
le boîtier du produit. Cette
tension est suffisante pour
provoquer l’électrocution de
personnes.
The lightning flash with
arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient
Le point d’exclamation à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’opérations
d’entretien importantes au
sujet desquelles des
renseignements se trouvent
dans le manuel
magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of important
operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying
d’instructions.
Ces symboles ne sont
utilisés qu’aux Etats-Unis.
.
the appliance.
.
Safety Precautions
5
Supplier's Declaration of Conformity
Model Number: GY-HC900CHU
GY-HC900STU
Déclaration de conformité du fournisseur
Numéro de
modèle :
GY-HC900CHU
GY-HC900STU
Trade Name:
Responsible
party:
JVC
Nom de marque : JVC
JVCKENWOOD USA
Corporation
500 Valley Road,
Suite 203 Wayne,
NJ 07470
Personne
responsable :
Adresse :
JVCKENWOOD USA
Corporation
500 Valley Road,
Suite 203 Wayne,
NJ 07470
Address:
Telephone
Number:
973-317-5000
Numéro de
téléphone :
973-317-5000
This device complies with Part 15 of
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Cet ensemble se conforme à la partie 15 des
règles de la FCC (Federal Communications
Commission). Le fonctionnement est sujet aux
deux conditions suivantes : (1) Cet appareil ne
peut pas causer d’interférences nuisibles, et
(2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence
reçue, comprenant des interférences qui
peuvent causer un mauvais fonctionnement.
.
.
Changes or modifications not
Des changements ou modifications
non approuvés par JVC peuvent
annuler le droit de l’utilisateur de faire
fonctionner l’appareil. Cet appareil a
été testé et il a été reconnu qu’il se
conforme aux limites concernant
l’appareillage informatique de classe
A correspondant à la partie 15 des
règles de la FCC. Ces limites sont
conçues pour fournir une protection
raisonnable contre les interférences
dangereuses lorsque l’équipement est
utilisé dans un environnement
approved by JVC could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial
environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own
expense.
commercial.
Cet appareil génère, utilise et peut
émettre de l’énergie des fréquences
radio et, s’il n’est pas installé et utilisé
selon les instructions du fabricant,
peut causer des interférences
nuisibles en communications radio.
L’utilisation de cet équipement dans
une zone résidentielle est susceptible
de causer des interférences néfastes,
auquel cas l’utilisateur devra prendre
des mesures à ses propres frais.
.
.
Safety Precautions
6
CAUTION:
The mains plug shall remain readily
operable.
ꢀ Remove the mains plug immediately if
the camera functions abnormally.
Attention:
La prise secteur doit être opérationnelle.
ꢀ Débranchez immédiatement la fiche
secteur si le caméscope ne fonctionne
pas normalement.
.
.
WARNING:
Avertissement:
Évitez d’exposer la batterie, le
caméscope avec la batterie insérée ou la
télécommande avec la batterie insérée à
une chaleur excessive, telle que celle
des rayons directs du soleil, d’un feu ou
de tout autre source de chaleur.
The battery pack, the camera with
battery installed, and the remote control
with battery installed should not be
exposed to excessive heat such as direct
sunlight, fire or the like.
.
.
WARNING:TO PREVENT FIRE OR
SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
AVERTISSEMENT : POUR EVITER
LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS
EXPOSER L’APPAREIL A LA
PLUIE NI A L’HUMIDITE.
.
.
NOTES:
ꢀ The rating plate and safety caution are
on the bottom and/or the back of the
main unit.
REMARQUES :
ꢀ La plaque d’identification et
l’avertissement de sécurité se trouvent
sous l’appareil et/ou au dos.
ꢀ La plaque du numéro de série est
située sur la partie inférieure de
l’appareil.
ꢀ The serial number plate is on the
bottom of the unit.
.
Caution on Replaceable lithium
.
battery
The battery used in this device may
present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat
above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate.
Replace battery with Panasonic, Sanyo,
Sony or Maxell CR2025.
Danger of explosion or risk of fire if the
battery is incorrectly replaced.
ꢀ Dispose of used battery promptly.
ꢀ Keep away from children.
ꢀ Do not disassemble and do not dispose
of in fire.
Avertissement sur la pile au
lithium remplaçable
La pile utilisée dans cet appareil peut
présenter des risques d’incendie ou de
brûlure chimique si elle est mal traitée.
Ne pas recharger, démonter, chauffer à
plus de 100°C (212°F) ni mettre au feu.
Remplacez la pile avec Panasonic,
Sanyo, Sony ou Maxell CR2025.
Danger d’explosion ou risque d’incendie
si la pile n’est pas changée correctement.
ꢀ Jeter immédiatement les piles usées.
ꢀ Placer hors de la portée des enfants.
ꢀ Ne pas démonter ni jeter au feu.
.
.
Safety Precautions
7
When the equipment is installed in a
cabinet or on a shelf, make sure that it
has sufficient space on all sides to allow
for ventilation (10 cm (3-15/16") or more
on both sides, on top and at the rear).
Do not block the ventilation holes.
(If the ventilation holes are blocked by a
newspaper, or cloth etc. the heat may not
be able to get out.)
Si le matériel est installé dans un coffret
ou sur une étagère, s’assurer qu’il y a un
espace suffisant sur tous les côtés pour
permettre la ventilation (10 cm (3-15/16")
ou plus sur les deux côtés, au dessus et
à l’arrière).
Ne pas boucher les orifices de
ventilation.
(Si les orifices de ventilation sont
bouchés par un journal, un tissu, etc., la
chaleur peut ne pas s’éliminer.)
Aucune source à flamme nue, telle que
des bougies allumées, ne doit être
placée sur l’appareil.
En jetant des batteries aux ordures, les
problèmes d’environnement doivent être
pris en considération et les
No naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, should be placed on the
apparatus.
When discarding batteries,
environmental problems must be
considered and the local rules or laws
governing the disposal of these batteries
must be followed strictly.
.
réglementations locales ou la législation
concernant le rebut de ces batteries
doivent être strictement respectées.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
.
L’appareil ne doit pas être exposé à de
l’eau ou à des éclaboussures et les
objets remplis de liquide, tels que des
vases, ne doivent pas être placés sur
l’appareil.
.
Do not point the lens directly into the
sun. This can cause eye injuries, as well
as lead to the malfunctioning of internal
circuitry. There is also a risk of fire or
electric shock.
.
Ne dirigez pas l’objectif directement vers
le soleil. Vous pourriez vous abîmer la
vue et l’appareil pourrait être
endommagé. Il y a aussi risque
d’incendie ou d’électrocution.
Attention!
Les remarques suivantes sont destinées
à protéger l’utilisateur et le caméscope
contre des dommages éventuels.
Ne pas transporter ou saisir le
caméscope par l’écran LCD, car il
pourrait tomber ou s’endommager.
Ne pas utiliser de trépied
photographique sur des surfaces
irrégulières et inclinées. Il pourrait
tomber et le caméscope pourrait être
sérieusement endommagé.
CAUTION!
The following notes concern possible
physical damage to this unit and to the
user.
Carrying or holding this unit by the LCD
monitor can result in dropping the unit,
or in a malfunction.
Do not use a tripod on unsteady or
unlevel surfaces. It could tip over,
causing serious damage to the unit.
CAUTION!
Connecting cables (Audio/Video, etc.) to
this unit and leaving it on top of the TV is
not recommended, as tripping on the
cables will cause the unit to fall, resulting
in damage.
Attention!
.
Avec des câbles (Audio/Vidéo, etc.)
raccordés, il est recommandé de ne pas
laisser le caméscope sur le dessus du
téléviseur, car tirer sur les câbles
pourrait faire tomber le caméscope,
causant des dommages.
.
Safety Precautions
8
IMPORTANT (for owners in the U.K.)
Connection to the mains supply in
the United Kingdom.
CAUTION:
Where there are strong electromagnetic
waves or magnetism, for example near a
radio or TV transmitter, transformer,
motor, etc., the picture and the sound
may be disturbed. In such case, please
keep the apparatus away from the
sources of the disturbance.
DO NOT cut off the mains plug from
this equipment.
If the plug fitted is not suitable for the
power points in your home or the cable is
too short to reach a power point, then
obtain an appropriate safety approved
extension lead or contact the local
dealers in your area.
BE SURE to replace the fuse only with
an identical approved type, as originally
fitted, and to replace the fuse cover.
If nonetheless the mains plug is cut off
be sure to remove the fuse and dispose
of the plug immediately, to avoid possible
shock hazard by inadvertent connection
to the mains supply.
If this product is not supplied fitted with a
mains plug then follow the instructions
given below:
DO NOT make any connection to the
Larger Terminal coded E or Green.
The wires in the mains lead are coloured
in accordance with the following code:
.
The plastics packaging bags may cause
suffocation when they are covered over the
head.Tear them open, and keep them away
from the reach of infants and children by
ensuring that they are disposed of properly.
.
v
Wireless LAN
ꢀ This device is a 2.4 GHz wideband
transmission system (transceiver),
intended for use in all EU member
states and EFTA countries, except in
France and Italy where restrictive use
applies.
ꢀ In Italy the end-user should apply for a
license at the national spectrum
authorities in order to obtain
authorization to use the device for
setting up outdoor radio links and/or for
supplying public access to
telecommunications and/or network
services.
ꢀ This device may not be used for setting
up outdoor radio links in France and in
some areas the RF output power may
be limited to 10 mW EIRP in the
frequency range of 2454 - 2483.5 MHz.
For detailed information the end-user
should contact the national spectrum
authority in France.
Blue to N
(Neutral) or Black
Brown to L (Live)
or Red
If these colours do not correspond with
the terminal identifications of your plug,
connect as follows:
Blue wire to terminal coded N (Neutral)
or coloured black.
Brown wire to terminal coded L (Live) or
coloured Red.
If in doubt — consult a competent
electrician.
.
CAUTIONS:
To prevent shock, do not open the cabinet.
No user serviceable parts inside.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
Frequency Range 2.4GHz Band : 1 - 13ch
Output Power
11 b/g/n
: 14 dBm (max)
.
.
Frequency Range 5GHz Band : W52/W53/W56
WARNING
Output Power
11 n/a/ac : 11 dBm (max)
.
Operation of this equipment in a
residential environment could cause
radio interference.
.
Safety Precautions
9
v x
o Para Brasil
The European representative of
JVCKENWOOD Corporation is:
Informação sobre eliminação de
baterias
Este produto não deverá ser eliminado
como lixo doméstico em geral.
Die europäische Vertretung für die
JVCKENWOOD Corporation ist:
Devolva a bateria velha ao comerciante
ou para a rede autorizada, para que seja
devolvida ao fabricante ou importador.
A reciclagem e eliminação de lixo em
uma maneira adequada, ajudarão para
preservar recursos, prevenindo, ao
mesmo tempo, contra efeitos prejudiciais
sobre a nossa saúde e o meio ambiente.
JVCKENWOOD Deutschland GmbH
Konrad-Adenauer-Allee 1-11
61118 Bad Vilbel
GERMANY
.
x
.
Dear customer,
this apparatus is in compliance with the
valid European Directive and the
relevant standards regarding
electromagnetic compatibility.
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte
Kundin,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit der gültigen
europäischen Richtlinie und den
relevanten Normen bezüglich
elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit
überein.
.
v
Hereby, JVCKENWOOD Corporation
declares that the radio equipment type
GY-HC900CHE is in compliance with
Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of
conformity is available at the following
internet address:
Hiermit erklärt die , JVCKENWOOD
Corporation, dass der Funkanlagentyp
GY-HC900CHE der Richtlinie
2014/53/EU entspricht.
Der vollständige Text der
EU-Konformitätserklärung ist unter der
folgenden Internetadresse verfügbar:
http://www3.jvckenwood.com/ecdoc/
.
Safety Precautions
10
Camera Features
Contents
12
.
Contents
13
Newly developed user multi-matrix for
16-axis color correction
Main Features
In addition to the conventional 6-axis user linear
matrix adjustment, this camera recorder is
equipped with user multi-matrix that enables
accurate adjustment of hue and saturation in the
smaller 16-axis color region.
A variety of wired and wireless
interfaces to support various network
connections
In addition to the USB host terminal for wireless
LAN and LTE USB adapter connections, this
camera recorder is equipped with a variety of
interfaces such as wired LAN terminal and built-in
wireless LAN with 2.4GHz/5GHz MIMO dual band
antennas u v to support various network
connections.
HDR and log gamma for high dynamic
range and high color gamut
This camera recorder is equipped with HLG
(Hybrid Log-Gamma) that conforms to ITU-BT.
2100 and our in-house J-Log1 Gamma with 800%
dynamic range to cope with HDR (High Dynamic
Range). Capable of recording in 10-bit for high
dynamic range and high color gamut.
Three full HD 2/3-inch CMOS image
sensors for high sensitivity of F12, low
noise high quality recording
This camera recorder is equipped with three 2/3-
inch 2.20M pixels full HD CMOS image sensors.
It delivers high sensitivity of F12, low noise high
quality recordings.
Double SD card slots for series/dual
recordings
The most common SDHC/SDXC card recording
system is used for the memory card. This ensures
high reliability and operation at low running cost.
Various user friendly recording options are
available. These include series recording which
enables seamless long hour continuous
recordings over the slots and dual recording of the
same file to two slots.
2/3-inch B4 lens mount system
equipped with B4 lens mount and 4-
position optical ND filter
This camera recorder comes with a 2/3-inch B4
lens mount system equipped with B4 lens mount
and 4-position optical ND filter.
3.26-inch OLED electronic viewfinder
and 3.5-inch LCD monitor (with focus
assist function)
This camera recorder supports focusing through
the 3.26-inch OLED electronic viewfinder and 3.5-
inch LCD monitor. Other assist functions are also
available, including magnified focus on a manually
selected point.
A wide range of B4 mount lenses can be used.
Furthermore, when a B4 lens with chromatic
aberration compensation data is installed,
chromatic aberration can be corrected on the
camera recorder.
By switching the 4-position ND filter (CLEAR, 1/4,
1/16, 1/64), the amount of light can be adjusted
according to the brightness during shooting.
Time code input/output and genlock
terminals for shooting using multiple
cameras
High quality signal processing by 10-bit,
4:2:2 sampling
High quality signal processing that delivers rich
gradation expression and color reproduction of
video signals is possible by means of 10-bit, 4:2:2
sampling.
This camera recorder supports the use of multiple
cameras as well as studio use.
Professional-style switch layout and
diverse video parameters
Switches for Gain and White Balance are available
on the side panel to enable quick switching
according to the shooting scene. Image quality
parameters such as gamma and color matrix are
also available in the menu for adjustment to the
preferred tones.
Various usage-based recording formats
The recording codec supports two types of formats
that are compatible with the 4:2:2 10-bit formats
widely used by broadcasting stations, namely
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 and MPEG-2. All file formats
are compatible with QuickTime (MOV).
Main Features
14
Built-in GPS u v
Content of this manual
This camera recorder is built in with GPS function,
which enables the positional information obtained
from the GPS satellite during a shoot to be
recorded as metadata.
Note that acquisition of the positional
information may fail depending on the weather
condition.
All rights reserved by JVCKENWOOD
Corporation. Unauthorized duplication or
reprinting of this manual, in whole or in part, is
strictly prohibited.
0
*
Illustrated designs, specifications and other
contents of this manual are subject to change for
improvement without prior notice.
0
SDXC and SDHC logos are trademarks of
SD-3C, LLC.
0
0
User buttons/switches assignable with
different functions for greater ease of
use
Menu items corresponding to each user button are
available to assign the buttons with different
functions.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
LicensingAdministrator, Inc. intheUnitedStates
and other countries.
QuickTime, Final Cut Pro, Finder, iPhone, iPad,
iPod touch, macOS and Safari are registered
trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S. and other
countries.
0
0
“IPX2” standard equivalent waterproof
function for shooting in the rain
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of
Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used
under license.
SDI pool feed for simultaneous
recording and streaming of videos
Android and Google Chrome are trademarks
and/or registered trademarks of Google LLC.
QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso
Wave Incorporated.
0
0
0
Symbols used
Caution : Describes precautions concerning the
Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of U.S.-based Microsoft Corporation
in the U.S. and other countries.
operation of this product.
Memo
:
Describes reference information, such
as functions and usage restrictions of
this product.
The company name of Fontworks, Fontworks,
and the name of the fonts are registered
trademarks of Fontworks Inc.
0
:
:
:
:
:
Indicates the reference page numbers
and reference items.
A
Zixi and the Zixi logo are trademarks of Zixi LLC.
UniSlot is a registered trademark of Ikegami
Tsushinki Co., Ltd.
0
0
Feature available on GY-HC900CHU
only.
u
v
w
x
Other product and company names included in
this instruction manual are trademarks and/or
registered trademarks of their respective
companies. Marks such as ™ and ® have been
omitted in this manual.
0
Feature available on GY-HC900CHE
only.
Feature available on GY-HC900STU
only.
Feature available on GY-HC900RCHE
only.
Descriptions in this manual are based on firmware
version V0410.
Main Features
15
Drip-proof
Precautions for Proper
Use
o
This camera recorder has a drip-proof structure
equivalent to IPX2 according to our testing
method. It is not completely waterproof. And the
drip-proof performance under all conditions is
not guaranteed.
Storage and Usage Locations
IPX2 (protection rating against dripping water)
ensures that when a device is tilted at an angle
of 15 degrees to the front, back, right and left
with water dripping vertically on it at a rate of
3 mm/min for a total of 10 minutes at 2 minutes
30 seconds for each position, the device will
function properly when operated.
0
o
Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use this unit within the allowable
temperature range of 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to
104°F) and a relative humidity of 30 % to 80 %.
Using this unit at a temperature or humidity
outside the allowable ranges could result not
only in malfunction but also serious impact on
the CMOS elements as small white spots may
be generated. Please exercise care during use.
o
To ensure the drip-proof performance, close the
caps and covers fully.
o
o
Avoid heavy rain and heavy water splashes.
If this camera recorder gets wet and there are
water droplets, wipe off with a dry cloth
immediately. If the camera recorder is turned
upside down or tilted at 15 ° or more while it is
wet, water may enter the camera recorder and
cause malfunction.
o
Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or
the colors may be incorrect if this unit is used
near a radio or television transmitting antenna,
in places where strong magnetic fields are
generated by transformers, motors, etc., or near
devices emitting radio waves, such as
o
If this camera recorder gets wet, water may
come out from the gaps. Do not carry it while it
is wet. Place it on a dry cloth for a while and let
it dry.
transceivers or cellular phones.
o
Use of wireless microphone near this unit
When a wireless microphone or wireless
microphone tuner is used near this unit during
recording, the tuner could pick up noise.
Carrying the Camera
o
Avoid using or placing this unit in the following
o
Do not drop or hit this unit against a hard object
places.
when transporting.
Places subject to extreme heat or cold
Places with excessive dirt or dust
Places with high humidity or moisture
Places subject to smoke or vapor such as near
a cooking stove
0
0
0
0
Power Saving
o
When this unit is not in use, be sure to set the
[POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF” in order to
reduce power consumption.
Places subject to strong vibrations or unstable
surfaces
0
0
In a parked car under direct sunlight or near a
heater for long hours
Maintenance
o
o
Do not place this unit at places that are subject
to radiation or X-rays, or where corrosive gases
occur.
o
Turn off the power before performing any
maintenance.
o
Wipe the external cabinet of the unit with a soft
cloth. Do not wipe the body with benzene or
thinner. Doing so may cause the surface to melt
or turn cloudy. When it is extremely dirty, soak
the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe
the body with it, and then use a clean cloth to
remove the detergent.
Protect this unit from getting wet when shooting
on a beach. In addition, salt and sand may
adheretothebody. Besuretocleantheunitafter
use.
o
Protect this unit against penetration of dust
when using it in a place subject to sandy dust.
Precautions for Proper Use
16
Rechargeable Battery
Lens
o
o
The batteries recommended for use with this
camera recorder are as follows.
U model : Digital 150 (Anton/Bauer)
E model : DUO-C198, DUO-C98 (IDX)
Please make use of one of the recommended
batteries.
This camera recorder is an interchangeable lens
camera. Please have the interchangeable lens
ready before use.
o
o
Read the “INSTRUCTIONS” of the
o
interchangeable lens to be attached to get a full
understanding before use.
Heavy batteries may fall off if they are not used
correctly.
Optical performance of lens
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color
divergence phenomena (magnification
chromatic aberration) may occur at the
periphery of the image. This is not a camera
malfunction.
Regular Inspection (Maintenance)
o
Under normal environment, dust will
accumulate on the camera recorder when it is
used over a long period. Dust may enter the
camera recorder especially if it is used outdoors.
This may affect the image and sound quality of
the camera recorder. Check and replace the fan
after every 9000 hours (suggested guideline).
You can check the usage time of the fan in
[System] B [System Information] B [Fan Hour].
o
Depending on the lens attached, there are
function limitations on the lens with this camera
recorder or the lens may not function properly.
The lens operation sound may be recorded.
Depending on the lens used, the approximate
distance to the subject may not be displayed.
There can be a large variation in the light
intensity during Auto Iris mode, Manual Iris
mode and zoom mode.
o
o
o
If the fan is used for more than 9000 hours
without replacement, “Fan Maintenance
Required” will be displayed every time you turn
on the power.
GPS u v
o
The GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites
are managed by the Department of State of the
U.S., and its precision may be altered
intentionally.
LCD Monitor and Viewfinder u v
o
The LCD monitor and viewfinder screen are
manufactured using high-precision technology.
Black or bright spots may appear on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen. This is not a
malfunction. These spots will not be recorded.
If you use this unit continuously for a long period
of time, the characters displayed in the
viewfinder may temporarily remain on the
screen. This phenomenon will not be recorded
to the recording media. They will not appear
after you turn the power off and then on again.
If you use this unit in a cold place, the images
may appear to lag on the screen, but this is not
a malfunction. Retained images are not
recorded on the SD card.
o
o
Perform positioning at an unobstructed location
with a clear view that is not indoors or blocked
by trees.
The time needed for obtaining the position
information may be longer and variation may
also be larger depending on the surrounding
environment and time of day.
o
o
o
o
This camera recorder uses the WGS 84 World
Geodetic System.
Signal from GPS satellites may be interrupted by
communication signal from electronic devices
such as mobile phones.
o
Make use of it in accordance with the regulations
of the country, region or location of use.
o
o
o
Do not press against the surface with force or
subject it to strong impact. Doing so may
damage or break the screens.
Encryption in Network Connection
o
Wireless LAN connections make use of an
encryption function.
Noise may appear in the viewfinder when
switching between the live video and playback
images.
This encryption is designed for commercially-
sold equipment, and it cannot be altered.
Due to the characteristic of the viewfinder
display device, colors may appear on the
images when you blink your eyes. It does not
affect the recorded images, SDI output, or HDMI
output.
Precautions for Proper Use
17
o
o
Do not use pencils or ballpoint pens to write on
the SD cards. Always use oil-based pens.
If you format (initialize) the SD card, all data
recorded on the card, including video data and
setup files, will be deleted.
SDHC/SDXC Cards
o
SDHC/SDXC card is referred to as “SD card” or
“recording media” in this manual.
o
o
This camera recorder saves the recorded
images and audio sound on the SD card (sold
separately) in the card slot.
o
You are recommended to use cards that are
formatted (initialized) on this camera recorder.
If the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded. In
addition, the remaining space on the card may
not increase even when files are deleted using
a PC.
The SD card may be damaged if the camera
recorder is not operated correctly. Formatting
(Initializing) the SD card may allow it to
operate correctly.
0
SD cards that have been formatted
(initialized) on other cameras, computers or
peripheral equipment may not operate
correctly. In this case, format (initialize) the SD
card on this camera recorder.
0
o
For details on the combinations of usable SD
card and format setting, refer to the following.
o
If you want to wipe out all information by
completely erasing the data, we recommend
either using commercially available software
that is specially designed for that purpose, or by
physically destroying the SD card with a
*
Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
hammer, etc. When formatting or erasing data
using the camera recorder, only the file
Handling of SD Cards
administration information is changed. The data
is not completely erased from the SD card.
Some commercially available SD cards may be
harder to be removed from this unit. Remove
them by hooking onto the groove on the cards.
o
The status indicator lights up in red when data
on the SD card is being accessed.
Do not remove the SD card during data access
(such as recording, playback, or formatting). Do
not turn off the power or remove the battery and
AC adapter during access either.
o
It will be easier to remove the cards after
several times.
0
o
o
Do not use or store the SD card in a place that
is subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
Do not place the SD card near locations that are
exposed to strong magnetic fields or radio
waves.
Do not stick any stickers on the cards.
0
o
o
Inserting the SD card incorrectly may result in
damage of this unit or the SD card.
We are not liable for any accidental loss of data
stored on the SD card. Please back up any
important data.
.
o
The SD card may pop out when it is being
removed. Be careful not to lose the card.
o
Make use of the SD card within the prescribed
conditions of use.
Copyright
o
Any recordings made on this camera recorder
that are played back for profit or public preview
may infringe on the rights of the owner of the
recordings.
Do not use it at the following locations.
Places that are subject to direct sunlight, high
humidity or corrosion, places near thermal
equipment, sandy or dusty places, or in a car
under the sun with the doors and windows
closed.
Do not use the recordings for purpose other than
personal enjoyment without prior consent from
the owner. And even for personal enjoyment,
you may not be able to record without
permission from the owner.
o
Do not bend or drop the SD card, or subject it to
strong impact or vibration.
o
o
o
Do not splash the SD card with water.
Do not dismantle or modify the SD card.
Do not touch the terminals with your hands or
with a metal object.
o
o
Do not allow dust, dirt, water, or foreign objects
to adhere to the terminals.
Do not remove the labels or stick other labels or
stickers on the SD cards.
Precautions for Proper Use
18
License Notices
Others
o
o
MPEG LA AVC
Do not insert objects other than the memory card
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR
OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT
RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
into the card slot.
o
o
o
o
Do not block the vent on the unit.
Blocking of the vent causes internal heating and
may lead to burns and fires.
Do not turn off the [POWER ON/OFF] switch or
remove the power cable during recording or
playback.
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
The camera recorder may not show stable
pictures for a few seconds immediately after the
power is turned on, but this is not a malfunction.
When the video signal output terminals are not
in use, put on the covers to prevent damage to
the terminals.
o
o
o
o
Do not drop this unit or subject it to strong impact
or vibration as it is a precision equipment.
Noise may appear in the image when switching
modes.
MPEG LA MPEG-2 Patent
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will
deteriorate.
o
ANY USE OF THIS UNIT IN ANY MANNER
OTHER THAN PERSONAL USE THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD
FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY
PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, LLC, 6312 S.
WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG
LA, LLC, 6312 S. Fiddlers Green circle, Suite
400E, Greenwood Village, Colorado 80111
U.S.A.
When the connectors that come with connector
covers are not in use, put on the covers to
prevent damage to the connectors.
This camera recorder makes use of fonts by
Fontworks Inc.
o
o
o
This camera recorder makes use of M+FONTS.
Use the built-in wireless LAN only in the country
and region where it was purchased.
And there are legal restrictions on the use and
outdoor use depending on the country and
region. Please be careful not to violate the law.
u v
Precautions for Proper Use
19
Operation Modes
This camera recorder has three operation modes - Camera mode, Media mode, and Remote Edit mode.
Camera Mode
Camera Input
Media Mode
[CANCEL/RESET]/[MENU/THUMB] Button
Press and hold [CAM/MEDIA]
Thumbnail Display
Playback
Normal Playback
[SET] Button (R)
[CAM/MEDIA]
Button
Trimming Playback
Execute
[Trim This Clip]
[USER4]
Button
Exit Trimming Operation
(Successful/Failed/Stopped)
Trimming in Progress
Exit/Cancel File Delete Operation (Successful/Failed/Stopped)
File Deletion in Progress
Exit FTP
Execute [Delete Clips]
Operation
(Actions)
(Successful)
Exit/Cancel FTP Operation (Successful/Failed/Stopped)
Execute [FTP Upload]
Press and hold [CAM/MEDIA]
FTP in Progress
FTP in Progress
[CAM/MEDIA] Button
Upon access via a web browser and selecting [Change] on the
[Change to Remote Edit Mode?] screen on the camera or the web browser
Remote Edit Mode
*
* Selecting a mode other than the Metadata Edit mode via the web
browser, or selecting [Exit] on the [Remote Edit Mode] screen
.
Operation Modes
20
Operation Mode
Camera Mode
Description
This is the camera shooting mode. The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
0
0
when the power is turned on.
Camera images are output to the viewfinder and LCD monitor. When a recordable
media is inserted, the camera recorder enters the recording standby mode. “STBY”
appears on the operation mode display area of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.
0
0
When [Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is set to “HD(SDI In)” or “SD(SDI
In)”, and the device is connected to the [HD/SD SDI IN] terminal, the SDI input
video is displayed on the LCD monitor or viewfinder.
Memo :
Playback of recording media is not possible in the Camera mode. However, you
0
can check the most recently recorded video clip.
Media Mode
This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded on the recording media.
When a playable recording media is inserted, the thumbnail or playback screen is
displayed on the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
0
0
Press and hold the [CAM/MEDIA] button to enter the Media mode when you are
not shooting in the Camera mode. Once the camera recorder is in Media mode,
thumbnails of the selected media slot are displayed.
0
Remote Edit
Mode
This mode enables the list display and editing of the recorded clip data through
access to the clip list display page via a web browser on a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
0
0
When you access via a web browser on a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, “It
is necessary to change the camera mode to "Remote Edit Mode". Change the
mode.” appears on the web browser. Also, “Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is
displayed on the display screen of the camera unit.
Selecting [Change] on the camera recorder and pressing the Set button switches
to the Remote Edit mode, and enables display of the clip list and editing of the clip
metadata.
Memo :
If you access via a web browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
0
or PC while recording is in progress, the message appears after recording stops.
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed
automatically, such as when playback stops.
0
Operation Modes
21
Names of Parts
A
B
C
D
E F G H I J
K
.
A
B
H
Speaker
[MIC LEVEL] Knob
For manual adjustment of the recording level for
the microphone that is attached to the [MIC IN]
terminal when the [AUDIO SELECT
CH1/2/3/4]-[MANUAL/AUTO] selection switch
is set to “MANUAL” and the [FRONT/REAR/
WIRELESS] selection switch is set to “FRONT”.
Viewfinder Left-Right Position Lock Ring
For loosening the ring and adjusting the position
of the viewfinder to the left or right.
C
D
Cable Clamp
I
Cross-shaped (JKHI)/[SET/USER13] Button
[ND FILTER] Switch
(R)
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the
appropriate range.
For operating the menu and cursor and for
confirming a setting, as well as for configuring
the settings for time code and user’s bit.
When in the Camera mode (menu is not
displayed), pressing the [SET/USER13]
button displays the status screen.
0
0
0
1: CLEAR, 2: 1/4, 3: 1/16, 4: 1/64
Memo :
0
It is recommended to use the ND filter to set the
lens aperture to less than F8.
When a function is assigned to the cross-
shaped button or [SET/USER13] button, it
functions as a user button. Initial setting for
[USER13]: Status
E
F
[REC] Button
Starts/stops recording.
[SHUTTER] Switch
Push the switch up to turn off the shutter, and
push it down to change the shutter speed.
J
K
Lens Lock Lever
G
[AWB/USER8] Switch
Push the switch up for it to function as a AWB
switch. When the [WHT.BAL PRST/A/B]
switch is set to “PRST”, AWB changes the
color temperature according to the preset
white balance, and applies Auto White
Balance when the switch is set to “A” or “B”.
0
Shoulder Pad
0
Push the switch down for it to function as a
user button. It can be assigned with a specific
menu function.
Names of Parts
22
W
V
L
M
N
O
P
Q
U
T
S
R
.
L
M
V
Slide Cover (For [USER6]/[USER7] Button)
Sliding the cover over the buttons helps to
prevent accidental operation.
Shoulder Belt Mount (x2)
For mounting a shoulder belt (sold separately).
Caution :
[USER6] Button
Be sure to use a shoulder belt with the strength
0
0
0
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
to withstand the weight of this camera recorder.
If the shoulder belt is not properly attached, the
camera recorder may fall and cause injuries.
Check the [INSTRUCTIONS] provided with the
shoulder belt before using.
N
[USER7] Button
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
W
Shoe
For mounting separately sold video lights and
accessories.
O
P
Back Tally Lamp (Handle)
[TALLY] Switch
Q
R
Wireless LAN Antenna Terminal u v
SD Card Cover Knob
S
T
SD Card Cover
Expansion slot
SSD Media Adapter (sold separately) such as
KA-MC100 can be inserted into the slot.
U
Wireless Audio Receiver Mounting Slot
(“UniSlot”)
A “UniSlot” wireless receiver can be attached to
this slot.
Memo :
When removing the cover, avoid losing the
0
screws, etc.
Check the “INSTRUCTIONS” of the wireless
receiver.
0
Names of Parts
23
G
H
Side Control Panel
[USER3] Button
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
b
a
Z
[USER0] Switch
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
A
B
C
D
E
Y
X
I
J
[GAIN H/M/L] Switch
For selecting the gain sensitivity level.
W
V
AUDIO INPUT
PRESET
F
G
H
GEN
F-RUN
R-RUN
REGEN
[MENU/THUMB] Button
DISPLAY
TC
UB
Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
0
Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [MENU/THUMB]
button is pressed and held down while the
menu screen is displayed.
0
I J K L M
N O P Q
R
S T U
.
A
[ONLINE/5] Button
Switches live streaming between ON/OFF.
0
Displays the menu screen when the button is
pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
0
You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button. Initial setting: Live
streaming
0
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
0
K
L
[POWER ON/OFF] Switch
B
C
[USER4] Button
Turns ON/OFF the power.
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
When the power is turning OFF, “P.OFF”
appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the
power again.
0
0
[LIGHT] Switch
For selecting the operation mode of the video
light connected to the [LIGHT] terminal.
[OUTPUT] Switch
For configuring the output signal when in the
Camera mode.
AUTO
The video light lights up only during
recording when the video light is
turned on.
:
CAM/AUTO KNEE ON: Turns “ON” Auto
0
0
0
Knee.
MANUAL The video light lights up or goes out
:
CAM/AUTO KNEE OFF: Turns “OFF” Auto
when the video light is turned on or
off.
Knee.
BARS/AUTO KNEE OFF: Outputs a color
bar.
D
[MONI SELECT] Switch/[CH SELECT] Switch
For configuring the audio monitor (speaker/
headphone) output with the combined use of
two switches.
M
N
O
[WHT.BAL PRST/A/B] Switch
For switching the white balance.
[MONITOR] Volume Adjustment Knob
For adjusting the volume of the audio monitor
(speaker/headphone).
E
F
[USER1] Button
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
[ALARM] Volume Adjustment Knob
For adjusting the warning alarm volume of the
audio monitor (speaker/headphone).
[USER2] Switch
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
Memo :
0
Whether the sound is to be muted or output
whenitisattheminimumlevelcanbeconfigured
in [Min. ALARM Level].
Memo :
Even when the function assigned to the
0
[USER2] switch is assigned to another user
buttonatthesametime, onlythe [USER2]switch
is enabled.
Names of Parts
24
P
U
[AUDIO INPUT CH1/2/3/4] Recording Level
Adjustment Knob
[TC PRESET] Button
When the [TC GEN] switch is set to “F-RUN” or
“R-RUN”, this camera recorder enters or exits
Preset mode when this button is pressed.
Upon entering Preset mode, an enlarged
display appears on the LCD monitor. Use the
cross-shaped button to move the cursor and
select a value. Next, press the [STATUS/SET]
button to preset the time code and the screen
returns to the original display.
For adjusting the recording level manually when
the [MANUAL/AUTO] selection switch is set to
“MANUAL”.
Q
R
S
T
[AUDIO CH1/2/3/4]-[MANUAL/AUTO]
Selection Switch
For configuring the recording level of each
channel to [MANUAL/AUTO].
Memo :
0
The UB mode is enabled only when [TC/UB] B
[AUDIO CH1/2/3/4]-[FRONT/REAR/
[UB Mode] is set to “Preset”.
WIRELESS] Selection Switch
For selecting the recording input path [FRONT/
REAR/WIRELESS] for each channel.
V
[B.LIGHT] Button
Sets the LCD monitor backlight.
Pressing the button each time switches the
mode as follows:
[TC DISPLAY] TC/UB Display Switch
Switches the display between time code and
user’s bit.
Dark B Normal B Bright B Off B Dark
W
X
[CAM/MEDIA] Button
Switches between the Camera mode and
Media mode.
[TC GEN] Time Code Generator Switch
For configuring the run mode of the time code.
Cross-shaped (JKHI)/[STATUS/SET] Button
F-RUN
The time code operates in the run
mode at all times. Synchronizes
with the external time code when an
external time code generator is
connected.
:
(R)
For operating the menu and cursor and for
confirming a setting, as well as for configuring
the settings for time code and user’s bit.
When in the Camera mode (menu is not
displayed), pressing the [STATUS/SET]
button displays the status screen.
0
0
0
R-RUN
The time code operates in the run
mode while recording is in
progress. When the SD card is
replaced, recording continues from
where it last stopped using the
previous card.
:
When a function is assigned to the cross-
shaped button, it functions as a user button.
REGEN The time code operates in the run
:
mode while recording is in
progress. When the SD card is
Y
[ACCESS] Lamp
The indicator lights up in green when the
recording media is being accessed.
replaced, recording starts from the
last time code recorded on the
Memo :
0
current SD card.
Regardless of whether a recording media has
been inserted, the access lamp will light up for
about 5 seconds when the power is turned on.
Z
[CANCEL/RESET] Button
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
Performs reset when the TC mode or UB
mode is being configured during enlarged
display on the LCD monitor.
0
0
Names of Parts
25
a
Side Terminal Section
[MENU/THUMB] Button
Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
0
Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [MENU/THUMB]
button is pressed and held down while the
menu screen is displayed.
0
F
K
Displays the menu screen when the button is
pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
0
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
0
b
[DISPLAY] Button
Press the [DISPLAY] button to switch to the
display screen during normal screen display
(when the menu screen is not displayed).
0
A B C D
E
F
G
H
I
J
.
A
[VIDEO OUT] Terminal
Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [DISPLAY] button
is pressed while the menu screen is
displayed.
0
B
C
D
E
[GENLOCK] Terminal
[TC OUT] Terminal
[TC IN] Terminal
[SLOT SELECT] Button
Switches the active card slot during shooting
and playback.
F
G
H
Card Slot A/B
Access Lamp A/B
[VF] Terminal
[LENS] Lens Connection Terminal
[MIC IN] Terminal (XLR 5-pin)
I
J
K
[LIGHT] Terminal
Names of Parts
26
Rear Terminal
H
I
[HD/SD SDI OUT1/2] Terminal
R
[HD/SD SDI IN] Terminal
Q
O
P
N
J
K
[REMOTE] Terminal
M
[DC OUT] (LAN) Terminal
A
B
C
L
K
Supplies power to devices such as a mobile
router that is connected to the [LAN] terminal.
Memo :
0
J
I
D
The pin configurations for C and K are the
same.
E
L
M
N
[HDMI] Output Terminal
F
G H
.
[LAN] Terminal
A
Back Tally Lamp (Rear)
For connecting the LAN cable.
[HOST] USB Host Terminal
For connecting a USB adapter according to the
intended purpose when you are connecting the
unit to a network.
B
C
[AUDIO INPUT1/2] Switch
[DC OUT] Terminal (Rear)
Caution :
0
Supplies power to an externally-connected
wireless receiver.
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is configured to “High-
Speed”, network cannot be used via wireless
LAN u v or the [HOST] terminal (USB).
Configure as follows in this case.
Pin N1umber UNREG GND
Signal Name
4
3
1
2
2
3
4
NC
0
Set [Network] B [Connection Setup] B [USB/
NC
Int. WLAN] to “Off”. u v
0
UNREG +12V
Unplug the USB network adapter
.
Note that camera operation will come to an
emergency stop and the power will turn off if the
above steps are not performed.
Memo :
The pin configurations for C and K are the
0
File data may be damaged if this happens while
recording is in progress.
same.
Caution :
Do not connect it to any device other than an
O
P
0
Battery Loading Folder
external wireless receiver.
The shape varies across the U and E models.
*
The E model is used in the illustration here.
D
E
[PHONE] Terminal (Φ3.5 mm)
[DC INPUT] Terminal
Expansion Unit Terminal
Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply. For
connecting a separately sold AC adapter.
Terminal for connecting a FS-790 (sold
separately) or other units.
Memo :
0
F
G
[AUDIO INPUT1/2] Terminal (XLR 3-pin)
Remove the battery loading folder when using
this terminal.
[AUDIO OUT] Terminal (XLR 5-pin)
Outputs audio signals of AUDIO CH1/CH2 or
CH3/CH4.
Q
R
D-TAP terminal (IDX)v x
D-TAP terminal (Anton/Bauer)u w
Audio signals are output according to the
setting in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [AUDIO
OUT Ch.].
Names of Parts
27
L
M
[ZEBRA] Switch
Electronic Viewfinder u v
Displays the zebra pattern.
ON: Turns on zebra pattern; OFF: Turns off
zebra pattern; MOMENT: “Turns on zebra
pattern” for a specific time interval while the
switch is being pressed.
A
B
C
Q
P
O
N
M
[TALLY] Front Tally Switch
For configuring the front tally lamp.
HIGH: Bright; OFF: Light off; LOW: Dark
J
K
L
N
O
P
Q
[BRIGHT] Knob
I
H
G
D
E
F
For adjusting the brightness of the viewfinder.
[CONTRAST] Knob
For adjusting the contrast of the viewfinder.
.
[CHROMA] Knob
A
Microphone Holder Lock Knob
Microphone Holder
For adjusting the color of the viewfinder.
B
C
[PEAKING] Knob
For adjusting the outline of the viewfinder.
Front Tally Lamp
D
Eyepiece Focus Ring
For adjusting the visibility.
E
F
Electronic Viewfinder
Eyepiece
Prevents external light from entering the
viewfinder screen and cameraman’s vision.
G
H
[USER1] Button (VF)
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
Initial setting: VF Display
[USER2] Button (VF)
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
Initial setting: Expanded Focus
I
J
Slide Stopper
Use it when mounting or unmounting the
viewfinder.
[MIRROR] Switch
Flips the image.
L/R: Flips horizontally; OFF: Normal display; B/
T: Flips vertically
K
[B.LIGHT] Switch
For configuring the brightness of the viewfinder.
H: Bright; N: Normal; L: Dark
Names of Parts
28
Basic System Diagram
.
Shoulder Belt
Wireless
Microphone
Receiver
Video Light
Camera
Recorder
[LIGHT]
Headphone
Microphone
[SDI OUT]
SDI Cable BNC
[MIC IN]
Composite
Monitor
Monitor
Cable BNC
Focus Manual Controller
[AUDIO
INPUT
Audio cable XLR
HDMI Cable
HZ-FM13(FUJINON)
[PHONE]
[SDI IN]
1/2]
HZ-FM15(CANON)
Zoom Servo
Controller
[UniSlot]
UniSlot Wireless Receiver
USB Network Adapter
HZ-ZS13B
EVF
[HOST]
u v
[Expansion slot]
SSD Media Adapter
2/3Zoom Lens
(KA-MC100)
Wireless LAN Antenna u v
H.265/HEVC Streaming
Adapter (KA-EN200)
Studio
Battery Mount
U model
Viewfinder
(VF-HP900G)
U model: Gold Mount
E model:V Mount
Battery Charger
(Anton/Bauer)
Battery
Standard Package
(Digital 150)
E model
[REMOTE]
Battery Charger
(IDX)
Tripod Base
KA-551U
Battery
(DUO-C198, DUO-C98)
AC Adapter
Carrying
Case
XLR 4-pin
Tripod
SD Card
SD Card Reader
RM-LP20
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
LOCK
O
P
E
R
A
T
E
MODE
OFF
FULL
GAIN
S
H
U
T
T
E
R
1
/
2
5
0
1
/
5
0
0
1
/
1
0
0
0
+
6
d
B
+
9
d
B
+12dB
+1
ALC
1
/120
/100
A
1
/
2
0
I
0
0
+
0
3
d
B
8
d
B
1
N
O
R
M
L
E
E
d
B
L
E
V
E
L
G
A
M
M
A
L
E
V
E
L
G
A
M
M
A
K
N
E
E
P
O
I
N
T
A
U
T
O
K
N
E
E
W
H
I
T
E
B
A
L
A
N
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
P
R
E
S
E
T
F
A
W
A
W
A
A
W
B
Remote Control Unit
Power Wafer
U model : KA-PW790AG
E model
WHITE
R
P
A
I
N
T
P
A
I
N
T
A
U
T
O
WHITE
B
CALL
T
ALL
Y
PREVIEW
IRIS
A
UT
O
MANUAL
M
A
S
T
E
R
B
L
A
C
K
CLOSE
OPEN
RM-LP20G
: KA-PW790VG
Fiber Camera Unit
Remote Control Unit
FS-900CAM
KA-F790
Camera Remote Interface
Cable
RM-LP25U/RM-LP55U
VC-P790RMG
Headset
Fiber Cable
Headset
RTS/Clear-COM
Interface
Fiber Camera Remote Control
Composite Video Out for
Teleprompter
Unit
FS-900BS
RM-FP790
Basic System Diagram
29
Attaching the Viewfinder (Supplied)
Settings and Adjustments
Before Use
u v
2,4
Attaching the Lens (Sold Separately)
This camera recorder can be attached with a B4
mount lens.
Caution :
3
Check that the camera recorder is turned off
before attaching the lens. Attaching the lens with
the power turned on can result in accident and
malfunction.
0
When detaching the lens, do not touch the
optical filter or allow dust to adhere to the optical
filter.
0
.
1
Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch of the
camera recorder to “OFF”.
2
3
Loosen the viewfinder left-right position
lock ring.
3
Slide the viewfinder in the direction of the
arrow to attach it.
Memo :
1,4
Slide Stopper
.
1
2
Loosen the lens lock lever.
Detach the body cap.
.
To detach the viewfinder, pull the slide stopper
up and slide it in opposite direction of the arrow.
0
Do not lose the body cap, keep it properly.
0
3
Attach the zoom lens such that the pin
4
Turn the viewfinder left-right position lock
ring to secure the position of the
viewfinder.
matches the hole of the mounting area.
4
5
Tighten the lens lock lever.
5
6
Attach the viewfinder cable to the [VF]
Connect the lens cable to the [LENS]
terminal.
terminal.
Pin the viewfinder cable to the clamp.
6
Attach the lens cable to the clamp.
Memo :
Tighten the lens lock lever completely. If it is not
0
fully tightened, the lens may drop or the back
focus may be out of alignment.
For details on the lens, please refer to the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the lens used.
It is necessary to adjust the back focus before
use.
0
0
Settings and Adjustments Before Use
30
Attaching the Microphone (Sold
Separately)
Attaching the Video Light (Sold
Separately)
You can attach a separately sold microphone to the
Video lights or accessories can be attached to the
accessory shoe of this camera recorder.
The accessory shoe is of the 1/4-inch screw type.
To make use of a slide shoe, attach the supplied
cold shoe unit.
microphone holder.
The microphone that is sold separately uses a
phantom power supply.
Attaching the Cold Shoe Unit
1, 3
2
1
Remove the plate from the cold shoe unit.
While lifting the catch, slide the plate out.
Plate
Catch
.
4
2
Attach the cold shoe unit to the shoe of this
camera recorder using the four screws
supplied.
Attach the plate to the cold shoe unit.
Push the catch up from the bottom and slot the
plate into the guide in the direction of the arrow.
.
1
Turn the knob on the microphone holder
counterclockwise to loosen and open the
microphone holder.
3
2
3
4
Place the microphone in the microphone
holder.
Plate
Turn the knob on the microphone holder
clockwise to secure the microphone.
Connect the microphone cable to the [MIC
IN] terminal.
Guide
.
5
6
Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.
Perform the settings for the phantom mic
correctly.
Attaching the Video Light
The [LIGHT] terminal (D-tap) of this camera
recorder can be connected with a video light (DC
12 V, maximum power consumption 50 W u
w x and DC 12V, 2A v).
Connect the [LIGHT] terminal after attaching the
accessory shoe.
When the [LIGHT] switch is set to “AUTO”, the light
goes on only during recording in tandem with the
camera. When it is set to “MANUAL”, the light goes
on or turns off respectively when the video light
power is turned on or off.
Settings and Adjustments Before Use
31
Attaching the Wireless LAN Antennas
Adjusting the Position of the Shoulder
Pad
(Supplied) u v
Adjust the position of the shoulder pad back and
Attach the wireless LAN antenna by turning it in the
clockwise direction. Hold the base while attaching
the antenna.
forth.
1
2
Release the lock of the lock lever and adjust
the position of the shoulder pad back and
forth.
Lock the lock lever and check that the
shoulder pad is fixed.
Lock Lever
.
.
Caution :
Applying force to the wireless LAN antenna or
0
yanking it may damage the antenna so please
use caution when using the antenna.
If it is damaged, replacement is chargeable even
during the warranty period.
(Part number: T9A-0095-00)
Use the antenna holders without removing
them.
0
Attaching the Tripod (Sold Separately)
Mount this camera recorder after attaching the
KA-551U tripod base unit (sold separately) to the
tripod.
To prevent the camera recorder from falling off,
which may result in injuries or damages, read the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of KA-551U as well as that of
the tripod to be used to attach the camera recorder
securely.
Caution :
If the camera recorder exceeds the weight limit
of the tripod, do not mount it on the tripod.
Use the tripod on a stable surface.
0
0
Settings and Adjustments Before Use
32
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)
Power Supply
Use the AC adapter (sold separately) to operate
the camera recorder with AC power.
To use this camera recorder, you can attach a
battery pack or connect an AC adapter to it.
Recommended AC Adapter
:
:
:
Tandem 150 (Anton/Bauer)
IA-300a (IDX)
u w
v
x
Caution :
AC-100 (IDX)
Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”
before changing the power supply that operates
this camera recorder.
0
0
0
Memo :
For the type of AC adapter to be attached on a
battery mount, check the method of attachment
0
Use the camera recorder and peripheral
equipments within the rated output of the AC
adapter.
To connect other peripheral equipment, do so
under the following conditions.
o
Attaching Core Filter Beforehand v
Attach the core filter (large) to the DC cable of the
AC adapter before using the AC adapter.
0
Keep the total power consumption of the
peripheral equipments under 35 W when
using the recommended battery.
Release the
stopper.
5 cm
Wind twice
0
Keep the total power consumption of the
peripheral equipments under 65 W when
using Tandem 150 (recommended AC
adapter). u w
To be connected to the AC Adapter.
.
0
Keep the total power consumption of the
peripheral equipments under 50 W when
using AC-100 (recommended AC adapter).
1
Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to
the [DC INPUT] terminal of the camera
recorder.
x
The power consumption of the [LIGHT] terminal
0
Check that the power of this unit and that of the
AC adapter are both set to “OFF”, followed by
connecting according to the diagram.
is below 50 W. Keep the total power
consumption of the peripheral equipments
excluding the [LIGHT] terminal under 35 W
when using the terminal. If the total power
consumption of the peripheral equipments
exceeds the rating, the power to the [LIGHT],
[DC OUT] (rear) and [DC OUT] (LAN) terminals
is automatically cut off. This is not a malfunction.
Use peripheral equipments with lower power
consumption then turn on the power of this
camera recorder again. u w x
To check the power consumption, refer to the
Power screen of the Status screen.
0
0
If the voltage of the [DC INPUT] becomes 12 V
or less, the USB adapter connected to the
[HOST] terminal cannot be used. Check the
power supply and the peripheral equipments,
and turn on the power of this camera recorder
again.
.
2
Turn on the power of the AC adapter,
followed by setting the [POWER ON/OFF]
switch of this unit to “ON”.
Use a power supply of 12 V/ 2A or below for the
[LIGHT] terminal.
0
Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.
The [LIGHT] terminal, DC OUT terminal
(rear)/DC OUT (LAN) terminal and the D-tap
terminal of the battery loading folder cannot be
used at the same time. v
Caution :
Do not insert or remove the DC cable during
0
recording.
Do not use power supply of high voltage
fluctuation, containing noise such as ripple, or
with insufficient capacity.
0
Power Supply
33
Precautions for the Battery Operation
Using a Battery Pack
Recommended Batteries
Do not remove the battery when the [POWER
ON/OFF] switch is “ON”.
0
0
0
Do not insert or remove the DC cable when the
battery is in use.
U model : Digital 150 (Anton/Bauer)
E model : DUO-C198, DUO-C98 (IDX)
Leaving the camera recorder unused with the
battery attached will deplete the battery power
even when you set the [POWER ON/OFF]
switch to “OFF”. Remove the battery if you are
not using the camera recorder.
*
Models with an E suffix are for the European
market and the UL Listing mark is not applicable.
Caution :
Make use of the recommended batteries. Heavy
0
batteries may fall off if not used correctly.
For details on how to charge the battery, please
refer to the “INSTRUCTIONS” of the battery in
use.
Attaching/Detaching the Battery (U Model)
0
Use the following battery type.
Gold Mount
0
1
Align the battery guide pins (x3) with the
battery adapter guide hole, and insert them
directly.
Battery Operating Time
The following are the approximate times for
continuous operation on fully-charged batteries.
Continuous
Guide Hole (x3)
Guide Pins
Battery
Recording Time (At
25 °C)
Digital 150 (U model)
DUO-C198 (E model)
DUO-C98 (E model)
Approx. 3.1 hrs
Approx. 4.0 hours
Approx. 2.0 hours
Memo :
Actual operating times may differ depending on
the age of the battery, charging condition, and
operating environment.
0
Operating time is shortened in cold
environment.
0
0
.
The operating time may shorten when power
zoom is used, accessories are connected, or
when the LCD monitor is frequently used.
2
Slide the battery in the direction indicated
by the arrow until a “click” sound is heard.
Memo :
If the guide pins are not inserted straight, the
0
battery will not be attached correctly.
3
Detaching the Battery
Press down the release lever and slide the
battery toward you to detach it from the camera
recorder.
Release Lever
Battery
.
Power Supply
34
Attaching/Detaching the Battery (E Model)
Battery Warning Settings
Follow the steps below to configure the warning
voltage or warning level when the remaining
battery level is running low.
Use the following battery type.
V Mount
0
1
Attach the battery.
Face the terminal downward and attach the V
mount of the battery onto the V mount
attachment bracket of the camera recorder.
1
Select “Voltage” or “Capacity%” in
[System] B [Battery] B [Type]
“Near End (V)” and “End (V)” are enabled
when “Voltage” is selected.
0
0
2
Press down the battery until it snaps into
“Near End (%)” and “End (%)” are enabled
place.
when “Capacity%” is selected.
2
Configure “Near End” and “End”
V Mount
V Mount
Configures the setting at which the power is
shut down automatically after the warning is
activated.
0
Attachment Bracket
3
Check in advance to ensure that the
connected battery is in order and the
settings are appropriate
If the time is different from what has been
0
anticipated, repeat the steps in 2 and 3.
.
Memo :
3
Detaching the Battery
When the battery that is connected does not
Press down the release lever and slide the
battery upward to detach it from the camera
recorder.
0
support communication, “Near End (V)” and
“End (%)” are enabled even when “Capacity%”
is selected.
Release Button
Battery
.
Precautions for Batteries
Store the battery in a cool and dry place when
not in use. Do not expose the battery to high
temperatures (such as in a car under direct
sunlight). This will cause battery leakage and
shorten the battery life.
0
Operating time is shortened if the battery
terminal is dirty.
0
0
If the operating time shortens drastically even
after charging, the battery may be reaching the
end of its life. Replace the battery with a new
one.
Power Supply
35
Menu Screen
Power Status Display
Viewfinder Screen and LCD Monitor
The power status is displayed on the display and
menu screens.
Display Settings
Display
Description
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out,
the battery mark appears hollow,
and “RES” (yellow) is displayed.
B 14.4V
B 100min
C 30%
4 RES
Memo :
0
You can set the display using
[LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B
[Battery].
.
Warnings by Lamp and Warning Tone
Warning status is indicated by tally lamp and
warning tone.
Currently powered by DC power.
G
The front and back tally lamps of the camera
recorder appear blinking.
0
A warning display when the supply
H
voltage of the DC power is low.
The warning tone is output from the speaker or
[PHONE] terminal.
0
Memo :
0
Adjust the volume level using the [ALARM]
volume adjustment knob.
The battery mark that indicates the battery level
may not appear depending on the battery in use.
When the battery that is connected does not
support communication, the voltage is
Memo :
0
If you continue to use the camera recorder while
0
displayed regardless of the setting.
the power warning is displayed, the camera
recorder will stop automatically when the battery
or supplied voltage from the DC power becomes
lower.
Display Screen
Caution :
The remaining battery power and time are
0
displayed as they are from the battery
SDI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
100min
1080 /30p
information. Accuratedatamaynotbedisplayed
depending on the battery condition. Replace the
battery as soon as possible when the remaining
battery power and time are low.
50in
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
COMPRESS
ITU709
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
Power Status Display
36
Turning Off the Power
Turning On/Off the Power
Sets the camera recorder to the recording standby or
stop mode.
Turning On the Power
1
2
Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”.
Remove the battery and the power to the [DC
INPUT] terminal (when not in use for a long
time).
Caution :
Do not set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”
0
0
0
during recording. Check that the operation mode
display is “STBY” or “STOP” before you turn off the
power.
If you have mistakenly set the [POWER ON/OFF]
switch to “OFF” during recording, wait for 5
seconds or more before you turn on the power
again.
.
1
Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON”.
The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
and is ready for shooting.
When turning off the power, first set the [POWER
ON/OFF] switch of the camera recorder to “OFF”.
Do not remove the battery or turn off the AC power
while the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to “ON”.
Memo :
The camera recorder always start up in Camera
0
mode when the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to
“ON”. Use the [CAM/MEDIA] button at the side of
the camera recorder to switch mode.
Turning On/Off the Power
37
Initial Settings
Memo :
The menus and messages on the screen of the
0
When the power is first turned on, the Initial Setting
screen for performing the initial settings in the
camera recorder appears.
LCD monitor or viewfinder are displayed in the
selected language.
Set the date/time of the built-in clock in the [Date/
Time] screen.
2
Select a language using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the [STATUS/SET]
button (R).
All operations are disabled until initial settings are
complete.
A self-diagnosis screen appears.
.
3
Ensure the lens cap is attached, and press
the [STATUS/SET] button (R).
.
Self-diagnosis starts.
0
0
A progress bar appears, and “Complete
Diagnosis” appears when the diagnosis is
complete.
Memo :
It is recommended to use the AC adapter as the
0
power supply.
Attach the lens cap.
0
1
Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON”.
A language selection screen appears.
For U models
0
.
For E models
0
.
Memo :
It takes about 6 minutes to complete the
0
diagnosis. During the diagnosis, do not operate
or turn off the camera recorder.
.
Initial Settings
38
Changing the Time after Initial Setting
4
Press the [STATUS/SET] button (R) after
confirming the exit screen.
Setting the Date/Time
The [Date/Time] screen appears.
For U models
0
1
Select [System] B [Date/Time].
The [Date/Time] screen appears.
2
A
Set the date and time.
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
Change the values with the cross-shaped
B
button (JK).
3
Press the Set button (R) after setting is
.
complete.
For E models
0
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
Changing the Display Style
You can change the display style of the date/time
on the menu.
Setting the Date Display (Date Style)
.
The date display can be changed in [System] B
[Date Style].
5
A
Set the time zone and date/time.
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button
Setting the Time Display (Time Style)
(HI) and select the setting item.
The time display can be changed in [System] B
[Time Style].
Change the values with the cross-shaped
B
button (JK).
6
Press the [STATUS/SET] button (R) after
setting is complete.
Date/Time Display in Each Operation
Mode
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
During Camera mode:
Memo :
Time of the built-in clock is displayed.
During Media mode:
The configured date/time data can be displayed
0
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen and
be recorded to a recording media.
Shooting date/time of the clip being played back is
displayed.
The value of the year can be set in the range of
“2000” to “2099”.
0
0
0
The configured date/time data is saved in the
built-in battery even if the power is turned off.
If the date/time data is no longer retained, the
built-in battery is dead. For replacement of the
built-in battery, please contact the local dealers
in your area.
Initial Settings
39
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Media Mode
Displays on the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
This is the screen display during clip playback in
Media Mode.
0
0
The display switches with every press of the
[DISPLAY] button.
You can display the camera status, recording
media information, zebra pattern, and various
markers in the video image on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen during shooting.
(Display off B Display on B Display off)
Memo :
When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT2]/
[HDMI OUT]/[VIDEO OUT] B [Character] is set
to “On”, the display screen and menu screen are
also displayed in the video image of the video
signal output terminal.
0
Display Off
1000/2000
282min
1920x1080
30p 50M
00:00:00.00
Jan 24,2018
12 :34 :56
Display Screen
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Camera Mode
Display On
Use the [DISPLAY] button to switch the display
mode of the LCD monitor.
0
.
(Display off B Display on B Enlarged display B
Display off)
Use the user button that is assigned with “VF
Display” to switch the viewfinder screen.
(Display off B Display on B Display off)
Press the [STATUS/SET] button to switch to the
status screen.
0
0
Display Off
Electronic
Viewfinder
SDI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
100min
1080 /30p
50min
5 . 6 f
12 :34 :56
t
LCD
COMPRESS
ITU709
Monitor
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
1
K
5600
ISO
F2. 8
B
102400
Display On
Enlarged Display
.
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
40
Status Screen
Remote Edit Mode Screen
This screen allows you to check the current
This is a mode for accessing the page for editing
the metadata that is recorded in a clip via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
0
0
0
0
settings.
To display the status screen, press the
[STATUS/SET] button in the normal screen.
Press the [STATUS/SET] button to switch to the
status screen.
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button at each status
screen (other than the [Camera] and [Power]
screen) to enter the setting screen.
0 Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to switch
between the screens.
Remote Edit Mode
USER Switch Set
Exit
.
Warning Display
Warning display is displayed in the display screen
(Camera mode, Media mode).
SDI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
100min
1080 /30p
50min
5 . 6 f t
Camera
12 :34 :56
LCD/VF
COMPRESS
ITU709
Record Format
Audio Input
Audio Output
Video
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
Power
Warning Display Area
.
Planning Metadata
Network
LAN
USB/Int. WLAN u v
USB w x
Streaming
Upload
.
*
These are screen examples. The contents
displayed are different depending on the model
and settings.
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
41
Adjusting the Viewfinder
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
and Viewfinder
You can monitor video images on this camera
recorder using the viewfinder, LCD monitor, or
both.
You can change the brightness and peaking of the
viewfinder screen according to your usage
conditions.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
1
2
2
You can change the brightness of the LCD monitor
according to your usage condition.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
3
Adjusting the Brightness
Use [LCD/VF] B [LCD Bright] to adjust the
brightness of the LCD monitor.
4
.
1
Loosen the fastening rings on the left and
right sides of the viewfinder to adjust the
horizontal position, followed by tightening
the rings.
Loosen the viewfinder front-back position
lock ring. Adjust the front and back
positions then tighten the ring.
Adjusting the Outline
Use [LCD/VF] B [LCD Peaking] to adjust the
outline of the LCD monitor.
2
Adjusting the Contrast
Use [LCD/VF] B [LCD Contrast] to adjust the
contrast of the LCD monitor.
3
4
Adjust the angle of the viewfinder to a
position that enables easy viewing.
Adjust the visibility using the eyepiece
focus ring.
Adjusting the LCD RGB Gain
Adjust until the viewfinder image appears
sharp.
Use [LCD/VF] B [LCD RGB Gain] to adjust the
R/G/B gain of the LCD monitor.
Configuring the Backlight
Configure the backlight using the [B.LIGHT] button
located on the side operation panel.
Dark B Normal B Bright B Off B Dark
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
42
o
Flipping up the Eyepiece
5
Adjust the brightness, outline and contrast
of the viewfinder screen.
Flipping up the eyepiece provides a better view
of the entire image.
Push the lock upward to flip up the eyepiece.
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [BRIGHT] knob to adjust the brightness
of the viewfinder.
Adjusting the Outline
Use the [PEAKING] knob to adjust the outline of
the viewfinder.
Lock
Adjusting the Contrast
Use the [CONTRAST] knob to adjust the
contrast of the viewfinder.
.
o
Flipping up the VF Barrel
Adjusting the Color
Use the [CHROMA] knob to adjust the color of
the viewfinder.
Flipping up the viewfinder barrel enables
viewing of the image directly. The image will be
inverted in this case. Press the [MIRROR]
switch to display the image correctly.
Push the lock upward to flip up the viewfinder
barrel.
Configuring the Luminance
Use the [B.LIGHT] switch to configure the
luminance level.
H: Bright; N: Normal; L: Dark
Adjusting the VF RGB gain
Use [LCD/VF] B [VF RGB Gain] to adjust the R/
G/B gain level of the viewfinder.
Lock
Displaying in Black and White
The display can be switched to black-and-white
by configuring [LCD/VF] B [VF Color] to “Off”.
.
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
43
Adjusting the Back Focus
When the lens is attached for the first time, adjust
the back focus of the lens if the focus is not clear
when it is zoomed to the telephoto or wide-angle
end.
The Siemens Star Chart is most suitable as the
subject.
0
Siemens Star Chart
.
1
Place an object at approximately 3 m away
from the camera recorder.
2
3
4
5
6
Open up the iris.
Set the lens to the telephoto end.
Turn the focusing ring to adjust the focus.
Set the lens to the wide-angle end.
Loosen the F.B. locking screw of the lens
and turn the back focus adjustment ring to
adjust the focus.
7
8
Repeat the steps from 3 to 6 to adjust the
focus at both ends of the zoom.
After determining the position of the back
focus adjustment ring, tighten the F.B.
locking screw.
Memo :
For details, please refer to the
0
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the lens.
Adjusting the Back Focus
44
Assignment of Functions
to User Buttons
You can assign functions to the following buttons
and use them as user buttons.
By assigning functions to the buttons, the usability
of the camera recorder can be enhanced.
Perform settings in the menu items corresponding
to each button.
Button
[USER0] Switch
[USER1] Button
[USER2] Switch
[USER3] Button
[USER4] Button
[ONLINE/5] Button
[USER6] Button
[USER7] Button
Menu Item
[USER0]
.
[USER1]
[USER2]
[USER3]
[USER4]
[USER5]
[USER6]
[USER7]
1
Assign functions to the buttons from the
menu.
Configure each item to the user buttons in
[Camera Function] B [User Switch Set].
Memo :
Operations of the user buttons are interlocked
0
with the menu settings.
[AWB/USER8] Switch [USER8]
When the menu screen is displayed, these
buttons function as the menu operation buttons.
0
[USER9 ▲]
[USER10 ▼]
[USER11 ◀]
[USER12 ▶]
[J] Button
[K] Button
[H] Button
[I] Button
[SET/USER13] Button [USER13 ●(Front)]
[USER1] Button (VF)
[USER2] Button (VF)
[USER1 (VF)]
[USER2 (VF)]
[LENS RET]
[RET] Button on the
Lens
Assignment of Functions to User Buttons
45
When [Tally System] is set to “Internal”
0
Tally Lamp
Front Tally/
Back Tally
Menu Setting
This is the indicator lamp for recording and
Live
Rec/Live
warning.
Rec
Streaming Streaming
The operation changes according to the menu
settings.
Information Warning
J
on Camera
Alarm
The lamp blinks when the battery or remaining
space on the recording media is low. (Camera
mode only)
Recorder
Functions
Camera
Recorder
Recording
Status
o
Recording
-
-
R
R
R
R
*
Configure in [System] B [Front Tally]/[Back
Special
Recording
in Progress
*1
Tally].
Live
Live
Streaming Streaming
-
R
R
Back Tally Lamp
(Handle)
Status
in Progress
When [Tally System] is set to “Studio”
0
Front
Tally/
Front Tally Back Tally
Back Tally
[TALLY] Switch
HIGH or
ON
OFF
-
LOW
Information Warning
J
*&ꢀ
on Camera
Recorder
Functions
Alarm
-
o
Back Tally Lamp
(Rear)
Input from CALL
-
-
-
o
*2
Remote
Control
Unit
PROGRA
R
M
PREVIEW
R
Front Tally
Lamp
Lights up
:
:
:
R
J
o
Blinks four times in 1 second
Blinks once in 1 second
.
*1 Paused state during special recording ([Clip
Continuous]).
*2 Back tally only
Memo :
Blinking takes priority over lighting up.
0
Tally Lamp
46
Usable SSD Media
Refer to the “Instruction Manual” of the SSD Media
Adapter that is inserted into the expansion slot to
mount a compatible SSD media.
Recording Media
This camera recorder saves recorded audio sound
and videos except those in “HD EXT(SSD)” quality
to the SD card (sold separately) in the card slot.
Caution :
Please refer to the product information page on
our website for a list of SSD media that have
been tested for compatibility.
0
Audio sound and videos recorded in the “HD
EXT(SSD)” mode will be saved to the SSD media
(sold separately) in the KA-MC100 SSD Media
Adapter (sold separately) that is inserted into the
expansion slot.
Estimated Recordable Time of SD Cards
The estimated recordable time is only a guide.
Differences may occur depending on the SD card
in use and the battery condition.
Usable Cards
Format Setting and Usable SD Card
Combinations
The recordable time varies according to the
settings in [System], [WFormat], [WResolution],
[WBit Rate] and [YResolution].
0
Usable SD
System
Format
Bit Rate
Card
The following is the recording time during audio
4ch recording. The recording time is longer for
2ch recording.
0
High-
Speed
70M (XHQ),
UHS-I U3 or
higher
50M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ),
35M (UHQ)
QuickTime
(H.264)
HD
70M
UHS-I U1 or
higher, or
Class 10 or
higher
(XHQ),
(XHQ),
SD,
50M
HD,
HD + Web
(Web)
System
Format
HD + Web
(Web)
HD + Web (HD)
50M (XHQ)
35M (UHQ)
QuickTime (H.264)
1920x1080,
720x480,
QuickTime
(MPEG2),
MXF
Resolution 1920x1080
960x540
480x270
1280x720
720x576
35M (HQ),
25M (SP)
UHS-I U1 or
higher, or
Class 6 or
higher
XHQ
Bit Rate
XHQ
UHQ
HQ
HQ
LP
(MPEG2)
(70M)
(50M)
17
Exchange
12M (LP),
8M (LP)
8GB
16GB
12
24
24
48
96
80
160
240
480
480
960
1920
3840
7680
(U model)
35
MP4
12M (LP),
8M (LP)
32GB
48
96
192
384
70
320
640
1280
2560
960
1920
3840
(H.264)
(E model)
64GB*
128GB*
256GB*
140
280
560
192
384
768
SD
-
-
UHS-I U1 or
higher, or
Class 4 or
higher
Web
7680 15360
-
-
(Unit: minute)
Caution :
Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
0
Recording Media
47
Estimated Recordable Time of SSD
Media
System
Format
HD
QuickTime (MPEG2),
MXF (MPEG2)
1920x1080,
Exchange,
MP4 (H.264)
The estimated recordable time is only a guide.
Differences may occur depending on the SSD
media in use and condition of the battery.
Resolution 1440x1080, 1440x1080 1920x1080 1280x720
The recordable time varies according to the
1280x720
HQ
24
0
settings in [System], [
Bit Rate].
Frame Rate], and
Bit Rate
8GB
SP
32
LP (12M)
80
LP (8M)
120
[
16GB
32GB
64GB*
128GB*
256GB*
48
96
192
384
768
64
160
320
640
1280
2560
240
480
960
1920
3840
System
Format
Resolution
Bit Rate
Frame Rate
HD EXT (SSD)
130
260
520
1040
ProRes
1920x1080
422
30p
25p
24p
(Unit: minute)
Approx. 390
Approx. 470
Approx. 490
500 GB
mins.
mins.
mins.
*
SDXC
Approx. 780
mins.
Approx. 940
mins.
Approx. 980
mins.
Memo :
1 TB
If the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded.
For each file format, up to 600 clips can be
recorded to one SD card on this camera
0
Approx. 1600
Approx. 1900
Approx. 2000
2 TB
mins.
mins.
mins.
Memo :
0
The maximum continuous recording time of “HD
EXT(SSD)” is 4 hours. Recording stops upon
exceeding 4 hours.
0
recorder. When 600 clips are recorded to one
card, the remaining space is displayed as 0 min
regardless of the estimated recordable time,
and no further recording can be performed.
When [System] is configured to “High-Speed”,
the remaining time display for recording to the
SD card will run out faster than usual.
0
Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card
Slide the write-protect switch upward to enable
A
writing or deleting.
Slide the write-protect switch downward to
B
prevent writing or deleting. (Images in the card
are protected.)
Write-Protect Switch
A
B
Write/Delete Enabled
Write/Delete Disabled
.
Recording Media
48
Inserting an SD Card
Removing the SD Card
This camera recorder comes with two card slots
(Slot A and B) for video/audio recording and
playback.
1
Check that the SD card to be removed is not
being accessed (status indicator of the
card slot lights up in red).
2
3
4
Press the SD card cover knob to open the
1
Press the SD card cover knob to open the
cover.
cover.
Push the SD card and remove it from the
slot.
Close the SD card cover.
2
Insert an SD card with the notched corner
pointing up.
The status indicator of the card slot to which the
card was inserted lights up in red.
Memo :
When both slots are inserted with usable SD
3
Close the SD card cover.
0
cards, the previously selected slot is used.
Card Slot Status Indicator
Caution :
0
The following table shows the respective states of
Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the
slot A and B.
camera recorder or remove the SD card when it
is being accessed. All data recorded on the
card, including the file that is being accessed,
may be corrupted. Be sure to check whether the
status indicator is lit in green or turned off before
you turn off the power or remove the SD card.
If you mistakenly remove the card when it is
being accessed, reinsert the card only after the
status indicator goes off.
Lamp
Slot Status
Lights up in
The inserted SD card is being
accessed. (writing/reading data)
Do not turn off the power of the
camera recorder or remove the SD
card.
red
0
0
Lights up in
green
On standby. The inserted SD card
can be used for recording or
playback.
The SD card may not be recognized if you insert
and remove the card within a short time. When
this happens, remove the card and wait for a few
seconds before you reinsert.
Light goes out
SD card is not inserted.
0
0
0
An unusable card is inserted.
An SD card is inserted but a
different slot is selected.
Recording Media
49
Switching the SD cards
Inserting the SSD Media Adapter (Sold
Separately)
This unit is equipped with an [expansion slot] for
recording and playing back video and audio in the
“HD EXT(SSD)” mode.
When both card slots are inserted with SD cards,
you can use the [SLOT SELECT] button to switch
the card to use.
When the memory on an SD card is full during
recording, datarecordingautomaticallyswitchesto
the other card.
1
2
Turn off the camera recorder.
Remove the wireless LAN antennas. u
v
Memo :
The [SLOT SELECT] button is disabled during
recording or playback. Cards will not be
switched even if you press the button.
0
3
Loosen the 4 screws of the expansion slot
and remove the cover.
.
4
Mount KA-MC100.
.
5
6
7
Fasten the 4 screws on the cover of the
expansion slot.
Attach the wireless LAN antennas. u
v
Turn on the camera recorder.
Memo :
Refer to the instruction manual of the KA-EN200
when attaching the “KA-EN200” H.265/HEVC
Streaming Adapter (sold separately).
Recording Media
50
Formatting (Initializing) of Recording
Media
4
Select [Format] and press the
[STATUS/SET] button (R).
When any of the following recording media (SD card
or SSD media) is inserted, [！FORMAT] appears in
the remaining level display area.
Format Media
Format the card using the camera recorder menu.
Unformatted recording media
Recording media formatted under different
specifications
0
0
Format
Cancel
4
*
For details of the menu operation, refer to
Set
.
Caution :
Be sure to format the recording media on this
0
5
Formatting starts.
camera recorder. Recording media formatted
on a PC or other peripheral equipment cannot
be used on this camera recorder.
[！RESTORE] appears in the remaining level
display area when a recording media that
requires repair is inserted.
0
Formatting...
1
Select [System] B [Media] B [Format
Media].
.
Memo :
6
Formatting is complete.
0
[Media Format
] can be selected in the
When formatting is complete, “Complete” appears
and the camera recorder returns to the [Format
Media] screen.
Memo :
0
following cases.
0
[System] is set to “HD EXT(SSD)”
[Slot Mode] is set to “Backup
0
”
2
The menu cannot be operated while formatting
Select the slot of the card to be formatted
and press the [STATUS/SET] button (R).
is in progress, but recording is possible to the
slot where formatting is not executed.
Formatting cannot be performed in the following
cases.
0
0
When recording to the recording media to be
2
formatted is in progress.
0
Recording media is not inserted.
0
Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z
is displayed).
Caution :
If you format a recording media, all data
0
recorded to it, including video data and setup
files, will be deleted.
.
3
The status of the selected recording media
is displayed.
Recording Media
51
Repairing the Recording Media
It is necessary to restore the recording media if an
abnormality occurs to the data in the recording
media due to some reasons.
4
Restoring is complete.
When restoring is complete, “Complete”
appears and the camera recorder returns to the
[Restore Media] screen.
0
Memo :
When no media that requires restoring is
inserted, the camera recorder returns to the
[Media] menu screen.
0
[！RESTORE] appears in the remaining level
display area when a recording media that
requires repair is inserted.
0
Caution :
[Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera
0
0
0
1
Select [System] B [Media] B [Restore
Media].
mode. However, it cannot be selected while the
camera recorder is recording. Select [Restore
Media] in Camera mode when the camera
recorder is not recording.
2
Select the recording media to be restored
and press the [STATUS/SET] button (R).
[Restore Media] does not restore the recording
media to its original states completely. If
restoring fails, replace or format the recording
media. Take note that formatting erases all the
information inside the recording media.
Restoring cannot be performed in the following
cases.
2
0
Camera recorder is recording in progress.
0
Recording media is not inserted.
0
Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z
is displayed).
.
3
Restoring starts.
Restoring...
.
Recording Media
52
Example: QuickTime
Clips Recorded to Recording Media
Folders Created in the Recording Media
ABCG0001
The captured image is recorded into different
folders according to the [Format] settings.
Clip Number
A number in automatic
ascending order is assigned in
the recording order.
Other than MXF (MPEG2): [DCIM]
MXF (MPEG2): [PRIVATE]
0
0
The Clip Number can be reset in
Memo :
the menu.*
By formatting (initializing) the recording media
0
Clip Name Prefix (any four alphanumeric characters)
This is set to “xxxG” (“xxx” denotes the last 3
digits of the serial number) by default.
from the [Format Media] menu on the camera
recorder, folders required for recording in the
current [System] settings will be generated.
When the [System] settings and [WFormat]/
[YFormat] settings are changed, folders
required for recording in those settings will be
automatically generated.
.
0
*
[Clip Set] B [Reset Clip Number]
Memo :
Caution :
Before recording starts, you can set any
0
characters for the clip name prefix by using
[System] B [Record Set] B [Clip Set] B [Clip
Name Prefix].
When a clip inside the folder is moved or deleted
0
using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac),
recording to the recording media may fail if
formatting (initializing) of the media is not
performed.
Changes cannot be made after recording.
0
Recorded Clips
Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name
The recorded materials may be split into several
files but they can be played back continuously
on the camera recorder.
When recording is stopped, the images, audio
and accompanying data which are recorded
from start to stop are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
0
0
Clips may be recorded across the two SD cards
in card slots A and B depending on the recording
time of the clip.
0
An 8-character clip name is automatically
generated for the recorded clip.
0
(“Clip Name Prefix” + “Clip Number”)
Caution :
A clip recorded across several cards cannot be
0
played back continuously. Continuous playback
is only possible when the recording is made on
one card.
Recording Media
53
Operation lock does not apply to the following
buttons and switches.
Operation Lock Feature
You can use this feature to prevent erroneous
camera operation.
[POWER ON/OFF] switch
0
0
0
0
0
[ND FILTER] switch
[MONI SELECT] switch
[CH SELECT] switch
[AUDIO INPUT CH1/2/3/4] recording level
adjustment knob
[AUDIO SELECT CH1/2/3/4]-[MANUAL/AUTO]
selection switch
0
0
[AUDIO SELECT CH1/2/3/4]-[FRONT/REAR/
WIRELESS] selection switch
[TC PRESET] button
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
[TC GEN] time code generator switch
[MONITOR] volume adjustment knob
[ALARM] volume adjustment knob
[REC] button
.
1
While in the Camera mode (when the
display screen appears), press and hold
the [CANCEL/RESET] button for 5 seconds
or longer.
User button assigned with the [Rec] function
All switches on the lens
The operation lock turns on, and an operation
lock icon (r) appears on the display
screen.
0
While the viewfinder is connected
0
[PEAKING][BRIGHT][CONTRAST]
[CHROMA] Knob
Press the [CANCEL/RESET] button again for
5 seconds or longer to turn off the operation
lock.
0
[MIRROR][TALLY] Switch
0
Memo :
The operation lock feature is only valid in the
0
Camera mode.
The power turns off and the operation lock is
disengaged.
0
0
The following remote operations are possible
even when the operation lock feature is turned
on (“On”).
0
Operation from the remote control unit that is
connected to the [REMOTE] terminal.
0
Remote operation of the camera through
access via a browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Operation Lock Feature
54
Shooting
Basic Shooting
Procedures
1
Configure the video and audio input
settings.
You have to configure video settings such as
brightness adjustment (iris, gain, shutter) and
white balance adjustment in order to start
shooting. You also have to adjust the audio
input settings and audio recording level for
audio recording.
Preparations
Adjusting the Brightness
Adjusting the White Balance
Adjusting Audio Input Settings and
Recording Level
0
0
0
2
4
2
Press the [REC] button to start recording to
the recording media.
The tally lamp lights up in red during recording.
1
Zoom Operation
0
Adjusting the Focus
0
Memo :
If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
0
in the factory default, pressing the [REC] button
starts recording only to the media in the selected
slot.
3
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode] is
set to “Dual”, recording can be performed
simultaneously to the cards in both the slots.
.
The tally lamp can be turned off by setting the
[TALLY] switch to “OFF”.
0
1
Supply battery or AC adapter power to the
camera recorder.
3
Check the most recently captured images.
Press the user button that is assigned with
the Clip Review function. Doing so activates
the function and plays back the most recently
captured images on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
0
2
3
Insert the recording media.
Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
Setting the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON”
starts up the camera recorder in the Camera
mode to enable shooting.
Adjust the angle of the viewfinder.
After playback, the camera recorder returns
to standby mode (STBY).
0
4
5
Set [System], [Format], [Resolution],
[Frame Rate], [Bit Rate] and [Audio] in
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format].
You can select the definition of the recorded
videos, file format for recording/playback,
and the video recording format on this
camera recorder.
0
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to display
the menu screen on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
0
Basic Shooting Procedures
55
You can select a definition for the recorded images
from the following items under [System].
Selecting System
Definition, File Format and
Video Format
You can select the definition of the recorded
videos, file format for recording/playback, and the
video recording format on this camera recorder.
HD EXT(SSD):
0
Records to the expansion slot in the HD EXT
quality.
HD:
0
0
0
Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.
SD:
Records in SD quality for both slots A and B.
HD(SDI In):
Records the HD SDI video of the device
connected to the [HD/SD SDI IN] terminal in
“HD” to both slot A and slot B.
SD(SDI In):
Setting the Record Format Menu
0
0
1
2
Set [System], [Format], [Resolution],
[Frame Rate] and [Bit Rate] in [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format].
Set each of the items.
Records the SD SDI video of the device
connected to the [HD/SD SDI IN] terminal in
“SD” to both slot A and slot B.
HD+Web:
Records in HD quality for slot A, and Web quality
for slot B.
High-Speed:
0
D
Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.
Caution :
3
After setting is complete for all items, press
the [USER1] button.
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
0
The recording format is switched.
Format] B [System] is configured to “High-
Speed”, network cannot be used via wireless
LAN u v or the [HOST] terminal (USB).
Configure as follows in this case.
0
0
A “Please Wait...” message appears on the
screen during switching.
0
Set [Network] B [Connection Setup] B [USB/
Selecting a System Definition
The following definitions are available for selection.
Int. WLAN] to “Off”. u v
0
Unplug the USB network adapter
HD EXT:
0
0
0
0
Note that camera operation will come to an
emergency stop and the power will turn off if the
above steps are not performed.
Records clips in the HD (High Definition)
resolution (1920x1080)
HD:
File data may be damaged if this happens while
recording is in progress.
Records in HD (High Definition) resolution
(1920x1080 or 1280x720)
SD:
Records in SD (Standard Definition) resolution
(720x480 or 720x576)
Web:
Records in resolution (960x540, 720x480,
720x576, or 480x270) suitable for web
distribution
High-Speed:
0
Records in HD resolution (1920×1080)
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format
56
o
When [System] is configured to “HD”, “HD
Selecting a File Format
Select a file format in [WFormat]/[YFormat].
The following file formats are available for
selection.
+Web” or “HD(SDI In)”, the options for slot A are:
Record Format
W
Format ResWolution WRFartaeme
W
Bit Rate
W
Audio
QuickTime (MPEG2):
0
0
0
0
0
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
MXF (MPEG2):
QuickTime 1920x1080
60i, 50i,
35M (HQ) 4CH 16 bit/
2CH 16 bit
(MPEG2),
30p*,
MXF file format
MXF
25p*
QuickTime (H.264):
(MPEG2)
1440x1080
1280x720
60i, 50i
35M (HQ),
25M (SP)
35M (HQ)
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
Exchange: (U model only)
Sports Video Interop Group format (.MP4)
MP4 (H.264): (E model only)
MP4 file format
60p, 50p
QuickTime 1920x1080 60p, 50p
4CH 24 bit/
(H.264)
2CH 24 bit
70M (XHQ),
Memo :
When [System] is set to “HD EXT(SSD)”, this
0
50M (XHQ)
50M (XHQ) 4CH 16 bit/
item is fixed at “ProRes”.
Exchange (U model) and MP4 (E model) are
selectable only when [System] is configured to
“HD”.
0
2CH 16 bit
60i, 50i,
30p*,
25p*,
24p*
4CH 24 bit/
2CH 24 bit
When Exchange (U model) or MP4 (E model) is
selected, backup recording and clip cutter
function cannot be used.
0
50M (XHQ)
50M (XHQ), 4CH 16 bit/
35M (UHQ) 2CH 16 bit
1280x720
60p, 50p
4CH 24 bit/
Selecting a Video Format
2CH 24 bit
50M (XHQ)
The selectable [Frame Rate]/[Bit Rate] changes
according to the settings of [System]/[Format]/
[Resolution].
0
35M (UHQ) 4CH 16 bit/
2CH 16 bit
Exchange 1920x1080
60p
50p
12M (LP)
8M (LP)
12M (LP)
8M (LP)
2CH
(U model)
1280x720
1920x1080
1280x720
List of Formats
MP4
2CH
The following is a list of file formats and video
formats that can be selected on this camera
recorder.
(H.264)
(E model)
*
Not selectable when configuring “HD(SDI In)”.
o
When [System] is set to “HD EXT(SSD)”
Memo :
Record Format
Bit
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
0
0
0
each item for slot B is fixed at the same setting
as slot A.
Format
ProRes
Resolution
Frame
Rate
Audio
Rate
When [WFormat] is configured to “Exchange” or
“MP4(H.264)”, selection is possible only when
[System] is configured to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”.
The following functions cannot be used when
HD+Web is selected.
1920x1080 30p, 25p,
24p
422
4CH 24 bit,
2CH 24 bit
Memo :
[Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.
0
0
0
View Remote, Live Streaming or Return over IP
[Slot Mode] is fixed at “----”.
The following functions cannot be used when
HD EXT(SSD) is selected.
View Remote, Live Streaming, Return over IP,
Overlay Function, Clip Cutter Trig
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format
57
o
o
When [System] is set to “High-Speed”
When [System] is set to “SD” or “SD(SDI In)”:
Record Format
Record Format
W
Format ResWolution WRFartaeme
W
Bit Rate
W
Audio
W
Format ResWolution WRFartaeme
W
Bit Rate
W
Audio
QuickTime 1920x1080 120/60p,
2CH 24 bit
QuickTime 720x480
60i
8M (HQ)
4CH 16 bit/
2CH 16 bit
(H.264)
100/50p
(H.264)
(U model)
70M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ)
720x576
50i
(E model)
Memo :
0
50M (XHQ) 2CH 16 bit
2CH 24 bit
The following function cannot be used when SD
or SD (SDI input) is selected.
Overlay Function
120/30p,
100/25p,
120/24p
50M (XHQ)
Each item for slot B is fixed at the same setting
as slot A.
0
50M (XHQ), 2CH 16 bit
35M (UHQ)
Caution :
o
When [System] is set to “HD+Web”, the options
for slot B are:
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is configured to “High-
Speed”, network cannot be used via wireless
LAN u v or the [HOST] terminal (USB).
Configure as follows in this case.
0
Record Format
Y
Format ResYolution YRFartaeme
Y
Bit Rate
Y
Audio
QuickTime 1280x720
60p, 50p
30p, 25p
30p, 25p
60p, 50p
6M (LP)
3M (HQ)
1.2M (LP)
6M (LP)
4CH/
0
Set [Network] B [Connection Setup] B [USB/
(MPEG2),
2CH
Int. WLAN] to “Off”. u v
MXF
0
960x540
4CH/
Unplug the USB network adapter
(MPEG2)
480x270
2CH
Note that camera operation will come to an
emergency stop and the power will turn off if the
above steps are not performed.
4CH/
2CH
File data may be damaged if this happens while
recording is in progress.
QuickTime 1280x720
(H.264)
4CH/
2CH
Memo :
960x540
30p, 25p,
24p
3M (HQ)
4CH/
2CH
The [Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.
0
0
The following functions cannot be used when
High-Speed is selected.
720x480
720x576
480x270
60i
50i
8M (HQ)
8M (HQ)
1.2M (LP)
4CH 16 bit/
2CH 16 bit
View Remote, Live Streaming, Return over IP,
Upload of recorded clip, time stamp recording
and Pixel Mapping
30p, 25p,
4CH/
2CH
24p
The settings for slot B are fixed at the same as
slot A.
0
0
Memo :
0
The following functions cannot be used when
When the [TC GEN]] selection switch is set to
“F-RUN”, the time code will be recorded in “R-
RUN”.
HD+Web is selected.
View Remote, Live Streaming or Return over IP
[TC/UB...] B [TC Mode] is fixed at “SW Set”.
It is not possible to set a shutter speed that is
slower than the frame rate.
0
0
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos
For setting the aspect ratio of the recorded image
when [System] is set to “SD” or “SD(SDI In)”.
You can select “16:9” or “4:3”.
Memo :
0
(Example: When 120/60p is selected, 1/120 to
1/9873 can be set.)
The sensitivity of high speed shooting is lower
than normal shooting. In order to capture more
beautiful images, it is recommended to perform
shooting in a lighted environment.
The remaining space on the media (recordable
time to the recording media) runs out faster than
usual.
0
0
For conditions other than those above, this item
is fixed at “16:9”.
(Example: For 120/60p, as the recording speed
is twice as fast as usual, the remaining space on
the media is reduced by approximately double
the speed.)
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format
58
Zoom Operation
Focus Operation
Adjusts the angle of view.
Zooming can be operated using the following.
Adjusting the Focus
Zoom ring/zoom lever on the commercially
available lens
0
0
1
Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
Memo :
User buttons assigned with “Zoom Tele” and
“Zoom Wide”
Using the Focus Assist or Expanded Focus
0
During the zoom operation, the zoom bar or
number will appear on the upper right corner of the
screen.
function makes it easier to focus.
Caution :
Focus Assist Function
Depending on the zoom speed, the zoom drive
0
noise of the power zoom may be recorded.
When the user button assigned with “Focus
Assist” is pressed, the focused area is displayed
in color. This enables easy and accurate
focusing.
0
Using Zoom Ring/Zoom Lever on
Commercially Available Lens
Select the color (blue, red or green) in the menu.
0
You can adjust the preferred angle of view by
Memo :
turning the zoom ring or operating the zoom lever.
When [LCD/VF] B [Shooting Assist] B [Focus
0
Memo :
Assist] B [Type] is set to “ACCU-Focus”, the
depth of field becomes shallower to enable
easier focusing.
For details on the lens, please refer to the
0
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the lens used.
The “ACCU-Focus” function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
Select the display color in [LCD/VF] B [Shooting
Assist] B [Focus Assist]B[Color].
0
0
Using User Buttons Assigned with
“Zoom Tele” and “Zoom Wide”
1
Assign “Zoom Tele” and “Zoom Wide” to
the user buttons.
If you use the zebra function and the Focus
Assist function at the same time, it may be
difficult to see the effect of the Focus Assist. In
this case, turn off the zebra function.
0
Configure the zoom speed of the user
buttons in [Camera Function] B [User Switch
Set] B [Zoom Speed].
0
Focus Assist + Function
Increasing the value increases the zoom
speed.
You can operate the Focus Assist and
Expanded Focus functions simultaneously by
pressing the user button assigned with “Focus
Assist +”.
0
2
Press the user button assigned with “Zoom
Tele”/“Zoom Wide” to zoom.
The zoom operation is performed in the
speed that has been set.
0
Memo :
“Expanded Focus” is displayed during the
0
Memo :
“Focus Assist +” operation regardless of the
setting in [Camera Function] B [User Switch
Set] B [Expanded Focus].
This function may not work depending on the
0
lens attached.
Zoom Operation
59
Expanded Focus Function
Adjusting the Brightness
Adjust the brightness using Iris, Gain, Shutter
speed and ND filter according to the brightness of
the object.
You can magnify the preferred area by pressing the
user button assigned with “Expanded Focus”;
doing so enables precise focus to be established
easily.
1
When the user button that is assigned with
“Expanded Focus” is pressed.
Adjusting the Brightness Automatically:
Automatic Brightness Adjustment (AE)
Mode
The center area of the screen is enlarged for
the first time.
0
For subsequent operation of the button, the
area at which the operation was last
performed will be enlarged.
0
Iris, Gain, Shutter speed and ND filter are
automatically adjusted according to the brightness
of the object to maintain optimum brightness.
To set only the Gain, Iris and Shutter to Auto mode,
set the Full Auto mode to off before setting each
item to the automatic adjustment mode using the
user button assigned with “Full Auto”.
1
Set Gain, Iris and Shutter to Auto mode.
0
0
0
.
2
Set the target level (brighter/darker) to
maintain optimum brightness during
automatic adjustment.
2
Use the cross-shaped button (JKH I) to
magnify the preferred area.
The portion that is being magnified is
displayed at the lower right corner of the
screen.
0
Press the user button assigned with “AE
Level” and when the “AE±” indication turns
white operate the cross-shaped button (JK)
to set the target level.
0
3
Press the [CANCEL/RESET] button to
cancel the setting.
This can be configured in [Camera Function]
B [AE Level].
0
Memo :
0
The display of the enlarged screen is dot by dot
SDI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
equivalent.
100min
1080 /30p
50min
To set the operation when the button is pressed,
go to [Camera Function] B [User Switch Set] B
[Expanded Focus].
0
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
COMPRESS
ITU709
0 Pressing and holding the Set button (R) resets
the position of magnification.
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
This function can be used together with the
Focus Assist function.
0
0
0
.
Magnifying an image does not alter the size of
the recorded image.
If the “Expanded Focus” function is assigned to
the cross-shaped button, the cross-shaped
button cannot be used as user button while the
area is being magnified.
This function is unavailable when [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
set to “SD”.
0
0
When the display screen is turned off, the
magnified area at the bottom right of the screen
will not be displayed.
Focus Operation
60
Memo :
Adjusting the Iris
Adjust the aperture of the lens iris according to the
brightness of the subject.
Using the user button assigned with “Full Auto”
0
to enter the Full Auto mode also activates the
automatic brightness adjustment (AE) mode. In
this case, the White Balance also enters into
Auto mode forcibly.
Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode
The convergence speed of the automatic
adjustment for automatic brightness adjustment
(AE) can be set in the menu.
0
0
The aperture value (F-number) of the lens can be
set manually.
1
2
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user
button assigned with “Full Auto”.
If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and
Shutter) have been set to Auto mode, the value
of the corresponding items when the user button
that is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed can be
fixed.
Set to Manual Iris mode using the [IRIS
A/M] switch on the lens.
The lens aperture value (F-number) is
displayed.
If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and
Shutter) have been set to Auto mode, the
automatic brightness adjustment (AE) mode is
enabled.
0
SDI IN
282min
100min
50min
00:00:00.00
1080 /30p
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
COMPRESS
ITU709
Adjusting the Brightness Manually
Use the user button assigned with “Full Auto” to set
Full Auto mode to off, some or all of the items (Iris,
Gain and Shutter Speed) can be manually
adjusted.
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
3
Turn the iris ring on the lens to adjust the
iris manually.
1
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user
button assigned with “Full Auto”.
The open F-number of the aperture varies
according to the zoom position.
2
Adjust the Iris, Gain and Shutter speed.
0
0
0
F-number
Decrease
Description
The subject appears brighter.
The focused range becomes
sharper, while the background is
blurred to produce a soft image.
Memo :
0
The brightness cannot be manually adjusted in
Increase
Memo :
The subject appears darker.
Background of image becomes
focused as well.
the Full Auto mode.
If Iris, Gain and Shutter Speed are manually
adjusted, the [AE Level] setting is temporarily
disabled.
0
Even while in the Manual Iris mode, pressing
and holding the [IRIS] button on the lens
switches the camera recorder to the Push Auto
Iris mode.
0
Push Auto Iris
When the camera recorder is in the Manual Iris
mode, press and hold the [IRIS] button on the lens
to change to the Auto Iris mode temporarily. The
iris will be automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the subject.
Adjusting the Brightness
61
Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode
Setting the Gain
1
2
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user
button assigned with “Full Auto”.
This function electrically boosts the light sensitivity
when there is insufficient illumination on the object.
You can set the gain of the video amplifier
according to the brightness of the object. Select the
setting mode according to your shooting
conditions.
Set to Auto Iris mode using the [IRIS A/M]
switch on the lens.
The iris is automatically adjusted according to
the brightness of the object.
A v icon appears on the left side of the lens
aperture value (F-number) in the Auto Iris mode.
Memo :
Use the user button assigned with “Full Auto” to
0
enter the Full Auto mode also activates the Auto
Iris mode. In this case, the Gain, Shutter and
White Balance also enter into Auto mode
forcibly.
The iris operation during Full Auto mode can be
configured in [Camera Function] B [Full Auto] B
[Iris Control].
.
The iris open/close limit can be set in [Camera
Function] B [Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)]/[Auto Iris
Limit (CLOSE)] during Auto Iris.
0
0
Manual Gain Mode (Manual Gain
Switching)
You can press the user button assigned with “AE
Level” and use the cross-shaped button (JK) to
configured the target level (brighter/darker) of
the auto iris in [Camera Function] B [AE Level].
The convergence speed of the auto iris can be
set in the menu.
1
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user
button assigned with “Full Auto”.
Select the gain level of the video amplifier
using the [GAIN L/M/H] selection switch on
the camera recorder.
0
0
0
The gain level appears on the screen.
0
SDI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
100min
1080 /30p
While in the Auto Iris mode, and [AE Lock] is set
50min
5 . 6 f t
to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a
icon appears on the
12 :34 :56
left side of the lens aperture value (F-number)
during lock operation.
COMPRESS
ITU709
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
The default positions of the switch are as
follows.
0
[L]
[M] : 6dB
[H] 12dB
:
0 dB
:
2
Select [GAIN L/M/H] that is not set to “AGC”
to switch to the Manual Gain mode.
Memo :
You can change the gain value of each position
0
in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity causes
the screen to appear grainier.
The camera recorder switches to the Auto Gain
mode when the gain value is set to “AGC”.
0
Adjusting the Iris
62
Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain
Adjustment)
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
You can change the shutter speed (time for each
shooting frame) using the electronic shutter
function. Electronic shutter can be adjusted
manually or automatically.
1
2
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user
button assigned with “Full Auto”.
Set [Camera Function] B [GAIN L]/[GAIN
M]/[GAIN H] to “AGC”.
If an item specified with “AGC” is selected using
the [GAIN L/M/H] gain switch, the Auto Gain
Adjustment mode is enabled and the gain of the
video amplifier is automatically set according to
the brightness of the subject.
Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)
1
2
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user
button assigned with “Full Auto”.
Memo :
Set [Camera Function] B [Shutter] to
Use the user button assigned with “Full Auto” to
0
“Slow” or “Step/Variable”.
enter the Full Auto mode also activates the Auto
Gain mode. In this case, the Iris, Shutter and
White Balance also enter into Auto mode
forcibly.
The shutter speed appears on the screen.
0
SDI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
100min
1080 /30p
50min
The gain operation during Full Auto mode can
be configured in [Camera Function] B [Full
Auto] B [Gain].
0
0
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
The upper limit of the gain setting value during
AGC operation can be set in [Camera Function]
B [AGC Limit].
COMPRESS
ITU709
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
While in the Auto Gain mode, and [AE Lock] is
0
Memo :
set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a
icon appears on
0
To display Shutter in angle (DEG), set [WFrame
Rate] to “25p” and set [LCD/VF] B [Display
Type] B [Shutter] to “DEG”.
the left side of the gain value during lock
operation.
Switching Shutter Speed
o
Manual shutter mode (step/variable)
Press down the [SHUTTER] switch toward the
“SEL” end. When the shutter speed indication turns
white, press down the [SHUTTER] switch
repeatedly to change the setting.
Example:
Step
1/60 1/100
1/1000 1/2000
1/60.00
Variable
.
Setting the Gain
63
After the shutter speed indication turns white, the
setting value can be changed using the cross-
shaped button (JK).
Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)
1
2
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user
You can use the cross-shaped button I to switch
to variable mode and the cross-shaped button H to
switch to step mode.
button assigned with “Full Auto”.
Set [Camera Function] B [Shutter] to “EEI”.
Automatic Shutter mode adjusts the shutter
speed automatically according to the
brightness of the object.
0
Setting Value
Shutter
Mode
Frame
Rate
Setting
Value
(Shutter
OFF)
3
Step
60p, 60i, 1/60,
1/60
Set the controllable range for the Automatic
Shutter in [Camera Function] B [EEI Limit].
30p
1/100,
1/120,
1/250,
1/500,
1/1000,
1/2000
Memo :
Use the user button assigned with “Full Auto” to
0
enter the Full Auto mode also activates the
Automatic Shutter mode. In this case, the Iris,
Gain and White Balance also enter into Auto
mode forcibly.
Variable
Step
1/30.00 -
1/9873
50p, 50i, 1/50,
1/50
The shutter operation during Full Auto mode can
be configured in [Camera Function] B [Full
Auto] B [Shutter].
0
0
25p
1/60,
1/100,
1/120,
1/250,
1/500,
1/1000,
1/2000
While in the Automatic Shutter mode, and [AE
Lock] is set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a
icon
appears on the left side of the shutter speed
during lock operation.
Variable
1/25.00 -
1/9873
o
Manual shutter mode (low speed)
Press down the [SHUTTER] switch toward the
“SEL” end. When the shutter speed indication turns
white, press down the [SHUTTER] switch
repeatedly to change the setting.
After the shutter speed indication turns white, the
setting value can also be changed using the cross-
shaped button (JK).
Setting Value
Shutter
Mode
Frame
Rate
Setting
Value
(Shutter
OFF)
Slow
60p, 60i, 1/30,
1/60
30p
1/15,
1/7.5,
1/3.75
50p, 50i, 1/25,
1/50
25p
1/12.5,
1/6.25,
1/3.125
Setting the Electronic Shutter
64
Memo :
Adjusting the White
Balance
Use the user button assigned with “Full Auto” to
0
enter the Full Auto mode also activates the
Automatic White Balance mode. In this case, the
Iris, Gain and Shutter also enter into Auto mode
forcibly.
Adjust the white balance according to the color
temperature of the lighting. You can select the
adjustment mode according to the shooting
conditions.
The white balance operation during Full Auto
mode can be configured in [Camera Function]
B [Full Auto] B [White Balance].
0
0
As the color of the light (color temperature) varies
according to the light source, it is necessary to
readjust the white balance when the main light
source illuminating the subject changes.
When [Camera Function] B [User Switch Set] B
[AE Lock] is set to “AE/FAW” or “FAW”, the white
balance when the user button that is assigned
with [AE Lock] is pressed can be fixed while in
the Automatic White Balance mode.
If [White Balance] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button will display
the FAW Paint Adjustment screen.
0
FAW Paint Adjustment
.
You can fine-adjust the white balance that was
automatically adjusted.
Automatic White Balance Mode (FAW:
Fulltime Auto White balance)
1
Select [Camera Process] B [White
Balance] B [FAW Paint] and press the Set
button (R).
1
2
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user
button assigned with “Full Auto”.
The FAW Paint Adjustment screen appears.
Assign “FAW” (Full Auto White Balance) to
one of the three [WHT.BAL] switches.
White Balance
You can set the Full Auto White Balance
feature to either “A”, “B”, or “PRST” in
[Camera Function] B [FAW].
0
0
If the position assigned with “FAW” is
selected using the [WHT BAL B/A/PRST]
switch, the Automatic White Balance mode is
enabled and an appropriate white balance is
automatically adjusted according to the color
temperature of the lighting on the subject.
FAW Paint
1
.
2
Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
Caution :
The accuracy of [FAW] is inferior to that of [AWB]
0
(Auto White Balance).
When the power of the camera recorder is
turned on with the [FAW] mode selected, it takes
about 15 seconds for the colors to stabilize.
0
R
B
.
Adjusting the White Balance
65
Setting the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.] Values
You can change both the color temperature
settings in the Preset mode in the menu.
3
Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
White Balance
1
Open the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.] menu.
Select [Camera Process] B [White Balance]
B [Preset Temp.] and [Alternative Temp.],
and press the Set button (R).
0
R Value
FAW Paint
The Color Temperature setting screen
appears.
0
B Value
.
Manual White Balance Mode (Manual
Switching)
1
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user
button assigned with “Full Auto”.
Use the [WHT.BAL] switch to select “PRST”
(preset mode), “A” (memory A mode), or “B”
(memory B mode).
0
Color Temperature
Detailed Selection
Color Temperature Selection Screen
Screen
Memo :
.
You can set the Full Auto White Balance feature
0
2
Select the color temperature.
0
to either [A], [B], or [PRST] in [Camera
Function] B [FAW].
When selecting from a setting value (Color
Temperature Selection screen), use the
cross-shaped button (JK) to select the color
temperature.
The FAW (Full Time Auto White Balance) mode
makes automatic adjustments by sampling the
color temperature of the video to obtain the most
appropriate white balance level.
0
[Setting Values: 7500K, 6500K, 5600K,
5200K, 4800K, 4200K, 3200K, 3000K,
2800K]
To select detailed values (Color
Temperature Detailed Selection screen)
0
Preset Mode (PRST)
0
Press the cross-shaped button (I) to
Two different color temperature settings are
registered on this camera recorder. You can
switch between them by pushing the [AWB/
USER8] switch upward or using the user button
assigned with “AWB”.
display the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
0
0
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to
select a color temperature.
[Setting Values: 2300K to 15000K (in
100K increments)]
Default setting:
[Preset Temp.]
:
3200K
Memo :
[Alternative Temp.] : 5600K
0 Use the cross-shaped button (I) to switch
between the Color Temperature Selection
screen and the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
1
2
Set the [WHT.BAL] switch to “PRST”.
Push the [AWB/USER8] switch upward or
press the user button assigned with the
“AWB” function.
If [White Balance] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button will display
the Color Temperature Selection screen.
0
The color temperature switches.
0
(“Preset Temp.”1“Alternative Temp.”)
Adjusting the White Balance
66
Preset Paint Adjustment
The white balance for [Preset Temp.] and
[Alternative Temp.] can be fine adjusted
individually or collectively.
4
5
Locate a place with similar lighting conditions
as the object to be shot, place a white object
near the center of the screen and zoom in to
fill the screen with white.
Push the [AWB/USER8] switch upward or
press the user button assigned with the
“AWB” function.
1
Select [Camera Process] B [White
Balance] B [Preset Paint Memory].
“Common” configures the settings for the
entire color temperature range collectively.
“Individual” configures the settings for the 9
types of color temperature individually.
0
0
The white detection frame appears when Auto
White Balance is activated. Fill the frame with
white completely.
0
0
WhileAutoWhiteBalanceisstartingup, “A
y
”
2
Select [Camera Process] B [White
or “B
y
” appears on the screen. (
y
mark
Balance] B [Preset Paint].
appears blinking)
The adjustment screen appears if “Common”
is selected.
0
0
After the correct white balance is obtained, an
estimated value of the current color
temperature is displayed.
0
The lower color temperature limit of the color
temperature range is displayed if “Individual”
is selected. Select the color temperature to
adjust.
SDI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
100min
1080 /30p
50min
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
In the case of 2300K for example, the target
range is 2300K to 2900K (less than 3000K)
White Detection
Frame
COMPRESS
ITU709
3
4
Adjust the R and B values.
0 Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust
R value and (HI) to adjust B value.
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
1024
[AWB] Activating
Press the Set button (R).
Blinking
In the case of “Common”, the display returns
to the [White Balance] screen.
0
SDI IN
282min
100min
50min
00:00:00.00
1080 /30p
As for “Individual”, repeat steps 1 to 4 as
necessary to configure each color
temperature individually.
0
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
COMPRESS
ITU709
Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode
(B)
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
10240
Result Display
Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or
0
.
Memory B.
Caution :
0
When the [WHT.BAL] switch is set to “A” or “B”,
pushing the [AWB/USER8] switch upward or
pressing the user button assigned with the
“AWB” function executes Auto White Balance.
The white balance will be automatically adjusted
and the adjusted value will be saved in Memory
A or Memory B.
0
Do not use highly reflective objects, such as
metals. Doing so may result in improper white
balance adjustment.
The Auto White Balance function cannot provide
optimum white balance with an object outside the
adjustment range, for example when it contains
only a single color or not enough white color.
0
1
Prepare the camera recorder.
Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON”.
A
B
Set Full Auto mode to off using the user button
assigned with “Full Auto”.
Set the [IRIS A/M] mode switch on the lens to “A”.
C
2
Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the
lighting.
3
Set the [WHT.BAL] switch to “A” or “B”.
Adjusting the White Balance
67
Error Message
3
Press the Set button (R).
If the Auto White Balance adjustment is not
correctly completed, one of the following
messages will appear for about 3 seconds.
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
White Balance
Message
Status
R Value
Auto White * NG: Displayed when there is not
Object
enough white color on the
object, or when the color
temperature is not suitable.
Use another white object and
adjust the white balance
again.
AWB Paint
(*A or B)
B Value
Auto White * Error: Displayed when the lighting is
.
Low Light
(*A or B)
dark. Increase the lighting
and adjust the white balance
again.
Memo :
0
Executing Auto White Balance will usually clear
the White Paint Adjustment value. But when
[Camera Process] B [White Balance] B [Clear
Paint After AWB] is set to “Off”, values will not
be cleared even when Auto White Balance is
executed.
Auto White * Error: Excessive illumination.
Over Light
(*A or B)
Displayed when the lighting is
too bright. Decrease the
lighting and adjust the white
balance again.
If [White Balance] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button will display
the AWB Paint Adjustment screen.
0
White Paint Adjustment
You can fine-tune the white balance saved in
Memory A or Memory B.
1
Select [Camera Process] B [White
Balance] B [AWB Paint] and press the Set
button (R).
The White Paint Adjustment screen appears.
White Balance
AWB Paint
1
.
2
Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
R
B
.
Adjusting the White Balance
68
Adjusting the Vertical Shading
Vertical Shading Adjustment
1
Adjustment of white shading is needed when
Set [Camera Process] B [White Balance] B
0
you have changed the lens.
[V. Shading] to “On”.
Although white balance may be appropriate at
the center of the image, this may not be the case
at the top and bottom areas.
0
2
Select [Adjust...] in [V. Shading] and press
the Set button (R).
The Vertical Shading Adjustment screen
appears.
If this is the case, the image will appear greenish
or yellowish. This phenomenon is due to the
characteristics of the lens. The process of
correcting this phenomenon is referred to as
vertical shading adjustment.
Evaluated Level Meter
Sliding Bar for Setting
Perform this process after adjusting the white
balance.
0
Setup Prior Adjustment
1
Obtain the white balance on the camera.
Setting
Value
Evaluated Value Detection Frames
2
Set the control of the camera lens as
.
follows.
3
Press the [USER1] button to set to perform
automatic adjustment.
Set the iris to F4.0 or narrower to obtain the
appropriate brightness.
A
You can use the R, G, B channels individually
to adjust the value of the evaluated level meter
up to a margin error of ±1 from the median value.
If the brightness is insufficient at F4.0, obtain the
appropriate brightness such as by adjusting the
lighting.
4
Adjust manually.
When using a zoom lens, set to the center of the
B
If you want to adjust manually after automatic
adjustment is performed, follow the steps
below.
0
zoom adjustment range.
3
Fill the monitor screen with a pattern box of
a uniform light source, or a piece of white
(plain) paper that is uniformly illuminated.
You are recommended to adjust the G
(green) level only.
0
0
If manual adjustment in not necessary,
adjustment is complete at step 7.
4
5
Set the chroma level of the monitor to the
maximum.
5
6
Use the cross-shaped buttons (HI) to
select the item to adjust from ［R］/［G］/
［B］.
Check the monitor screen.
There is no need for adjustment if there is no
color at the top and bottom of the screen.
If the top of the screen is greenish and the
bottom is reddish or vice versa, continue this
adjustment.
0
0
Adjust the setting value using the cross-
shaped buttons (JK).
0
0
Adjust the sliding bar for setting while
referring to the evaluated level meter.
Adjust the values such that the evaluated
value falls almost at the center of the meter
using the K cross-shaped button if the
evaluated value of the channel to be adjusted
is larger than the median value, and the J
cross-shaped button if the evaluated value is
smaller than the median value.
7
Press the Set button (R) to save the setting.
0 Make sure to press the Set button (R) to save
the setting.
Pressing the [CANCEL/RESET] button
discards the setting and returns to the menu
screen at the next higher level.
0
Adjusting the White Balance
69
Memo :
Adjusting the Camera
Image
There may be some delay in the changes of the
0
0
0
evaluated value after pressing the cross-shaped
button (JK).
Increasing the setting value suppresses the
colors at the bottom and enhances the colors on
top.
The picture quality of the camera can be set using
the [Camera Process] menu.
As the adjustments are shown on the screen, you
can adjust the values while checking the picture
quality on the camera.
Adjustment is not possible in the following
cases. An error message will appear.
0
When the top and bottom ends of the frame
[Color Space]
[Gamma]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
are overexposed
0
When the top and bottom ends of the frame
[Detail]
are underexposed
[Master Black]
[Black Paint]
[Flare]
0
When there is significant difference in the
level between the top and bottom ends of the
frame
[V. Shading]
[Black Toe]
What is evaluated value?
[Knee Level]
[Auto Knee Sensitivity]
[Auto Knee Peak Filter]
[White Clip]
This is a relative value (difference between the
top and bottom ends) with respect to the average
value of the R, G, B channels within the evaluated
value detection frames at the top and bottom of
the LCD monitor or viewfinder.
[Chroma Clip]
[White Balance]
[Color Matrix]
[Color Gain]
[Reverse Picture]
[DNR]
The evaluated value is positioned higher than the
centeroftheevaluatedlevelmeterwhenthelevel
at the top is higher than that at the bottom end.
Similarly, the evaluated value is positioned lower
than the center of the evaluated level meter when
the level at the top is lower than that at the bottom
end.
Memo :
For details of the respective items, see the
0
[Camera Process] menu.
Adjust the evaluated value such that it falls
almost at the center of the meter.
Adjusting the White Balance
70
When the switch setting is set to “FRONT”
Audio Recording
Audio recording is performed according to the
setting in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Front Mic
Select]/[Front Mic Power]/[Front Mic 1 Ref.]/[Front
Mic 2 Ref.].
You can record audio from the four channels (CH1/
CH2/CH3/CH4) in synchronization with the video
images on this camera recorder.
Caution :
Select from the options below to record the audio.
Set [Front Mic Select] to “Stereo M/S” to convert
Microphone connected to [MIC IN] terminal
0
0
the audio signal to stereo (L/R) signal for
recording when a Mid/Side direct output
microphone is connected.
(XLR 5-pin)
Microphone or line input connected to the
[AUDIO INPUT1] terminal (XLR 3pin)
Microphone or line input connected to the
[AUDIO INPUT2] terminal (XLR 3pin)
0
0
Do not set to “Stereo L/R” or “Mono” when an L/
R out stereo microphone or a monophonic
microphone is connected.
When the switch setting is set to “REAR”
Select the audio input to the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2]
terminal using the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] switch.
Setting
[LINE]
Description
Use this setting when connecting to
AUDIO INPUT
PR
an audio device or other equipment.
[MIC]
Use this setting when connecting to
a dynamic microphone.
DIS
.
[MIC+48V] Use this setting when connecting to
a microphone (phantom
Setting the Number of Recording
Channels
microphone) that requires a +48 V
power supply.
Set the number of recording channels in
0
Memo :
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
When “LINE” is selected, configure the
reference input level in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set]
B [Rear Line Ref.].
0
[Audio].
Selecting Audio to Be Recorded in Each
Channel
When “MIC” or “MIC+48V” is selected, set the
reference input level in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set]
B [Rear Mic 1 Ref.]/[Rear Mic 2 Ref.].
0
Select the audio to be recorded in CH1/CH2/CH3/
CH4.
Switch
-
Connected Devices
Setting
Caution :
CH1 FRONT
Audio input of
0
0
0
0
0
0
When connecting a device that does not require
0
CH3
microphone 1 from
a +48 V power supply, make sure that it is not
set to the “MIC+48V” position.
[MIC IN] terminal
REAR
Audio input from
[AUDIO INPUT1]
terminal
Audio input of CH1
from the “UniSlot”
wireless receiver
When the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] switch is set to
“MIC”, make sure that a microphone is
connected to the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] terminal. If
you increase the recording level when a
microphone is not connected, noise from the
input terminal may be recorded.
0
WIRELESS
CH2 FRONT
CH4
Audio input of
When a microphone is not connected to the
[AUDIO INPUT 1/2] terminal, set the [AUDIO
INPUT 1/2] switch to “LINE”.
0
microphone 2 from
[MIC IN] terminal
REAR
Audio input from
[AUDIO INPUT2]
terminal
Audio input of CH2 (or
CH1) from the “UniSlot”
wireless receiver
When the switch setting is set to “WIRELESS”
Recording is performed as follows according to the
setting in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Wireless
Channel].
WIRELESS
Audio Recording
71
Manual Adjustment Mode (Manual
Adjustment)
“UniSlot”
Wireless
Receiver
CH1
CH1
CH2
Camera
The manual adjustment mode is enabled by
setting the [AUDIO SELECT CH1/2/3/4]-
[MANUAL/AUTO] selection switch on this
camera recorder to “MANUAL”. The audio level
for each channel can be configured in [A/V Set]
B [Audio Set] B [CH1 Audio Level](/2/3/4) B
[Front]/[Rear/Wireless].
0
Single:
Dual:
CH1/CH2
CH1
CH2
B
B
B
Caution :
0
Power is supplied to the “UniSlot” wireless
receiver when any of the CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
switches is set to “WIRELESS”.
You can adjust the level manually during the
0
recording, recording standby, and stop modes.
Memo :
The audio setting in Full Auto mode can be
0
Adjusting the Audio Recording Level
You can select to adjust the audio recording levels
for each of the four channels (CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4)
manually or automatically.
configured in [Camera Function] B [Full Auto] B
[Audio Set].
1
Set the [AUDIO SELECT CH1/2/3/4]-
[MANUAL/AUTO] selection switch to
“MANUAL” for the channel to be adjusted
manually.
AUDIO INPUT
PR
DIS
2
Turn the adjustment knob corresponding
to the channel to adjust the level.
When [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [CH1/2 DRC]/
[CH3/4 DRC] B [Threshold Level] is set to “Off”,
adjust such that the audio level meter -2 dB
does not light up even for loud sounds.
.
SDI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
100min
1080 /30p
50min
5 . 6 f
12 :34 :56
t
COMPRESS
TU709
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
5600
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
102400
-2dB
.
Audio Recording
72
Memo :
The [Threshold Level], [Attack Time], [Decay
0
Time], [Mode], etc. of the compressor can be
configured in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [CH1/2
DRC]/[CH3/4 DRC] for the audio to be recorded.
*
DRC (Dynamic Range Compressor)
The limiter operates according to the setting in
[A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Limitter] B [CH1](/
2/3/4).
0
When [Limitter] is set to “Off”, the limiter function
is disabled even when the [MANUAL/AUTO]
switch is set to “AUTO”. This may cause the
OVER indication of the level meter to light up.
The reference audio level is configured in [A/V
Set] B [Audio Set] B [CH1/2 Audio Ref. Lv.]
(common for CH1/2)/[CH3/4 Audio Ref. Lv.]
(common for CH3/4).
0
Automatic Adjustment Mode
Setthe[AUDIOSELECTCH1/2/3/4]-[MANUAL/
AUTO] selection switch to “AUTO” or press the
user button assigned with “Full Auto” to set Full
Auto mode to off. This activates the Automatic
Adjustment mode and the audio recording level
is configured automatically according to the
input level.
0
The audio setting in Full Auto mode can be
configured in [Camera Function] B [Full Auto] B
[Audio Set].
0
Memo :
If [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [CH1/2 DRC]/
0
[CH3/4 DRC] B [Threshold Level] is set to a
value other than “Off”, the compressor operates
according to the value set.
Audio Recording
73
References on DRC (Dynamic Range
Compressor) and Limiter
DRC and Limiter Configuration Block Diagram
[CH1/2 DRC] and [CH3/4 DRC] settings
0
Threshold : This is the point when the gain
Level
changes slowly. (See Figure 1)
Lowering the threshold level will
make it difficult for the recording
level to become saturated but this
will decrease the sound volume.
This is the response time from
when the sound exceeds the
threshold level until the level is
compressed. (See Figure 2)
“Fast” will result in fast response
time and “Slow” will result in slow
response time.
On/Off
CH1
CH1
Attack
Time
:
:
(CH3) Out
(CH3) In
Limiter
Limiter
On/Off
DRC
CH2
CH2
(CH4) In
(CH4) Out
Threshold
Attack Time
Decay Time
Mode
Decay
Time
This is the response time from
when the excessive sound input
falls below the threshold level until
the level compression operation is
canceled. (See Figure 2)
(Link/Separate)
.
“Fast” will result in fast response
time and “Slow” will result in slow
response time.
Limiter
Off
Mode
:
CH1 (CH3)/CH2 (CH4) operate
independently (mono) when
“Separate” is selected.
CHx Out
0dBFS
CH1 (CH3)/CH2 (CH4) operate in
tandem (stereo) when “Linked” is
selected. The level difference
between CH1 (CH3)/CH2 (CH4)
remains constant.
Threshold
Limiter
On
0
“Fast” and “Middle” in the Attack setting are
suitable for speech. “Middle” and “Slow” are
suitable for music.
CHx
In
Figure 1
Operating Level of DRC and Limiter
.
0
0
“Fast” and “Middle” in the Decay setting are
suitable for speech. “Middle” and “Slow” are
suitable for music.
When using a stereo microphone with CH1
(CH3)/CH2 (CH4), configure the Mode
setting to “Linked”.
To record different audio with CH1
(CH3)/CH2 (CH4), configure the Mode
setting to “Separate”.
Limiter Operation
0
0
Attack Time
Decay Time
A high speed response limiter that does not
exceed the saturation level (0 dBFS) for sharp
increase in the sound input not trackable by
DRC.
Figure 2 DRC Response Characteristics
.
DRC Operation
0
This operation helps to prevent the recording
level from reaching saturation (0 dBFS) by
slowing down the gain changes when the
excessive sound input exceeds the threshold
level.
[Limitter] settings
On
:
:
:
Enables the limiter separately for
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4.
Off
Disables the limiter separately for
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4.
AUTO/
The limiter is enabled when the
[MANUAL/AUTO] selection
switch is set to “AUTO” and
disabled when “MANUAL” is
selected.
MANUAL
SW Set
Audio Recording
74
Audio Output during
Recording
Time Code and User’s Bit
Time code and user’s bit data are recorded with the
video in this camera recorder.
You can check the recorded audio from the
monitor speaker or the headphone connected to
the [PHONE] terminal.
0
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording. (Display screen)
Adjust the volume of the speaker or headphone
using the [MONITOR] volume adjustment knob.
0
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording.
The display differs according to the menu settings.
1
Set [LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [TC/UB]
to “On”.
When “TC” or “UB” is selected, time code or
user’s bit data is displayed respectively on the
display screen.
.
Memo :
Warning tone is output when there is an
0
abnormality in the camera recorder or when the
battery is low.
AB CD EF 89
00H00M00S00
F
The volume of the warning tone can be adjusted
using the [ALARM] volume adjustment knob or
configured in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Min.
ALARM Level].
0
SDI IN
282min
100min
50min
00:00:00.00
1080 /30p
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
COMPRESS
ITU709
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
2
Select the display using the [TC DISPLAY]
TC/UB display switch.
Select time code display ([TC]) or user’s bit
display ([UB]).
Audio Output during Recording
75
Time Code Operation Mode
Setting Time Code
Generator
Select the time code operation using the [TC
GEN] switch.
Setting
F-RUN
Description
Presetting the Time Code
The time code operates in the run
mode at all times regardless of the
recording status.
Time code and user’s bit data generated from the
internal time code generator are recorded.
This section describes how to set [TC/UB] B [TC
Preset].
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Memo :
Synchronizes with the external
time code when an external time
code generator is connected.
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [WFrame Rate] is set to “50p”, “50i”
or “25p”, setting for “Drop” will be disabled.
0
You can configure the setting without accessing
0
R-RUN
The time code operates in the run
the [TC/UB] menu screen.
mode during recording. It
continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD
card is not replaced. If the SD card
is removed and recording is made
on another card, time code will be
recorded on the new card from
where it was left off in the previous
card.
Required Settings Before Preset
REGEN
Memo :
The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. When the
SD card is replaced, the last time
code recorded on the card is read
and recorded on a new card so that
the time code continues in running
order.
PRESET
GEN
F-RUN
R-RUN
REGEN
DISPLAY
TC
UB
.
1
Set the [TC GEN] switch to “R-RUN” or “F-
RUN”.
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] is
set to “Interval Rec” or “Frame Rec”, and the [TC
GEN] switch is set to “F-RUN”, R-RUN mode is
activated.
0
[R-RUN]
0
Preset data in the time code generator
operates in run mode during recording mode.
Set this when recording continuous time
code in connecting frames.
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is set to “High-Speed”, and
the [TC GEN] switch is set to “F-RUN”, R-RUN
mode is activated.
0
[F-RUN]
0
Time code starts to operate in run mode from
the preset time in the time code generator.
Time Code and User’s Bit
76
Setting Time Code
2
Select the framing mode for the time code
generator (only when the frame rate setting
is “60” or “30”).
1
Select [TC/UB] B [TC Preset] and press the
Set button (R).
To configure the setting, go to [TC/UB] B [Drop
Frame].
The [TC Preset] screen appears.
[Drop]:
0
TC/UB
Sets the run mode of the time code generator
to drop frame mode. Use this setting when
placing emphasis on the recording time.
[Non Drop]:
TC Preset
00:00:00:00
1
0
Sets the run mode of the time code generator
to non-drop frame mode. Use this setting
when placing emphasis on the number of
frames.
.
Memo :
Memo :
Drop frame/non-drop frame mode
When the [TC GEN] switch is set to “REGEN”,
the parameter is displayed as “REGEN” and
selection is disabled.
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [Frame Rate] is set to “60p”, “60i”, or
“30p”, the actual number of frames per second
is approximately 59.94 (29.97). However, the
time code processing standard is “60p”, “60i”, or
“30p” frames. To make up for the frame number
discrepancy, the drop frame mode (Drop) drops
the 00 frame and 01 frame every minute except
for minutes that are multiples of 10. However, in
the case of “60p”, the 00, 01, 02 and 03 frame
are dropped.
0
0
2
Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
TC/UB
The non-drop frame mode (Non Drop) does not
drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with
the actual time.
0
Cursor
TC Preset
00:00:00:00
During non-drop
frame
During drop frame
Memo :
.
Press the [USER3] button to reset each digit to
0
“0”. The cursor moves to the time digit (left).
3
Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
The time code is set and the screen returns
to [TC/UB].
0
0
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL/
RESET] button.
4
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
Setting Time Code Generator
77
Setting Time Code without Opening the
Menu
5
Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
The time code is set and the screen returns
to the normal screen.
0
0
To cancel the setting, press the [TC
PRESET] button.
Caution :
PRESET
When the camera recorder is switched to Media
0
mode during editing, editing will be canceled
and the screen will close.
GEN
F-RUN
R-RUN
REGEN
DISPLAY
TC
When editing the time code, operations of the
buttons configured in [Camera Function] B
[User Switch Set] are disabled.
0
UB
.
Memo :
Settings cannot be made in the following cases.
0
Recording Time Code in Continuation of
the Recorded Time Code on SD Card
0
When the [TC GEN] switch is set to
“REGEN”.
0
Menu screen is displayed.
This camera recorder is equipped with the time
0
The camera recorder is not in the Camera
code reader.
mode.
1
Set the [TC GEN] switch to “REGEN”.
When the camera recorder enters from
recording standby mode to recording mode,
it reads the time code already recorded on
the SD card and records the new time code
in continuation of that value.
0
0
Setting Time Code
1
2
Set the [TC DISPLAY] switch to “TC”.
Set the [TC GEN] switch to a setting other
than “REGEN”.
The same data as the user’s bit already
recorded on the SD card is recorded.
3
Press the [TC PRESET] button.
Memo :
When the [TC GEN] switch is set to “REGEN”,
0
the framing mode of the time code follows the
settings in [TC/UB] B [Drop Frame] instead of
the clip settings.
.
4
Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
Memo :
Press the [CANCEL/RESET] button to reset
0
each digit to “0”. The cursor moves to the left.
Setting Time Code Generator
78
Setting the User’s Bit
You can add the date, time or an 8-digit
hexadecimal number as the user’s bit to the
recorded image.
2
3
Select [TC/UB]B “Preset” and press the Set
button (R).
The [Preset] setting screen appears.
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place
the cursor at the item to set, then use the
cross-shaped button (JK) to change the
values.
Selecting a Recording Mode
Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets
between A and F can be specified for the user’s
bit.
Recording date/time information to the user’s
bit
1
Set [TC/UB] B [UB Mode] to “Date” or
“Time”, and press the Set button (R).
TC/UB
The date or time information is recorded to the
user’s bit.
Cursor
Memo :
When “Date” or “Time” is set, [Preset] appears
0
as “-” and cannot be set.
“Time” is displayed in the 24-hour format.
0
.
Presetting the User’s Bit
Memo :
Press the [CANCEL/RESET] button to reset each
0
Recording arbitrary information (8-digit
hexadecimal) to the user’s bit
digit to “0”. The cursor moves to the left.
1
Set [TC/UB] B [UB Mode] to “Preset”, and
press the Set button (R).
4
Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
The user’s bit is set and the screen returns to
[TC/UB].
0
0
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL/
TC/UB
RESET] button.
5
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
UB Mode
Preset
Date
Returns to the normal screen.
Time
Preset
1
.
Memo :
When the [TC GEN] switch is set to “REGEN”,
the parameter is displayed as “REGEN” and
selection is disabled.
0
Setting the User’s Bit
79
Setting User’s Bit without Opening the
Menu
Synchronizing the Time
Code with an External
Time Code Generator
This camera recorder comes with a [TC IN]
terminal.
PRESET
Connect a time code signal generator to the [TC
IN] terminal to synchronize with the SMPTE/EBU
LTC time code.
Memo :
GEN
F-RUN
R-RUN
REGEN
DISPLAY
TC
UB
After synchronization (slave lock), the internal
time code generator continues to run even if
there is no input from the external time code
generator.
0
.
Memo :
Settings cannot be made in the following cases.
0
0
When the [TC GEN] switch is set to
“REGEN”.
Connection
0
Menu screen is displayed.
0
The camera recorder is not in the Camera
Setting up the external time code generator as
a master device
mode.
Slave Device
Setting the user’s bit
TC OUT
1
2
Set the [TC DISPLAY] switch to “UB”.
To [TC IN] Terminal
of Another Camera
Set the [TC GEN] switch to a setting other
than “REGEN”.
GENLOCK
TC IN
3
4
Press the [TC PRESET] button.
Set the user’s bit (numbers between 0 and
External Synchronizing Signal
9, or alphabets between A and F).
Sync Signal
Generator
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
External Synchronizing Signal
Memo :
External Time
Press the [CANCEL/RESET] button to reset
0
Code Generator
each digit to “0”. The cursor moves to the left.
Master Device
LTC Time Code
5
Check the values and press the Set button
.
(R).
The user’s bit is set and the screen returns to
the normal screen.
0
0
To cancel the setting, press the [TC
PRESET] button.
Caution :
When the camera recorder is switched to Media
0
mode during editing, editing will be canceled
and the screen will close.
When editing the user’s bit, operations of the
buttons configured in [Camera Function] B
[User Switch Set] are disabled.
0
Setting the User’s Bit
80
Settings and Operation of the Camera
Recorder
1
Input the external synchronizing signal to
the external time code generator and the
[GENLOCK] terminal of this camera
recorder.
1
2
Set to Camera mode.
Memo :
0
Set [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [Genlock
BB signals or HDTV tri-level synchronizing
Input] to “GENLOCK”.
signals are used as the external synchronizing
signal.
3
4
Set the [TC GEN] switch to “F-RUN”.
If the power of the camera recorder is turned on/
off during input of external synchronizing
signals, the screen may appear disrupted for a
few seconds. This is not a malfunction.
0
Set LCD monitor or viewfinder to Display
screen.
5
Set the external time code generator or the
master device, and run the time code.
2
Input the SMPTE/EBU LTC time code from
the external time code generator to the [TC
IN] terminal of this camera recorder.
When the built-in time code generator is
synchronized with the external time code
data input, the Z icon on Display screen lights
up.
0
Connecting multiple devices, with one as the
master unit and the others as slave units
When time code is not synchronized or time
code input is not available, the Z icon goes
out.
0
Master Device
Slave Device
SDI IN
282min
100min
50min
0:00:00.00
1080 /30p
5 .
12 :
TC OUT
TC IN
COMPRESS
ITU709
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
102400
F2. 8
B
5600
GENLOCK
VIDEO OUT
.
.
Memo :
1
Connect the [TC OUT] terminal of the
master device with the [TC IN] terminal of
the slave device.
Connect the [VIDEO OUT] terminal of the
master device with the [GENLOCK]
terminal of the slave device.
The built-in time code generator will continue
operation even when the master device is
disconnected after synchronization.
0
2
User’s bit will become data in the master device.
0
Synchronizing the Time Code with an External Time Code Generator
81
Setting Zebra Pattern
When the luminance level range for displaying
zebra patterns is specified, diagonal lines (zebra
pattern) are displayed at areas with the specified
luminance levels during shooting.
Memo :
When [Zebra] is set to “1 Pattern”, “Top 2” and
0
0
0
“Bottom 2” cannot be selected.
If the area specified by two zebra patterns
overlaps, Zebra1 pattern will be displayed.
The timing to detect the zebra pattern display
can be configured only when “J-Log1” or “HLG”
is selected in [Color Space] and “Cam” or “Cam
+ Return” is selected in [Convert to ITU709].
1
Set the zebra display pattern.
Select the display pattern in [LCD/VF] B
[Shooting Assist] B [Zebra].
3
Display the zebra pattern.
When the viewfinder is connected, the zebra
pattern is displayed when the [ZEBRA]
switch is set to “ON” or push down to
“MOMENT”.
0
0
Zebra 1 Display
Example
Zebra 2 Display
Example
When the viewfinder is not connected, the
zebra pattern is displayed using the user
button assigned with “Zebra”.
.
2
Specify the brightness (luminance) level
range for displaying zebra pattern.
Set the maximum brightness limit in [LCD/VF]
B [Shooting Assist] B [Zebra] B [Top 1]/[Top
2], and the minimum brightness limit in [Bottom
1]/[Bottom 2].
Item
Top 1
Settings
Maximum
Options
.
5%, 10% to 95%,
During zebra pattern display,
(zebra icon)
brightness limit for 98%, 100%, Over
displaying Zebra 1
is displayed on the display screen in Camera
mode.
Bottom 1 Minimum
0%, 5% to 95%,
brightness limit for 98%, 100%
Memo :
displaying Zebra 1
Maximum
When the viewfinder is connected, priority is
0
Top 2
5%, 10% to 95%,
given to the [ZEBRA] switch on the viewfinder
so the user button assigned with “Zebra” will not
function.
brightness limit for 98%, 100%, Over
displaying Zebra 2
Bottom 2 Minimum
0%, 5% to 95%,
brightness limit for 98%, 100%
displaying Zebra 2
Setting Zebra Pattern
82
Setting Spot Meter
Color of Frame
Indicating the
Position
Item
Settings
The brightness of the object during shooting is
displayed.
Max & Min
Displays the
Max: Green
0
0
This function is useful when setting video or stage
lighting or when specifying camera exposure.
A cursor indicating the location and the brightness
(%) of that location are displayed in the images
shown on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
brightness (%)
and positions of
the brightest and
darkest areas in
the screen.
Min: Yellow
Zebra patterns display the brightness of output
video signals.
0
0
0
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
This function allows you to check the brightness
of input images from the lens without depending
on image processing such as gamma curve.
When [Color Space] is set to a value other than
“HLG” and “J-Log1”, the dynamic range of the
camera recorder is max. 600% and a brightness
range of 0% to 600% is displayed.
Max
Displays the
Green
Yellow
Green
brightness (%)
and position of the
brightest area in
the screen.
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
The value of the spot meter changes according
to the setting of [LCD/VF] B [Convert to
ITU709]/[White Level] when [Color Space] is set
to “HLG”.
0
Min
Displays the
brightness (%)
and position of the
darkest area in the
screen. Frame
may also be
When [Color Space] is set to “HLG” and
[LCD/VF] B [Convert to ITU709]/[White Level] is
set to “72.5%”, the dynamic range of the camera
recorder is max. 687% and a brightness range
of 0% to 687% is displayed.
stopped at the
current positions.
When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”, the
dynamic range of the camera recorder is max.
800% and a brightness range of 0% to 800% is
displayed.
0
Manual
Displays the
brightness (%) of (Blinks in green
the specified
position.
when specifying
the position)
Memo :
2
3
Assign the “Spot Meter” function to any of
the user buttons.
Spot meter may not be consistent with the zebra
0
display range.
1
Select one of the following from [Camera
Function] B [User Switch Set] B [Spot
Meter].
Press the user button that is assigned with
“Spot Meter”.
The operation switches as below when the
button is pressed.
Setting Spot Meter
83
When [Max & Min]/[Max]/[Min] is selected
When [Manual] is selected
The cursors appear according to the setting
The brightness of the cursor position is
A
A
when the button is pressed.
displayed when the button is pressed.
Green and yellow frames appear, and the
brightness levels of these areas are displayed.
Cursor
(Green)
Cursor
Brightness
(Green)
Indication
Brightness
Indication
Cursor
(Yellow)
.
By pressing the button, the cursors and
B
.
brightness indication disappear.
B Hold down the button in the state in A, the
positions of the brightest (Max) and darkest
(Min) areas in the screen are automatically
detected with regard to the changes of the
object, and the brightness level of these areas
are displayed.
Cursor
.
(Max: Green)
Brightness
C Hold down the button in the state in A or B, the
cursor blinks in green.
Indication
Cursor
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(JKHI) to specify the position to display the
brightness.
(Min:Yellow)
.
When you decide on the position, press the Set
button (R) to confirm.
C Pressing the button in the state in B stops the
automatic position detection. The frames are
fixed at the stopped positions and the
brightness levels are displayed.
Brightness
Indication
By pressing the button, the cursors and
D
brightness indication disappear.
Cursor
(Blinks in
green)
.
Frames are fixed at the stopped positions and
D
the brightness is displayed.
Memo :
.
When moving the cursor position, [Shutter]/[AE
0
Level] control is disabled.
When the brightness is 0 % in the entire screen,
the frame is fixed in the center.
0
Setting Spot Meter
84
Acquiring Positioning
Information by GPS v
u
Reception
Status
Display
(No
Positioning Status
GPS reception Receiving strong
in progress GPS signal. UTC
.
(signal strength: and positioning
strong)
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
This camera recorder comes with a built-in GPS
function. The GPS function is able to record the
positioning information.
GPS function is The [GPS] item is
During playback, you can also display the recorded
information on the playback screen.
display) turned off
Memo :
set to “Off”.
If positioning cannot be performed after waiting
for several minutes, this means GPS reception
is poor, and there is difficulty in receiving data.
Move to an open place with no obstructions.
Otherwise, GPS information will not be recorded
when shooting is performed.
0
1
Set [System] B [GPS] to “On”.
0
Positioning starts when the H icon on the
display screen starts blinking.
0
After positioning is complete, the H icon
switches to a solid light and records the
positioning information during shooting.
The icon that appears on the screen changes
according to the condition of signal reception
from the GPS satellite.
Signal may not be received depending on
circumstances such as locations that are
indoors or surrounded by tall buildings, or the
geographical conditions.
0
0
Precision error may occur in the position
information depending on the conditions of
reception.
SDI IN
282min
100min
50min
00
1080 /30p
t
Even when positioning is in progress,
information may be disrupted depending on the
condition of signal reception.
12 :34 :56
0
0
COMPRESS
ITU709
When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT1
Res.] is set to “1080p”, configuring [System] B
[GPS] to “On” changes the setting to “1080i”.
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
Reception
Status
Display
Positioning Status
[GPS] is set to GPS signal cannot
“On”, but signal be received. UTC
.
cannot be
received
and positioning
information cannot
be obtained.
(Yellow)
GPS search in UTC information
progress
can be obtained,
but not positioning
information.
.
(Blink)
GPS reception Receiving weak
in progress GPS signal. UTC
.
(signal strength: and positioning
weak)
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
GPS reception Receiving GPS
in progress signal. UTC and
(signal strength: positioning
.
medium)
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
Acquiring Positioning Information by GPS v u
85
Caution :
Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)
During Clip Review, only the [CANCEL/RESET]
0
and [REC] buttons are enabled.
Press the [CANCEL/RESET] button to cancel
clip review and return to “STBY” (recording
standby) mode.
You can check (review) the last recorded video clip
on the screen.
Press the [REC] button to cancel clip review and
enter recording mode. It will take some time to
start recording after the button is pressed.
When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the
whole clip is played back.
However, the video clip cannot be played back if
the settings of the camera recorder are different
from the video format (Resolution/Frame Rate/Bit
Rate/SD Aspect) of the clip.
0
0
0
0
Only video clips in the currently selected slot can
be reviewed.
When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip
Review function is disabled.
Memo :
Clip Review is unavailable when Clip
Continuous Rec is paused (“STBYC”, yellow
text). To operate Clip Review, use the
[CANCEL/RESET] button to set to “STBYC”
(white text) first.
To use this function, assign “Clip Review” to any
0
of the user buttons.
1
Press the user button assigned with the
“Clip Review” function during standby
(“STBY” is displayed).
Clip Review is unavailable when the camera
recorder is connected to an external equipment
and the equipment is in recording state.
Clip Review is unavailable when operating View
Remote via network connection.
0
0
Playback of the configured section starts.
Memo :
The video clip is played back according to the
0
setting in [Camera Function] B [User Switch
Set] B [Clip Review]. By default setting (Last
5sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip is played
back.
Clip Review does not function during live
streaming.
0
0
Clip Review does not function while the record
trigger is in the REC state.
When playback is complete, the camera
recorder exits Clip Review and returns to
“STBY” (recording standby) mode.
0
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review)
86
o When the upper limit is set to 110% and the lower
Displaying the Video
Signal Monitor
limit to 0%
The video signal monitor can be displayed using
the user button assigned with “Video Signal
Monitor”. The display operation functions
according to the setting in [Camera Function] B
[User Switch Set] B [Video Signal Monitor].
.
Displaying the Vectorscope
*
The area in red is not displayed.
Displays the saturation and hue of the video as a
circle.
o When the upper limit is set to 90% and the lower
The vectorscope can be displayed using the user
button assigned with “Video Signal Monitor”.
limit to 10%
Displaying the Waveform
Displays the luminance signal of the video as a
waveform.
The waveform can be displayed using the user
button assigned with “Video Signal Monitor”.
Displaying the Histogram
The histogram shows the brightness distribution,
and is employed mainly for checking the exposure
of the image.
Bottom
Top
.
How to read the histogram
The vertical axis denotes the number of pixels.
The horizontal axis denotes the pixel
brightness.
0
0
1
Set the histogram feature to ON.
The histogram can be displayed using the user
button assigned with “Video Signal Monitor”.
2
Set the upper and lower limits of the
histogram display.
After setting, the brightness level is displayed in
red color.
Item
Top
Settings
Options
Sets the maximum 5% to 110% (in 5 %
brightness limit for increments)
changing the
histogram display
color
Bottom Sets the minimum 0% to 105% (in 5 %
brightness limit for increments)
changing the
histogram display
color
Displaying the Video Signal Monitor
87
Recording
Dual Rec
Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions
If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the Dual Rec mode ([Slot Mode] is set to
“Dual”), pressing the [REC] button starts
recording simultaneously to the media in both
the slots.
0
By setting [System] to “HD+Web”, you can record
simultaneously at two different definitions.
The clips recorded to the media in both the slots
are identical, and two clips of the same content
can be created only on this camera recorder.
0
When HD+Web is selected:
0
Records a high-definition (HD) file to slot A and
a web file to slot B at the same time.
Web files can be used as a proxy file for the HD
file.
Memo :
If a recordable SD card is inserted into only one
0
of the slots, files will only be recorded to that slot.
The [Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.
Clip Cutter Trig is disabled.
0
0
0
0
[Slot Mode] cannot be selected.
Clip Review can only be performed for slot A.
(“No Media” appears if there is no card in slot A
while a card is inserted into slot B.)
Playback of web files is only possible from slot
B when “HD+Web” is selected.
0
.
Setting to Dual Rec Mode
Series Rec
1
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode]
to “Dual”.
Series Rec mode is specified in the factory
default.
0
“DUAL” appears on the enlarged display
screen.
([System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode] is set to
“Series”.)
If both the slots are loaded with recordable
cards, pressing the [REC] button starts
recording only to the media in the selected slot.
When the remaining space in the selected
media runs out, recording continues by
automatically activating the media in the other
slot.
0
DUAL
.
There is no indication on the display screen
when the Series Rec mode is set.
0
Recording Simultaneously at Two Different Definitions
88
Caution :
2
Start recording.
To perform recording in the Dual Rec mode, it is
0
Insert recordable media in both slots, and
press the [REC] button.
0
0
0
recommended that you start recording by
making use of two cards with the same capacity
and from the formatted state.
In the Dual Rec mode, recording to the media
in both slots starts at the same time.
Both the card slot marks turn red, and the
status indicators of both the card slots also
light up in red.
You can combine the use of the Dual Rec mode
with a special recording mode. While in the Dual
Rec mode, you can also set [Rec Mode] to
“Normal”, “Pre Rec”, “Clip Continuous”, “Interval
Rec”, or “Frame Rec”.
0
SDI IN
282min
100min
50min
00:00:00.00
1080 /30p
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
When both slots are inserted with recordable
cards, the Dual Rec (simultaneous recording)
operation can be performed. If a recordable
media is only inserted in one of the slots, you can
also start recording with one card.
0
0
0
Lit in red
COMPRESS
ITU709
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
In the Dual Rec mode, continuous recording by
switching from one slot to another cannot be
performed. Continuous recording will not be
performed if a recordable media is inserted in a
slot after recording to the other slot has started.
When recording to one slot is in progress with
the recorder set to the Dual Rec mode, inserting
a recordable media to the other slot does not
enable the Dual Rec operation. To perform the
Dual Rec operation, stop recording temporarily
(excluding pausing recording in the Clip
Continuous Rec mode), and start again.
When one of the cards is accidentally removed
while recording is in progress in the Dual Rec
mode, recording to the card in the other slot will
continue. However, repair of the accidentally
removed card by the recovery function may fail.
If an error occurs on one of the cards while
recording is in progress in the Dual Rec mode,
recording of the erroneous card stops, while that
of the other card continues.
3
Stop recording.
Press the [REC] button again.
0
0
Recording to both slots stops, and both the
card slot marks turn white.
The same clips are recorded to both cards.
0
SDI IN
282min
100min
50min
00:00:00.00
1080 /30p
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
White
COMPRESS
ITU709
0
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
Memo :
0
During recording in the Dual Rec mode, both the
0
0
card slot marks light up in red.
During recording in the Dual Rec mode to two
cards with a different amount of remaining
space, if the space of one card runs out,
recording to both slots will stop automatically.
After recording stops, recording automatically
resumes for the card with remaining space.
Although the clips are separated in this case, the
clips can be seamlessly joined by arranging
them on the timeline of the editing software since
they are recorded seamlessly.
0
Operations on clips recorded in the Dual Rec
mode, such as clip deletion in the Media mode
or appending of OK marks, can only be
performed on the card in the selected slot.
If the last clip on the cards that are inserted in
the two slots are different from each other, and
the time code operating mode is set to
0
“REGEN”, the REGEN mode for the selected
card slot will be enabled in the next recording.
Dual Rec
89
Backup Rec
1
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode]
to “Backup Y” or “Backup
”.
Backup Rec mode enables backup recording to
the media in Slot B or the expansion slot by
starting or stopping recording to Slot B or the
expansion slot independently of control using
the [REC] button.
0
“BACKUP” appears on the enlarged display
screen.
Start or stop the recording using [System] B
[Record Set] B [Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec] or
press the user button that is assigned with
“Backup Trig”.
0
BACKUP
.
Slot B
or
Slot A starts Slot A stops
Slot B
or
2
Start backup recording (to Slot B or the
expansion slot).
recording
recording
Expansion slot
starts recording
Expansion slot
stops recording
Select “REC” in [System] B [Record Set] B
[Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec] and press the
Set button (R).
0
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
0
Clip 2
Clip 2
Slot A
Slot B
0
Clip 1
Clip 3
or
Backuprecordingstarts, andvideoandaudio
are recorded to Slot B or the expansion slot.
The card slot mark of slot B turns red
(selected state), and the status indicator of
slot B also blinks in red.
Expansion
slot
0
.
Memo :
During the Backup Rec mode (when [Slot
Mode] is set to “Backup Y” or “Backup
you can control recording to the 2 slots at
0
SDI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
”),
100min
1080 /30p
50min
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
different timings, and backup recording can only
be performed on this camera recorder.
100min
50min
COMPRESS
ITU709
By setting Slot B or the expansion slot to perform
recording at all times (backup recording) and
using the [REC] button to start/stop recording of
only the required scenes in Slot A, you do not
have to worry about having to pause recording
and missing out on the important scenes as a
result.
0
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
Red (selected)
.
It is recommended to use a media with high
capacity in slot B.
Backup cannot be selected when [WFormat] is
configured to “Exchange” (U model) or “MP4” (E
model).
0
0
Backup Rec
90
3
5
Start normal recording (normal recording
into slot A).
Stop backup recording.
Select [STBY] in [System] B [Record Set] B
[Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec] and press the
Set button (R).
0
Press any of the [REC] buttons.
Recording into the media in slot A starts.
(The characters “RREC” appear in red.)
The card icon of slot A turns red (unselected
state), and the status indicator of slot A blinks
in red.
0
0
0
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
0
0
Recording to Slot B or the expansion slot
stops, and the card slot mark of Slot B or the
expansion slot turns white (selected state).
The status indicator of slot B lights up in
green.
Red (not selected)
SDI I
282min
00:00:00.00
100min
1080 /30p
0
50min
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
100min
50min
White
COMPRESS
ITU709
SI IN
282min
00:00:00.00
100min
108/30p
ND1
AE
/64
0
50min
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
/ 60
102400
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
.
100min
50min
4
Stop normal recording.
COMPRESS
ITU709
Press any of the [REC] buttons again.
0
0
Recording to slot A stops, and the card slot
mark of slot A turns white (unselected state).
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
0 The characters “RREC” (red) changes back
Memo :
to “STBY” (white).
When one of the media has run out of free space
during backup recording, recording will stop
only for the card that is full.
0
0
0
The status indicator of slot A goes out.
0
White (not selected)
When recording to each slot is stopped,
recording in the REGEN mode will be enabled
for the card slot in which recording started.
When recording is started in the other slot while
recording to one slot, the clip being recorded is
split and simultaneous recording to the other
card starts.
SDI N
282min
100min
50min
00:00:00.00
1080 /0p
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
100min
50min
COMPRESS
ITU709
ND1
AE
/ 60
When either normal recording or backup
recording is stopped while both are in progress,
the clip in the slot where recording is still ongoing
will be split.
0
0
0
0
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
.
Although the clips are separated during
recording the clips can be seamlessly joined by
arranging them on the timeline of the editing
software since they are recorded seamlessly.
Clip Cutter Trig cannot be performed during
backup recording.
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup Y” or
“Backup
“Normal”.
”, [Rec Mode] can only be set to
Backup Rec
91
Special Recording
Completed Clip
(Recorded video and audio)
Besides the normal recording mode, four special
recording methods are available in this camera
recorder. They are Pre Rec, Clip Continuous,
Frame Rec and Interval Rec.
Recording starts a
Select a mode from [System] B [Record Set] B
[Rec Mode].
number of seconds
earlier based on the
[Pre Rec Time] setting
Memo :
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
Special recording cannot be selected when
0
(Recording starts) (Recording stops)
[System]
B
[Record Set]
B
[Record Format]
B
.
[System] is set to “HD+Web” or “High-Speed”.
1
Set [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
Pre Rec
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]
to “Pre Rec”.
0
By setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec
Time], you can start recording video and audio
before actual recording starts based on the [Pre
Rec Time] setting.
0
0
0
The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYP”).
0
2
Press the [REC] button to start recording in
When starting actual recording while the camera
recorder is in Recording Standby (STBYP)
mode, you can start recording a few seconds
earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time] setting.
Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete
event without missing the initial scenes even if
you start the recording late.
Pre Rec mode.
The display changes (“STBYP” B
“RRECP”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
0
0
Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECP”
B “STBYP”) and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green.
Memo :
Pre Rec Time can be set in [System] B [Record
0
Caution :
0
Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Pre Rec Time].
When the interval between start and stop
recording is short, “STBYP” may not be
displayed immediately after recording is
complete.
“RRECP” B “STBYP” (“STBY” blinks in red) B
“STBYP” is displayed.
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is
displayed.
0
0
In the following cases, video and audio before
the specified Pre Rec time may not be recorded
even if recording starts.
0
Immediately after power on
0
Immediately after recording stops
0
Immediately after switching from Media
mode to Camera mode
0
Immediately after setting [Rec Mode]
0
Immediately after the end of Clip Review
0
Immediately after changing file format
0
Immediately after changing video format
Special Recording
92
Clip Continuous Rec
3
Pause recording.
Press the [REC] button again to pause
In normal recording, when the recording stops,
0
0
the image, audio, and accompanying data from
the start till the end of the recording are recorded
as one “clip” on the SD card.
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
B “STBYC” (yellow text)).
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
0
This mode allows you to consolidate several
rounds of “startstop recording” into one clip.
0
in red.
Memo :
When the [CANCEL/RESET] button is pressed
Example:
0
In normal recording, three clips are generated as
Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.
However, recording in this mode generates only
one clip.
while the camera recorder is paused (STBYC),
the display changes (“STBYC” (yellow text) B
“STBYC” (blinking yellow text) B “STBYC”
(white text)), and a “clip” is generated. The card
slot status indicator lights up in green.
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
(Recording starts) (Recording resumes)
(Recording resumes)
4
Resume recording. (Recording 2)
Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) B “RRECC”).
0
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
Press and hold [REC]
(Recording pauses) (Recording pauses) (Recording stops)
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
0
Recording 1
Recording 2
Recording 3
in red.
5
6
7
8
Pause recording.
Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
B “STBYC” (yellow text)).
0
Completed Clip
(Recorded video and audio)
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
0
Recording 1 Recording 2 Recording 3
in red.
.
Resume recording. (Recording 3)
1
2
Set “Rec Mode” to “Clip Continuous”.
Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) B “RRECC”).
0
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]
to “Clip Continuous”.
0
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
0
The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYC”).
0
in red.
Start recording. (Recording 1)
Press and hold the [REC] button.
Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Recording stops and the display changes
0
0
Clip Continuous mode.
(“RRECC” B “STBYC”). A “clip” is
The display changes (“STBYC” B
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
0
generated.
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
0
Press the [REC] button again.
The display changes (“STBYC” B
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
0
A new “clip” is generated from here.
0
Special Recording
93
Frame Rec
Memo :
The following operations cannot be performed
0
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
while recording is paused (STBYC, yellow text).
0
Clip Review operation
In this mode, recording starts with every press of
the [REC] button, and only the specified number of
frames is recorded.
0
Switching SD card slots
0
Switching operation mode
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Files are split into sizes of 4 GB (or 30 minutes)
0
regardless of the menu settings.
Memo :
Caution :
Audio will not be recorded.
0
0
Do not remove the SD card during recording
0
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file cannot be written to the
media.
(RRECC, red text) or recording pause
(STBYC, yellow text).
To remove the SD card in the “Clip Continuous”
mode, press the [CANCEL/RESET] button,
check that “STBYC” (white text) is displayed
and the card slot status indicator lights up in
green before you remove the card.
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is
displayed.
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
0
0
0
0
0
When the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is turned off
during recording or recording pause, recording
stops and power is cut off after a clip is
generated.
Press [REC]
(Frame Rec starts)
Press and hold [REC]
(Frame Rec stops)
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
If the power is cut off due to low battery power,
a proper clip may not be generated.
0
Recording resumes Recording resumes
Normal recording
(Padding data)
Pause
Pause
Pause
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
Actual clips recorded to the media
Specific amount of data
.
1
Set [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]
0
to “Frame Rec”.
0
The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYM”).
Special Recording
94
Interval Rec
2
3
Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
To configure the setting, go to [System] B
0
[Record Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].
In this mode, recording and pause are performed
repeatedly at the specified time interval. Only the
specified number of frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Start recording.
Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
and pause.
0
0
0
The display changes (“STBYM” B “RRECM”
B “STBYM” (yellow text)).
Memo :
Audio will not be recorded.
0
0
The card slot status indicator lights up in
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file will not be written to the
media.
green.
4
Repeat Frame Rec.
Press the [REC] button again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
0
After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
0
0
0
0
The display changes (“STBYM” B “RRECM”
B “STBYM” (yellow text)).
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
Frame Rec continues until the recording is
stopped (step 5).
5
Press and hold the [REC] button.
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
0
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
(Interval Rec starts)
(Interval Rec stops)
Caution :
0
Recording resumes Recording resumes
Do not remove the SD card during recording
(“RRECM”, red text) or recording pause
(“STBYM”, yellow text).
[Rec Interval]
[Rec Interval]
To remove the SD card during Frame Rec, press
the [CANCEL/RESET] button, check that
“STBYM” (white text) is displayed and the card
slot status indicator lights up in green before you
remove the card.
0
Normal recording
Pause
Pause
Pause
(Padding data)
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
When the [TC GEN] selection switch is set to “F-
RUN”, the time code will be recorded in “R-
RUN”.
0
0
Actual clips recorded to the media
Audio cannot be recorded. The audio level
meter is grayed out.
Specific amount of data
.
1
Set [Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]
0
to “Interval Rec”.
0
The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYN”).
2
Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
To configure the setting, go to [System] B
[Record Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].
Special Recording
95
Splitting the Clips Freely
(Clip Cutter Trig)
You can split the clips freely without having to stop
recording during shooting.
3
4
Set the time interval to start recording in
[Interval Rec].
To configure the setting, go to [System] B
[Record Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Interval].
Start recording.
Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
and pause.
0
1
Assign the “Clip Cutter Trig” function to
any of the user buttons.
After the specified time in [Rec Interval] has
passed, recording starts again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
0
2
Press the user button that is assigned with
“Clip Cutter Trig” during shooting.
A clip cut icon (Q) appears on the display
screen for 3 seconds, and the clip is split.
Interval Rec continues until the recording is
stopped.
0
0
The display changes (“STBYN” B “RRECN”
B “STBYN” (red text) B “RRECN” B
“STBYN” (red text)).
SDI IN
282min
100min
50min
00:00:00.00
1080 /30p
5 . 6 f t
The card slot status indicator lights up in red.
5
Press the [REC] button.
COMPRESS
ITU709
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
0
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
102400
F2. 8
B
5600
0
The display becomes “STBYN”.
.
Caution :
Memo :
Do not remove the SD card during recording
0
Clips cannot be split again for a few seconds
0
(RRECN, red text) or recording pause (STBYN,
yellow text).
after the operation is performed.
This item cannot be used when [Slot Mode] is
0
To remove the SD card during Interval Rec,
press the [CANCEL/RESET] button, check that
“STBYN” (white text) is displayed and the card
slot status indicator lights up in green before you
remove the card.
0
set to “Backup Y” or “Backup
”.
This item cannot be used when [Rec Mode] is
set to a value other than “Normal” or “Pre Rec”.
0
The split clips are recorded seamlessly without
interruptions in the video.
0
0
When the [TC GEN] selection switch is set to “F-
RUN”, the time code will be recorded in “R-
RUN”.
0
0
When Exchange (U model) or MP4 (E model) is
selected, the clip cutter function cannot be used.
Audio cannot be recorded. The audio level
meter is grayed out.
Special Recording
96
F
[USER3] Button
Playing Recorded Clips
Switches the selection status of the clip
selected by the cursor.
0
To play back clips recorded on SD cards, switch to
the Media mode.
Clips being selected are displayed with
check mark.
0
Press and hold the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button
in the Camera mode to enter the Media mode. A
thumbnail screen of the clips recorded on the SD
card is displayed.
G
H
[USER4] Button
Enters the action selection screen.
[DISPLAY] Button
Switches to “Standard Screen”, “Detailed
Screen” or “Media Information Screen”.
You can play back the selected clip on the
thumbnail screen.
Memo :
Thumbnail Screen
When an SD card without any clips is inserted,
0
“No Clips” is displayed.
“Standard Screen” and “Detailed Screen” are
0
available.
Use the [DISPLAY] button to switch between the
screens.
Operation Buttons
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
or front side of the camera recorder to operate the
thumbnail screen.
Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording
from the oldest to most recent.
0
Standard screen
K
J
I
E
F
G
A
B
H
G
A
D
C
D
E
B
C
B
F
H
C
.
.
A
SD Card Information
Displays the status of the inserted SD card,
selected SD card, write-protect switch, and
the need for restoring.
A
0
[MENU/THUMB] Button
Displays the menu.
0
0
Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the
thumbnail screen.
Use the [SLOT A/B] switch to switch slots.
Clips in slot A and B cannot be displayed at
the same time.
0
B
C
Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)
Write-protect switch of the SD card
:
W z
Moves the cursor.
in slot A is set.
[STATUS/SET] (Play) Button
SD card in slot B needs to be
restored or formatted, or is an
unsupported SD card.
:
S
Sets the values and items. (Confirm)
Plays back the selected clip.
0
0
D
E
[CANCEL/RESET] (Stop) Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
B
Clip Mark
Displays the clip information (properties).
[USER1] Button
E
A
Switches the OK mark of the clip selected by
the cursor.
0
D
C
B
If an OK mark has been appended, it will be
deleted. Otherwise, an OK mark will be
appended.
0
.
OK Mark
A
Clip is appended with OK mark.
Playing Recorded Clips
97
Memo :
Memo :
Dependent on the settings for [System] B
0
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
0
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System]/
[WResolution]/[YResolution]/[WFrame Rate]/
[YFrame Rate]/[WBit Rate], and [YBit Rate].
deleted on the camera recorder.
Continued From Mark
B
This mark indicates that the current clip is
continued from another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
Uneditable Mark
C
D
This mark indicates that an OK mark cannot
be appended to or deleted from the clip, and
the clip cannot be deleted.
0
E
Clip Name
The file name (clip number) of the selected clip
is displayed.
Continue Mark
F
Operation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
0
This mark indicates that recording of the current
clip is continued to another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
The action selection screen is displayed
when the [USER4] button is pressed.
0
Check Mark
E
G
Recording Start Time
A green check mark is displayed when the
0
Displays the recording start time of the clip.
clip is selected.
Memo :
Magenta and gray check marks are
displayed in multiple selection mode.
0
The date/time display is dependent on the
0
settings in [System] B [Date Style]/[Time Style].
C
D
Cursor
Clip to be worked on. Use the cross-shaped
button (JKHI) to move the cursor.
H
Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
0
0
Thumbnail Substitution Display
Black space below the scroll bar (white)
indicates that there are more pages.
When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,
this indicates the last page.
A
B
0
I
J
Remaining Battery Power
.
Number of Clips
A clip with corrupted management information.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
A
If none of the clips are selected, the “running
number/total number of clips” of the clip to be
displayed appears.
0
A clip that cannot be played back nor displayed
in thumbnail with the current video format
settings.
B
Even if only one clip is selected, the number
of selected clips in the current slot is
displayed.
0
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
K
Network Connection Icon
The network connection status is displayed.
0
Playing Recorded Clips
98
Detailed screen
Actions
*
Items that are common with the Standard screen
will not be described. Refer to “[Standard
The action selection screen is displayed when the
[USER4] button is pressed.
The following operations can be performed.
Item
Description
A
B
Select All Clips Selects all clips.
Select OK
Marked
Selects all clips appended with
OK mark.
Select Range
Specifies the range when
selecting multiple clips.
C
.
Deselect All
Add OK Mark
Clears all clip selections.
Appends an OK mark.
A
B
Thumbnail
Thumbnail of the clip selected by the cursor.
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to move the
cursor.
This Clip:
0
Appends an OK mark to the
clip pointed by the cursor.
Selected Clips:
0
Scroll Mark (DE)
Appends an OK mark to the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
All Clips:
0 If there are previous clips, D appears on the
left.
0 If there are more clips, E appears on the right.
0
The marks will not be displayed if there are
0
Appends an OK mark to all
clips.
no clips before and after the current clip.
C
Metadata
Delete OK Mark Deletes the OK mark.
Metadata of the clip pointed by the cursor.
You can use the cross-shaped button (JK) to
scroll.
This Clip:
0
Deletes the OK mark of the
clip pointed by the cursor.
Selected Clips:
0
Deletes the OK mark of the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
All Clips:
0
Deletes the OK mark of all
clips.
Playing Recorded Clips
99
Item
FTP Upload
Description
Playing back
Uploads a clip to the FTP server.
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
This Clip:
0
of the camera recorder to play back.
Uploads the clip pointed by
the cursor.
Selected Clips:
Uploads the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
0
All Clips:
0
C
B
Uploads all clips.
Delete Clips
Deletes clip. However, clips with
OK mark cannot be deleted.
A
This Clip:
0
0
Deletes the clip pointed by
the cursor.
.
A
Selected Clips:
Deletes the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
[STATUS/SET] Button (R)
Plays back/pauses the clip pointed by the
cursor.
0
0 You can press the cross-shaped button (HI)
to perform frame-by-frame forward playback
during pause mode.
All Clips:
0
Deletes all clips.
Trim This Clip
Memo :
Trims the clip pointed by the
B
Cross-shaped Button (JKH I)
cursor.
0 [J/K] Button:
Skips in the reverse or forward direction.
0 [H/I] Button:
The object of action is the clip of the current slot
0
0
0
0
being displayed.
During Playback:
[Selected Clips] cannot be performed if there are
no selected (appended with check mark) clips.
[This Clip] cannot be performed if there are more
than one selected (appended with check mark)
clips.
Fast forwards in the reverse or forward
direction.
0
While paused:
Frame-by-frame playback in the reverse
or forward direction.
If the write-protect switch of an SD card is set,
OK mark cannot be appended or deleted, and
the clips cannot be deleted and trimmed.
0
C
[CANCEL/RESET] Button
Stops playback.
1
In the thumbnail screen, move the cursor to
the clip to be played back.
Move the cursor to the clip to be played back
using the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
2
Press the [STATUS/SET] button (R).
Playback of the selected clip starts.
Audio Output during Playback
You can confirm the playback sound from the
monitor speaker, or the headphone connected
to the [PHONE] terminal. When a headphone is
connected to the [PHONE] terminal, sound
cannot be output from the monitor speaker.
Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker or
headphone using the [MONITOR] volume
adjustment knob.
0
0
Playing Recorded Clips
100
Time Code Playback
Time code or user’s bit recorded on an SD card can
be displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Memo :
The time code is also superimposed on the
video signal output from the [HD/SD SDI OUT
1/2] terminal.
0
If a section without time code is played back, the
time code will stop. However, playback will
continue.
0
Displaying Information during Shooting
Pressing the [DISPLAY] button during playback
displays the display screen.
Pressing the [USER4] button during shooting
switches the display information between camera
information display, GPS display and turning off the
display.
The GPS display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
0
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
0
0dB
F1.6
1/100
5600K
USER4
Camera Information Display
Display Off
USER4
+35.483197
+139.652172
USER4
GPS Display
.
Memo :
Trimming information is displayed while
0
trimming is in progress. In this case, pressing the
[USER4] button does not switch the display.
Playing Recorded Clips
101
Deleting Clips
Delete clip.
Memo :
4
Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
Deleting starts.
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
0
deleted on the camera recorder.
Delete This Clip?
Read-only clips can be deleted on a PC.
0
Delete
Cancel
4
Deleting One Clip
Delete the clip (one clip) pointed by the cursor in
[Delete Clips] B [This Clip] in the menu.
Memo :
Clips with OK mark cannot be deleted.
0
Deleting...
Stop
During Thumbnail Screen
1
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted.
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
Selecting and Deleting Multiple Clips
To select and delete multiple clips, refer to
1
Deleting All Clips
.
Delete all clips that are displayed.
2
3
Press the [USER4] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
1
2
3
Press the [USER4] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
Select [Delete Clips] B [This Clip] and press
the Set button (R).
Select [Delete Clips] B [All Clips].
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
Deleting starts.
Memo :
The time taken to delete clips depends on the
This Clip
Selected Clips
All Clips
3
0
number of clips to be deleted.
.
Deleting Clips
102
During Playback or Pause Screen
Appending/Deleting OK
Mark
1
Press [USER1] button during clip playback.
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
0
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
You can append OK marks to the clips for
important scenes.
0
0
0
0
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted, thus protecting the important clips.
When the camera recorder is in Media mode,
you can delete the OK marks appended during
recording, or append/delete OK marks after
shooting.
During Thumbnail Screen
1
Press the [USER1] button.
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
0
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
0
OK Mark
.
Memo :
The clip pauses when an OK mark is appended
0
or deleted during playback.
Appending/Deleting OK Mark of
Multiple Clips
To select and append/delete OK mark for multiple
OK Mark
.
Appending/Deleting OK Mark
103
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly
Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple
Clips
1
Move the cursor to a clip without a check
mark, and press the [USER3] button.
A green check mark appears on the clip.
Multiple clips can be selected during thumbnail
screen or playback screen display.
0
After selecting multiple clips, perform
0
1
appending/deleting of OK mark, deleting of clips
using the action selection screen.
After selecting multiple clips, the selections will
be canceled by the following operations.
0
0
When [Deselect All] in the action menu is
.
selected
2
Repeat Step 1 to select multiple clips.
0
When exiting Media mode from the thumbnail
Multiple clips can be selected.
Press the [USER4] button while the multiple
clips are selected.
0
0
screen
0
When removing the SD card
0
When switching the slot in use
0
Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
Deletes OK mark together:
0
0
[Delete OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
Uploading selected clips to the FTP server
together:
[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]
Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips] B [Selected Clips]
0
Memo :
Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [USER3] button will cancel the
selection.
0
If the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
0
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple Clips
104
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively
Press the [USER4] button.
Select “Select Range” in the action
selection screen, and press the Set button
(R).
5
Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
range.
1
2
The check marks change from magenta to
green.
0
0
Pressing the [USER4] button while the
multiple clips are selected displays the action
selection screen. The following operations
can be performed.
Select All Clips
0
Appends OK mark together:
Select OK Marked
[Add OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
Select Range
2
0
Deletes OK mark together:
Deselect All
Add OK Mark...
[Delete OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
Delete OK Mark...
FTP Upload...
0
Uploading selected clips to the FTP server
together:
[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]
Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips] B [Selected Clips]
.
0
3
Move the cursor to the beginning (or end)
of the range for multiple selection, and
press the Set button (R).
Memo :
0
Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [USER3] button will cancel the
selection.
4
Move the cursor to the other end of the
range.
Magenta check marks appear on the clips
within the range. (Including clips that were
already selected.)
0
0
If the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
0
Gray check marks appear on selected clips
that are outside the range.
Selected Range:
3
Start Position
Selected Range:
4
End Position
.
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple Clips
105
Trimming Recorded Clips
C
Trimming information
:
:
:
:
Indicates the available space in
the storage media (W or Y)
Indicates the time code of the in
point
W or Y
You can extract (trim) the necessary parts of a clip
recorded in the SD card.
7
The trimmed clip is saved as a new file on the same
SD card as the original clip. No changes are made
to the original clip.
Indicates the time code of the out
point
8
Indicates the duration from the in
point to the out point
9
1
Switch to Media mode.
Switch the mode using the [CAM/MEDIA]
selection button on the side control panel.
Memo :
0
The trimmed clip will be saved to the same card
2
Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed.
Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
slot as that of the original clip.
[Duration] appears in yellow if the duration is 10
minutes or longer. Trimming cannot be
performed in this case.
0
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [WFrame Rate] is set to “
70M (XHQ)”, [Duration] appears in yellow if the
duration is 6 minutes or longer. Trimming
cannot be performed in this case.
2
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is configured to “HD
EXT(SSD)”, [Duration] appears in yellow if it is
6 minutes or longer. Trimming cannot be
performed in this case.
.
3
4
Press the [USER4] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
Select [Trim This Clip], and press the Set
[Duration] appears in yellow if the duration is
longer than the recordable time on the storage
media. Trimming cannot be performed in this
case.
0
0
button (R).
Playback of the selected clip starts.
When trimming starts, the display switches to
the Media Display screen.
Select Range
Deselect All
Add OK Mark...
Delete OK Mark...
FTP Upload...
5
Specify the in point.
0 Operate buttons such as H/I or J/K to move
the video to the in point.
Delete Clips...
Trim This Clip
4
Specify the in point by pressing the [USER1]
button at the point you want to start trimming.
0
6
Specify the out point.
1000/2000
00:00:00.00
282min
0 Operate buttons such as H/I or J/K to move
the video to the out point.
1920x1080
30p 50M
Jan 24,2018
12 :34 :56
Specify the out point by pressing the
[USER3] button at the point you want to end
trimming.
0
IN
OUT
TRIM
A
30min
11:22:33.00
11:23:44.00
00:08:22
0
C
7
Perform trimming.
B
Press the [USER4] button to perform trimming.
.
Memo :
A
Guide
While trimming is in progress, you can press the
0
Operation guide
Position bar
[CANCEL/RESET] button to return to the
thumbnail screen.
B
:
:
:
Current position of the video
6
7
8
When trimming the in and out point, the in point
trimmed may be up to one second before the
specified in point and the out point trimmed may
be up to one second behind the specified out
point.
0
Position to start trimming (in point)
Position to end trimming (out point)
Trimming Recorded Clips
106
A
B
C
[USER1] Button
Basic Operations in Menu
Screen
Adds the selected menu or submenu item to the
[Favorites Menu].
[USER3] Button
Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or [UB
Preset] setting screen.
Pressing the [MENU/THUMB] button displays
the menu screen on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
0
[MENU/THUMB] Button
Various settings for shooting and playback can
be configured on the menu screen.
There are two types of menu screens - [Main
Menu] and [Favorites Menu].
0
0
0
Displays the menu screen. The [Main Menu]
screen is displayed by default.
0
During normal usage, [Main Menu] is
displayed if the previous menu operation
ended at [Main Menu], and [Favorites Menu]
if the previous menu operation ended at
[Favorites Menu].
0
[Main Menu] contains all the setting items of the
camera recorder, classified according to
functions and uses, while [Favorites Menu]
allows users to customize the menu items freely.
Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the normal
screen.
0
0
The operating procedures and main screen
displays are the same for both menus.
The menu screen can also be displayed on
external monitors connected to the video signal
output terminal.
0
0
Pressing and holding down the button while
the menu is displayed switches the [Main
Menu] screen to the [Favorites Menu] or vice
versa.
The menu screen can also be displayed on the
View Remote screen.
D
E
[CANCEL/RESET] Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
0
Cross-shaped Button (JKH I)
:
:
:
:
Moves the cursor upward.
J
K
H
I
Operation Buttons
Moves the cursor downward.
Moves back to the previous item.
Moves forward to the next item.
To operate the menu, use the cross-shaped
buttons on the side operation panel of the camera
recorder or the cross-shaped buttons at the front of
the camera or at the bottom of the lens.
F
G
[STATUS/SET] Button (R)
Sets the values and items.
[DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] screens.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
.
Basic Operations in Menu Screen
107
Changing Setting Values
Display and Description of the Menu
Screen
F
E
Display Settings
Selecting Menu Items
A
On
Off
Audio Meter
I
Battery
Date/Time
Date Style
Time Style
Shutter
H
D
C
Display Settings
YMD
24hour
SEC
Audio Meter
Battery
Off
Time
On
G
A
B
Date/Time
Set
Cancel
B
F
E
Date Style
Time Style
Shutter
YMD
24hour
SEC
.
A
Menu Item to Change
C
D
Menu item to be changed.
Favorites
Add
A list of setting values F appears in a pop-up.
.
B
C
Operation Guide
A
B
Cursor
Guide for the current operation buttons.
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-
Setting Values Before Change
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
Setting values before changing. The
background of the item is displayed in blue.
Menu Item
Displays the names of the menu item and
sub-menu.
0
D
E
Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
Menu items with [...] after them indicates that
0
Cursor
there is a sub-menu to access.
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
C
Fixed Item
Items that cannot be changed are displayed in
gray and cannot be selected.
F
List of Setting Values
A pop-up displaying a list of setting values for
selection.
0
D
E
Operation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
The height of the pop-up depends on the
number of settings available. Use the scroll
bar D to confirm the current display status.
0
Setting Value
Setting values for the menu items.
For menus with sub-menus, values are not
displayed.
F
G
Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
Header
Indicates the current menu type with the line
color.
Blue
:
:
[Main Menu] Screen
[Favorites Menu] (Operation
screen)
Green
Magenta
:
[Favorites Menu] (Editing screen)
H
Remaining Battery Power
Memo :
The battery mark that indicates the battery level
0
may not appear depending on the battery in use.
I
Menu Title
Title of the currently displayed menu.
Basic Operations in Menu Screen
108
Text Input with Software Keyboard
Use the software keyboard to enter the [Setup
File] subname, [Clip Name Prefix], and the settings
under [Network].
A
B
Character Entry Field
Field for entering the title.
0
0
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Setup File] subname or up to 4 characters
for the [Clip Name Prefix].
Character Cursor
Entering a subname
Select a character using the key cursor D, and
press the Set button (R) to input the selected
character at the position of the character cursor.
The character cursor moves to the next position
on the right each time a character is input.
The cursor can be moved using the arrow keys
H.
A
B
H
C
D
E
Character Keys
C
Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to move
the key cursor D to the character you want to
enter.
G
F
D
E
Key Cursor
.
Indicates the currently selected character or
item. Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to
move the cursor.
Entering the [Clip Name Prefix]
Confirmation Buttons
Select [Set]/[Store] and press the Set button
0
A
B
(R) to confirm the title.
0 Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R)
on the side control panel of the camera
recorder to abort character input and return
to the previous screen.
H
E
C
F
G
[SP] Space Key
Select [SP] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
enter a space at the current position of the
character cursor B.
Cancel
Set
D
.
[3 ] Backspace Key
Settings under [Network]
Select [3 ] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
delete the character on the left of the character
cursor B.
The keyboard displayed varies according to the
settings.
H
I
Arrow Keys
A
Moves the position of the character cursor B.
Character Switch Button
Switches the character buttons C to the upper
case, lower case, and symbols.
H
G
B
C
I
F
E
D
.
Basic Operations in Menu Screen
109
Shutter
Camera Function Menu
For specifying shutter-related settings.
When “Slow” or “Step/Variable” is selected,
configure the shutter speed by pressing “SEL” of
the [SHUTTER] switch and using the cross-shaped
button (J K).
Menu screen for specifying operation settings
during shooting.
This item can only be selected in the Camera
mode.
The cross-shaped button (H I) can also be used
to switch between step and variable.
Chroma Aberration
Slow:
0
For configuring whether to apply ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Compensation) to reduce chromatic
aberration of magnification which appears as
colored outlines.
Configures the shutter speed to low speed.
EEI:
0
Select this to perform automatic control of the
shutter.
Auto:
0
Step/Variable:
0
Configures to ALAC automatically when an
ALAC-compatible lens is used.
Off:
Step mode switches the shutter speed in fixed
values. Selecting Variable configures the setting
to variable scan. Use this setting when shooting
a PC monitor.
0
Disables the ALAC function.
[Setting Values: RAuto, Off]
[Setting Values: Slow, EEI, RStep/Variable]
Memo :
Memo :
This function does not support CAC lenses,
which adopts a different method of
compensation from ALAC lenses.
This function does not correct axial chromatic
aberration.
0
When “J-Log1” or “HLG” is selected for [Camera
Process] B [Color Space], “EEI” cannot be
selected.
0
0
0
AE Level
When in the “Auto” mode, chromatic aberration
correction is functioning if chromatic aberration
correction on the status screen (camera) is
configured to “On”.
For setting the convergence level during AE (Auto
Exposure).
[Setting Values: -6 to +6 (R0)]
Memo :
0
Pixel Mapping
When “J-Log1” or “HLG” is selected for [Camera
Process] B [Color Space], [AE Level] cannot be
configured.
Detects white spots in the sensor and performs
correction to reduce the defect. To perform pixel
mapping, do so in the Camera mode after attaching
the lens cap.
AE level can also be configured using the cross-
shaped button (J K) after operating the user
button that is assigned with the AE Level
function.
0
[Setting Values: Execute, RCancel]
Memo :
It is recommended to use the AC adapter as the
0
power supply.
AE Speed
Selection for this item is disabled when [System]
is configured to “High-Speed”.
0
For setting the convergence speed during AE (Auto
Exposure).
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
AE Area
For configuring the AE detection area.
[Setting Values: Center, Bottom, RNormal]
Camera Function Menu
111
AGC Limit
FAW
For setting the maximum gain value of “AGC”,
which electrically boosts the sensitivity level
according to the brightness automatically.
For setting the position in the white balance switch
[WHT.BAL] to assign the FAW (Full Auto White
Balance) function.
When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “dB”:
0
[Setting Values: B, A, PRST, RNone]
FAW Speed
[Setting Values: 30 dB, 24 dB, R18 dB, 12 dB,
6 dB]
For configuring the operation speed of FAW (Full-
When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “ISO”:
0
time Auto White Balance)
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
[Setting Values: ISO 25600, ISO 12800, RISO
6400, ISO 3200, ISO 1600]
GAIN L, GAIN M, GAIN H
For setting the gain value of each position on the
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
[GAIN] selection switch.
For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when
The setting is fixed at “AGC” in the Full Auto mode.
In addition, the sensitivity setting in [Lolux] is used.
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F5.6, F4, F2.8, RF2, Open]
When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “dB”:
0
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
[Setting Values: AGC, 30 dB, 27 dB, 24 dB, 21
dB, 18 dB, 15 dB, 12 dB, 9 dB, 6 dB, 3 dB, 0 dB,
-3 dB, -6 dB]
For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F16, RF11, F8, F5.6]
(Default values for GAIN L: 0dB, GAIN M: 6dB,
GAIN H: 12dB)
EEI Limit
When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “ISO” and [Camera Process] B [Color
Space] is set to a value other than “HLG”:
[Setting Values: AGC, ISO25600, ISO20000,
ISO16000, ISO12800, ISO10000, ISO8000,
ISO6400, ISO5000, ISO4000, ISO3200,
ISO2500, ISO2000, ISO1600, ISO1250,
ISO1000, ISO800, ISO640, ISO500, ISO400]
(Default values for GAIN L: ISO800, GAIN M:
ISO1600, GAIN H: ISO3200)
0
For setting the shutter speed control range when
the Automatic Shutter mode (EEI) is enabled.
[Setting Values: 4F-stop, R3F-stop, 2F-stop]
Smooth Trans
For setting the shock reduction function, which
slows down the sudden change when switching
with the [GAIN] or [WHT.BAL] switch.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
Memo :
“AGC” cannot be selected when “J-Log1” or
This function is disabled when AGC is operating.
0
0
“HLG” is selected for [Camera Process] B [Color
Space].
Gain
9
When “J-Log1” is selected for [Camera
Process] B [Color Space], the base ISO speed
for achieving the 800% dynamic range of [J-
Log1] is “[ISO1000]”. The square brackets
appear only in the case of the base ISO.
0
For configuring the speed at which gain changes
when [Smooth Trans] is set to “On”.
[Setting Values: Fast, R, Middle, Slow, Off]
Shutter
9
For configuring the speed at which the shutter
changes when [Smooth Trans] is set to “On”.
[Setting Values: Fast, R, Middle, Slow, Off]
White Balance
9
For configuring the speed at which white balance
changes when [Smooth Trans] is set to “On”.
[Setting Values: Fast, R, Middle, Slow, Off]
Camera Function Menu
112
User Switch Set Item
Lens REC
For selecting a function to be assigned to the
Record button (VTR button, etc.) on the lens.
A menu is displayed only when the FS-790 or
FS-900 is connected.
USER0 to USER8, USER9J, USER10K,
USER11H, USER12I, USER13R (front),
USER1 (VF), USER2 (VF), LENS RET
Intercom2:
0
The preconfigured function can be operated (on/
off, start, switch) by assigning one of the functions
in the following menu table to [USER0], [USER1],
[USER2], [USER3], [USER4], [ONLINE/5],
[USER6], [USER7], [USER8], [J/9], [K/10], [H/11],
[I/12], front [SET/USER13] button, [RET] button
on the lens and the [USER1(VF)] and [USER2(VF)]
buttons on the viewfinder.
Turns on/off the Intercom 2 connection.
Intercom1:
0
Turns on/off the Intercom 1 (intercom)
connection.
Rec:
0
Starts/stops recording.
[Setting Values: Intercom2, Intercom1, RRec]
Memo :
Set according to the shooting conditions. Usable in
the Camera mode.
This function is available when it can be
assigned to the Record button (VTR button, etc.)
on the lens in use.
0
Configure to “Intercom1” when configuring the
intercom with the FS-790 connected.
When the FS-900 or FS-790 is connected, the
functions of “Intercom1” and “Intercom2” can
also be assigned to a user button.
0
0
Memo :
When a viewfinder is connected, priority is given
to the [ZEBRA] switch of the viewfinder and the
user button that is assigned with the “Zebra”
function will not function.
0
“Focus Assist +” is a combination of the “Focus
Assist” and “Expanded Focus” functions.
“Skin Detail +” is a combination of the “Skin
Detail” and “Skin Area” functions.
0
0
0
User Switch Set...
For specifying user button related settings.
The [SET/USER13] button at the front functions
as the [STATUS/SET] button in the factory
setting, but it can also be assigned with the
[USER13] function.
Full Auto...
For configuring the Full Auto settings.
If “VF Display” is assigned to the [USER1(VF)]
or [USER2(VF)] button of the viewfinder, the
button can also be used in the Media mode.
The following functions can be assigned only for
u w.
0
0
Camera Angle[Tagging] u w
For specifying tagging settings for the camera
angle.
[ODK Tagging]OFF, [ODK Tagging]DEF, [ODK
Tagging]KO, [ODK Tagging]KOR, [ODK
Tagging]P, [ODK Tagging]PR, [ODK
Tagging]FG, [ODK Tagging]FGB, [ODK
Tagging]REMOVE
[Setting Values: SB, RSL, EZ, SL2, EZ2, TV]
Camera Function Menu
113
The settable values for each item are as follows.
Button [8]
[5]/[6]/[7]/
[0]/[1]/
[2]
[USER1(VF)]/
[USER2(VF)]
[LENS RET] [3]/[4]/
[9]/[10]/
[11]/[12]/
[13]
Setting Value
VF Display
Cancel
Status
Slot Select
Auto Upload
Return over IP
Live Streaming
Load Picture File
Return Video
Clip Review
OK Mark
Clip Cutter Trig
Backup Trig
Rec
LCD Backlight
Spot Meter
Focus Assist
Expanded Focus
Focus Assist +
Marker
Zebra
Video Signal Monitor
AWB
White Balance
Black Compress
Black Stretch
Skin Detail
Skin Area
Skin Detail +
Zoom Wide
Zoom Tele
FULL AUTO
c
c
b
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
b
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
b
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
b
c
b
c
c
b
b
b
b
c
c
c
c
b
b
b
c
c
c
b
b
b
c
c
c
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
c
b
c
b
c
c
c
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
c
b
b
c
b
b
b
b
c
c
b
b
b
b
b
c
b
b
b
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
b
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
AE Level
AE Lock
Variable Gain
Lolux
c
c
c
c
None
c
:
Settable
c
b
:
Not settable
Camera Function Menu
114
Lolux
AE Lock
To increase the sensitivity when in dim
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “AE Lock”
function.
surroundings, set a value in the Lolux mode.
When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “dB”:
0
FAW:
0
Use this to fix the FAW (Full-time Auto White
Balance) function to the value when the user
button assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed.
[Setting Values: 42 dB, R36 dB, 30 dB, 24 dB]
When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “ISO”:
0
AE:
0
0
[Setting Values: ISO 102400, RISO 51200, ISO
25600, ISO 12800]
Use this to fix the Auto function of Gain, Iris, or
Shutter to the value when the user button
assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed.
AE/FAW:
Clip Review
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “Clip Review”
function.
Use this to fix the FAW (Full-time Auto White
Balance) function and the Auto function of Gain,
Iris, or Shutter to the value when the user button
assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed.
Last 5sec:
0
0
0
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
[Setting Values: FAW, RAE, AE/FAW]
ending.
Memo :
Top 5sec:
This feature only works when Iris, Shutter, Gain
0
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
or White Balance is set to Auto mode.
beginning.
“AE Lock” is canceled when the user button
assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed, or when any
of the functions that can be locked is operated
regardless of the mode (Manual or Auto).
“AE Lock” is canceled when the lens extender is
operated and when the iris is adjusted by 2/3
(two-third) stop or more.
0
Clip:
Views the entire clip.
[Setting Values: RLast 5sec, Top 5sec, Clip]
0
0
Spot Meter
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “Spot Meter”
function.
“AE Lock” is canceled in the following cases.
0
When the user button that is assigned with
Max & Min:
0
“AE Lock” is pressed
Displays the brightest and darkest areas of the
0
When changes are made to the iris (including
image.
operation of the lens extender), gain and
shutter settings
Max:
0
0
0
Displays the brightest area of the image.
0
When changes are made to the AE level
Min:
0
When there is a switch between the Camera
Displays the darkest area of the image.
and Media modes
Manual:
Displays the image brightness at a specified
position.
Zoom Speed
[Setting Values: RMax & Min, Max, Min, Manual]
For configuring the zoom speed when operating
the user button that is assigned with “Zoom Tele”
or “Zoom Wide”.
Memo :
When “HLG” is selected in [Camera Process] B
[Color Space], the value of the spot meter
changes according to the setting of [LCD/VF] B
[Convert to ITU709]/[White Level].
0
Increasing the value increases the speed.
[Setting Values: 8 to R 5 to 1]
Camera Function Menu
115
Expanded Focus
Return Video
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “Expanded
Focus” function.
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “Return
Video” function.
Limited Time:
0
0
CameraGPiP:
Activates the timer.
Pressing the user button assigned with the
“Return Video” function each time toggles
between the captured video and picture-in-
picture return video.
Turns off the “Expanded Focus” function about
3 seconds after the user button assigned with
“Expanded Focus” is pressed.
Momentary:
0
0
0
CameraRPiP:
The “Expanded Focus” function is enabled
during the interval while the user button
assigned with “Expanded Focus” is pressed.
Toggle:
The picture-in-picture return video is displayed
when the user button assigned with the “Return
Video” function is pressed and held down, and
the captured video is displayed when the button
is released.
Pressing the user button assigned with
“Expanded Focus” each time switches the
“Expanded Focus” function to on or off.
0
0
0
PiPRCamera:
The captured video is displayed when the user
button assigned with the “Return Video” function
is pressed and held down, and the picture-in-
picture return video is displayed when the button
is released.
[Setting Values: Limited Time, Momentary,
RToggle]
Memo :
When “Toggle” is selected after assigning the
expanded focus to any of the [J/9], [K/10], [H/
11], [I/12] buttons, press the [CANCEL/
RESET] button if you want to disable the
function.
0
PiPRReturn:
The return video is displayed when the user
button assigned with the “Return Video” function
is pressed and held down, and the picture-in-
picture return video is displayed when the button
is released.
Video Signal Monitor
CameraRReturn:
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “Video Signal
Monitor” function.
The return video is displayed when the user
button assigned with the “Return Video” function
is pressed and held down, and the captured
video is displayed when the button is released.
Switch in Order:
0
Pressing the button each time switches the
mode in the following sequence: Vectorscope,
Waveform, Histogram, Off.
[Setting Values: CameraGPiP, CameraRPiP,
PiPRCamera, PiPRReturn, RCameraRReturn]
On/Off:
0
Switches the function configured in [LCD/VF] B
[Shooting Assist] B [Video Signal Monitor] to on
or off.
[Setting Values: RSwitch in Order, On/Off]
Camera Function Menu
116
Full Auto Item
White Balance
For configuring the operation of each item in the
For specifying the White Balance operation.
Full Auto mode.
FAW:
0
Full Auto can be turned on/off using the user button
assigned with the “Full Auto” function.
Sets the white balance to Auto.
SW Set:
0
Follows the setting of the [WHT BAL] switch.
Gain
[Setting Values: RFAW, SW Set]
For specifying the Gain operation.
Audio
AGC:
0
Sets the gain to Auto.
SW Set:
For configuring the audio operation.
0
Auto:
0
Follows the setting of the [GAIN] switch.
Sets the audio sound to Auto.
SW Set:
[Setting Values: RAGC, SW Set]
0
Follows the settings of the [AUDIO CH1/2/3/4]-
[MANUAL/AUTO] switches.
Iris Control
For specifying the Iris control operation.
[Setting Values: RAuto, SW Set]
Auto:
0
Sets the iris to Auto.
SW Set:
0
Follows the setting of the [IRIS A/M] switch on
the lens.
[Setting Values: RAuto, SW Set]
Memo :
This item can be specified even if the lens used
0
does not have iris function.
Shutter
For specifying the Shutter operation.
EEI:
0
Sets the shutter to Auto.
SW Set:
0
Follows the setting of the [SHUTTER] switch.
[Setting Values: REEI, SW Set]
Camera Function Menu
117
Colorimetry
9
Camera Process Menu
For configuring the standard for converting R, G, B
signals to Y, Cb, Cr signals when [Color Space] is
configured to “HLG” or “ITU2020”.
Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera
images.
ITU2020:
0
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode.
Records and outputs ITU2020 RGB signals
using the Y-Cb-Cr signal conversion coefficient.
ITU709:
Color Space
0
For configuring the color space that is used inside
Records and outputs ITU709 RGB signals using
the Y-Cb-Cr signal conversion coefficient.
the camera.
The gamma and color gamut change automatically
according to the selected color space.
When [System] is configured to a setting other than
“SD” and “SD(SDI In)”
[Setting Values: RITU2020, ITU709]
Memo :
This item is available when [Color Space] is set
0
0
0
to “HLG” or “ITU2020”.
J-Log1:
0
0
0
0
This is fixed at “ITU709” when [Color Space] is
set to “J-Log1” or “ITU709”.
Color space that supports 800% dynamic range
and log gamma
This is fixed at “ITU601” when [System] is set to
“SD”.
HLG:
Color space that supports the ITU2100 HLG
HDR
ITU2020:
Gamma
Color space that supports the ITU2020 wide
For adjusting the gamma curve that determines the
color gamut
gradation expression.
ITU709:
ITU709 color space
Cinema 2:
0
0
[Setting Values: J-Log1, HLG, ITU2020, RITU709]
Sets to a gamma curve with soft expression
giving priority to high luminance gradation.
Cinema 1:
When [System] is set to “SD” or “SD(SDI In)”
ITU601 (EBU):
0
0
Color space that supports the EBU color gamut
ITU601 (170M):
Sets to a gamma curve with similar gradation to
the screen characteristics of movies.
Standard:
Color space that supports the SMPTE170M
color gamut
0
0
Sets to a standard gamma curve.
Off:
ITU709:
0
ITU709 color space
Does not perform adjustment.
[Setting Values: ITU601 (EBU), ITU601 (170M),
[Setting Values: Cinema 2, Cinema 1, RStandard,
RITU709]
Off]
Memo :
Memo :
When [System] is set to “HD” and when “J-
Log1” or “HLG” is selected, some menu items
under [Camera Process] cannot be configured.
The AE function does not function when “J-
Log1” or “HLG” is selected. When the [AUTO
IRIS] switch on the lens is set to “AUTO”, the iris
is fixed at “F4”.
0
[Gamma] cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”. “HLG
Gamma” is used during “HLG” and “J-Log1
Gamma” is used during “J-Log1”.
0
0
Camera Process Menu
118
Level
Master Black
9
The amount of correction can be specified
separately when [Gamma] is set to “Standard”,
“Cinema 1” or “Cinema 2”.
For adjusting the pedestal level (master black) that
serves as the reference black.
Increasing the value increases the pedestal.
[Setting Values: +50 to -50 (R0)]
Memo :
When [Gamma] is set to “Standard”
[Setting Values: 0.35 to R 0.45 to 0.55 (in steps of
0.01)]
This item cannot be configured when [Color
0
Increase the number:
0
Space] is set to “J-Log1”.
Finer gradation at bright areas and coarser
gradation at dark areas.
The setting value of this item is stored separately
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.
0
Decrease the number:
0
Finer gradation at dark areas and coarser
gradation at bright areas.
Black Paint
When [Gamma] is set to “Cinema 1” or “Cinema 2”
For adjusting the R (red) and B (blue) components
[Setting Values: +10 to R 0 to -10]
of black.
Increase the number:
0
[Setting Values: +50 to +1, R0, -1 to -50]
Finer gradation at dark areas and coarser
gradation at bright areas.
Memo :
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Decrease the number:
0
0
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
Finer gradation at bright areas and coarser
gradation at dark areas.
Memo :
Flare
When [Gamma] is set to “Standard” with the
0
Performs flare correction.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
value set at [0.45], the gamma adjusted
conforms to ITU709 or ITU2020.
If [Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”, the maximum
peak signal decreases from 109% as the
number becomes smaller in the setting values
from 0 to -10. When the level is at -10, the video
input with a dynamic range of 600% will be kept
within a 100% output.
Master Flare
0
9
Performs correction to prevent the entire image
from turning white due to light that enters the lens.
The image appears blacker with a larger value, and
whiter with a smaller value.
[Setting Values: +20 to +1, (R0), -1 to -20]
The level cannot be configured when [Gamma]
is set to “Off” or [Color Space] is set to “HLG” or
“J-Log1”.
0
Memo :
This item cannot be configured when [Color
0
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
Detail
Flare Balance
9
For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement
For adjusting the balance between R (red) and B
level.
(blue).
Increasing the value increases the sharpness of
the contour.
[Setting Values: +10 to +1, (R0), -1 to -10] (R/B)
[Setting Values: +20 to -20, Off] (Default Value: -6
for “J-Log1” and “HLG” of Color Space; 0 for all
other settings)
V. Shading
For adjusting shading (color shift) in the vertical
direction which occurs due to the lens
characteristics.
Memo :
The setting values of this item and [Adjust...] are
stored separately when [Color Space] is set to
“HLG” or “J-Log1”.
0
On:
0
For adjusting shading.
Off:
0
Fixes shading adjustment. Manual adjustment
is not allowed.
Adjust...
9
For specifying the detailed settings of the contour
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
(detail).
Adjust
9
Performs vertical shading adjustment when [V.
Shading] is set to “On”.
[Setting Values: -128 to R 0 to +127]
Memo :
This item cannot be selected when [Detail] is set
0
to “Off”.
Camera Process Menu
119
Black Toe
Compress Level
9
Compression amount increases when a larger
Process the dark areas according to the balance of
bright and dark areas in the image to adjust the
overall balance of contrast.
value is specified.
[Setting Values: 5 to 1 (R 3)]
For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item
according to the condition of the captured video
signals.
Memo :
This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is
set to “Compress”. Otherwise, this item appears
as “---” and cannot be selected.
0
Stretch:
0
Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to
stretch the signals of these areas only, thereby
showing the contrast between bright and dark
areas more clearly.
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
0
Knee Level
Specify the amount of stretch with [Stretch
Level].
For specifying the start point (knee point) for
compressingthevideosignaltoshowthegradation
of the highlighted portion. Set the [OUTPUT] switch
to “AUTO KNEE OFF”.
Normal:
0
0
Normal condition.
Compress:
Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase
the contrast when the entire image appears
bright and contrast is weak. Specify the
compression amount with [Compress Level].
[Setting Values: 109.0%, 107.5%, 105.0%,
102.5%, 100.0%, 97.5%, R 95.0%, 92.5%, 90.0%,
87.5%, 85.0%, 82.5%, 80.0%, 77.5%, 75.0%,
72.5%, 70.0%]
[Setting Values: Stretch, RNormal, Compress]
Memo :
Memo :
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and when
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
0
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
When “Black Stretch” or “Black Compress” is
assigned to the [USER2] switch, priority is given
to the user button setting and configuration
using the menu is disabled.
0
Auto Knee Sensitivity
For configuring the response speed of the knee
operation when the [OUTPUT] switch is set to
“AUTO KNEE ON”. Set to “Slow” when shooting an
object under a condition where there is drastic
change in the light intensity.
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
Memo :
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and when
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.
Stretch Level
9
Stretch amount increases when a larger value is
specified.
[Setting Values: 5 to 1 (R 3)]
Memo :
0
This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is
set to “Stretch”. Otherwise, this item appears as
“---” and cannot be selected.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
0
Auto Knee Peak Filter
For configuring the response speed of the knee
operation with respect to a high-luminance point
light source and the like when the [OUTPUT] switch
is set to “AUTO KNEE ON”.
[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low]
Memo :
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and when
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.
0
Camera Process Menu
120
White Clip
White Balance...
For setting the point to apply white clip for video
Menu for adjusting white balance.
signals with a high luminance level.
[Setting Values: 109% to 90% (R109%)]
Memo :
*
Set this item to 100% if the screen becomes too
white with a setting value above 100% or when
the system in use limits Y signals within 100%.
The setting value of this item is stored separately
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”.
0
0
9
Color Matrix
For setting the color matrix.
Natural:
0
Sets to a brighter and more natural color matrix
than the standard. Effective for shooting under
a strong single color light source such as stage
lightings.
RGB Gamut Clip
For configuring whether to the clip the RGB signals
at the same time when clipping the luminance
signal using the settings in [White Clip].
Cinema Subdued:
0
0
Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to
the screen characteristics of movies.
Cinema Vivid:
On: Performs gamut clipping using the settings
in [White Clip] for video signals with a high RGB
signal level. Performs gamut clipping according
to the settings in [White Clip] for negative signal
levels.
0
Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the
screen characteristics of movies.
Standard:
0
0
Sets to a standard color matrix.
Off:
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
The area that is subject to gamut clipping when
“On” is configured is as follows.
Example:
Sets the color matrix function to Off.
0
[Setting Values: Natural, Cinema Subdued,
Cinema Vivid, RStandard, Off]
Memo :
0
[White Clip] 103 %
This item cannot be configured when [Color
・RGB signal: 103 % or above
0
Space] is set to “J-Log1”.
・Negative level: -3 % or below
This is fixed at “Standard” when [Color Space]
is set to “HLG”.
0
[White Clip]100 % or below
0
・RGB signal: Equivalent to or higher than
the preset value in [White Clip]
・Negative level: 0 % or below
When RGB gamut clipping for EBU-R103 is
supported, this feature can be configured to
“On” and the value of [White Clip] can be
adjusted to a desired level that is 104 % or lower.
The setting value of this item is stored separately
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”.
0
0
Chroma Clip
For configuring the point to apply chroma clipping
for video signals with a high color difference level.
[Setting Values: 113% to 90% (R113%)]
Memo :
When this is set to 100%, the Cb-Cr signal will
be clipped so that it falls within the 64-960 range
of the ITU 10-bit video standard.
0
When [Color Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”,
the settings will be saved separately.
0
Camera Process Menu
121
Adjust
Reverse Picture
9
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a color
For recording images correctly by setting this item
to “Rotate” when the lens image appears upside
down or laterally inverted.
according to the user’s preference.
The adjusted values of “Natural”, “Standard”,
“Cinema Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color
Matrix] can be stored individually.
Rotate:
0
Enables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
o
Linear Adjust:
image.
The saturation, hue and brightness of the
primary and complementary colors (6 colors in
total) can be set individually when “On” is
configured.
Off:
0
Disables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
image.
[Setting Values: Rotate, ROff]
o
Multi Adjust:
The saturation and hue of the 16 hue axes (R/R
+/Mg-/Mg/B-/B/B+/Cy-/Cy/Cy+/G-/G/G+/Yl/Yl
+/R-) can be set when “On” is configured.
When the USER1 button is pressed while the
multi adjustment screen is displayed, only the
colors of the hue under adjustment remain in the
following cases. The other colors become black
and white.
DNR
Decreases noise in the image.
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
Reset Process
Restores all items in the [Camera Process] menu
to their default settings.
0
LCD monitor and viewfinder video images
0
[HD/SD SDI OUT2] terminal output when [A/V
Set] B [SDI OUT2] is set to “VF”
0
[HDMI] terminal output when [A/V Set] B
[HDMI OUT] is set to “VF”
Memo :
This item cannot be configured when [Color
0
Space] is set to “J-Log1”.
The setting value of this item is stored separately
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.
0
Color Gain
For adjusting the video signal color level.
Increasing the value deepens the color.
[Setting Values: +15 to -50, Off (R0)]
Memo :
Images are displayed in black-and-white when
0
0
0
this is set to “Off”.
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1”.
The setting value of this item is stored separately
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.
Camera Process Menu
122
Detail/Adjust Item
V/H Balance
Level Depend
Configure this item when areas such as the darker
portions of the video image appear coarse when
the Detail function is applied.
For setting the H/V balance to enhance contour
(detail) in the horizontal (H) or vertical (V) direction.
+1 reduces the outline enhancement of dark areas
and suppresses the noise, while -1 enhances the
outline of dark areas.
H+1 to H+20:
0
0
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
horizontal direction.
[Setting Values: +1, R0, -1]
V+1 to V+20:
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
vertical direction.
Posi Gain
For configuring the amount of detail in the white
direction of the outline enhancement signals.
[Setting Values: +20 to +1, R0, -1 to -20]
[Setting Values: H+20 to H+1, RNormal, V+1 to V
+20]
H Frequency
Nega Gain
For specifying the correction frequency of the
For configuring the amount of detail in the black
direction of the outline enhancement signals.
[Setting Values: +20 to +1, R0, -1 to -20]
horizontal contour. Set this according to the object.
High:
0
Emphasizes the high frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with fine patterns.
Middle:
Knee Gain
0
0
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
Low:
For configuring the amount of detail at the highlight
areas of the video image. A larger value further
enhances the outline of the signals at the highlight
areas. While a smaller value reduces the outline of
the highlight areas, moire (aliasing) due to white
clipping at the highlight areas is also less likely to
occur.
Emphasizes the low frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with large patterns.
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
V Frequency
[Setting Values: 32 to R16 to 0]
Memo :
For specifying the correction frequency of the
vertical contour. Set this according to the object.
High:
0
0
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
0
Emphasizes the high frequency range.
Middle:
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
Low:
Skin Detail
Detects the skin tone and smooths the outline.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Emphasizes the low frequency range.
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
Level
9
Coring
For configuring the outline correction level when
For configuring the degree of enhancement with
respect to low-level signals (noise, etc.) with subtle
“outline” enhancement.
[Skin Detail] is set to “On”.
The smaller the number, the smoother the video.
[Setting Values: -1 to R -5 to -10]
Applies outline enhancement to even low-level
signals when the setting is closer to -20, and outline
enhancement of low-level signals becomes less
noticeable with noise suppressed when the setting
is closer to +20.
[Setting Values: +20 to +1, R0, -1 to -20]
Camera Process Menu
123
White Balance Item
Preset Temp.
For setting the color temperature when the
[WHT.BAL] switch is set to “PRST”.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
Skin Area
For configuring whether to display only the color
correction area in color and areas that are not
corrected in black-and-white.
On:
0
When “Detect” of [Skin Color Adjust] is
functioning, only the detected color is displayed
in color and the other areas are displayed in
black-and-white in the following cases.
Alternative Temp.
0
LCD monitor and viewfinder video images
For setting the alternative color temperature in the
0
[HD/SD SDI OUT2] terminal output when
Preset mode.
[A/V Set] B [SDI OUT2] is set to “VF”
When the [WHT.BAL] switch is set to “PRST”,
pressing the user button assigned with the “AWB”
function each time switches the color temperature
setting in the Preset mode. ([Preset
Temp.]1[Alternative Temp.])
0
[HDMI] terminal output when [A/V Set] B
[HDMI OUT] is set to “VF”
Off:
0
Displays all the colors.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
Skin Color Adjust
Preset Paint Memory
For configuring details of the skin color.
Detect
0
0
0
For configuring whether to configure the color
temperature individually or collectively in the
Preset mode. Adjustment is performed in [Preset
Paint].
For detecting the skin tone.
[USER1]Stop appears when detection is in
progress and [USER1]Execute appears while
detection is stopped.
Individual:
0
[Setting Values: Execute, Stop]
Saturation
Each of the 9 types of color temperatures
(2300K, 3000K, 3200K, 4200K, 4800K, 5200K,
5600K, 6500K, 7500K) are configured
individually.
Selecting a larger value widens the saturation
range of the color to be corrected, while a
smaller value reduces the color saturation
range.
Common:
0
The entire color temperature range is configured
collectively.
[Setting Values: Individual, RCommon]
[Setting Values: +10 to R0 to -10]
Width
Although selecting a larger value widens the hue
range of the color to be corrected and eases
identification, it also increases the likelihood of
erroneous correction. Selecting a smaller value
narrows down the hue range, but helps to
reduce erroneous correction at the same time.
[Setting Values: +10 to R0 to -10]
Preset Paint
For adjusting the R (red) and (B) blue components
in the Preset mode.
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
0
0
[Setting Values: +32 to -32 (R 0)]
Camera Process Menu
124
AWB Paint
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component in the
AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
0
0
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]
Memo :
This item is selectable when the [WHT.BAL]
switch is set to “A” or “B”. When “PRST” is set,
this item appears as “---” and cannot be
selected.
0
Different values can be specified for “A” and “B”.
When [Clear Paint After AWB] is set to “On”,
pressing the user button that is assigned with the
“AWB” function to readjust the white balance
switches the R and B values automatically to
“0”.
0
0
Clear Paint After AWB
For specifying whether to clear the [AWB Paint] (R
value and B value) settings after executing AWB
(Auto White Balance).
On:
0
Sets the [AWB Paint] (R value and B value)
settings to “0” after executing AWB (Auto White
Balance).
Off:
0
Does not change the [AWB Paint] (R value and
B value) settings after executing AWB (Auto
White Balance).
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
FAW Paint
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component
during FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode.
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
0
0
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]
Camera Process Menu
125
Time Zone
9
TC/UB Menu
Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode,
or during recording.
For configuring the time zone.
Local Time:
0
Time code with time zone corrected for time
information obtained from NTP
UTC:
0
Time code without time zone correction
TC Mode
[Setting Values: Local Time, RUTC]
For configuring the TC mode settings.
Memo :
NTP:
0
This item can be configured when [TC Mode] is
0
Activates NTP synchronization of the time code
and superimposing of TC information
(metadata) on the streaming data. This option is
selectable when the [TC GEN] selection switch
is set to F-RUN. When “NTP” is selected, the unit
will operate in the F-RUN mode regardless of the
position of the [TC GEN] selection switch.
GPS u v:
set to “NTP”.
Streaming Format
For configuring the time code system.
[Setting Values: LTC, RVITC]
9
Memo :
0
This item can be configured when [TC Mode] is
0
Uses the GPS clock (UTC). The unit will operate
in the F-RUN mode if GPS clock data cannot be
acquired.
set to “NTP”.
This is fixed at “VITC” when [Live Streaming] B
[Optional Adapter] is set to “Enable”.
0
SW Set:
0
0
Follows the settings of the [TC GEN] switch.
Clock:
TC Preset
This is set to “Clock” when the [TC GEN] switch
is set to “F-RUN”.
For setting the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
[Setting Values: NTP, GPS, RSW Set, Clock]u
v
Display
:
:
Drop setting 02:02:25.20
Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20
[Setting Values: NTP, RSW Set, Clock]w x
Memo :
When the [TC GEN] selection switch is set to “R-
RUN” or “REGEN”, or during “Interval Rec”,
“Frame Rec” and “High-Speed”, the setting is
fixed at “SW Set”.
0
0
[TC/UB] cannot be changed during live
streaming when “NTP” is selected.
0
TC/UB Menu
126
UB Mode
For setting the recording mode of the user’s bit.
Date:
0
0
0
Records the date.
Time:
Records the time.
Preset:
Records according to the preset setting.
[Setting Values: Date, Time, RPreset]
Memo :
If [UB Mode] is set to “Time”, the user’s bit
operates in the 24-hour format even if the LCD
display is in the 12-hour format.
0
Preset
9
For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)
Display AB CD EF 01
Memo :
:
When [UB Mode] is set to “Date” or “Time”, this
item appears as “---” and preset is disabled.
When the [TC GEN] switch is set to “REGEN”,
“<Regen>” is displayed and preset is disabled.
0
0
Drop Frame
For setting the framing mode of the time code
generator.
Non Drop:
0
0
Internal time code generator works in the non-
drop-frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the number of frames.
Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the drop-
frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the recording time.
[Setting Values: Non Drop, RDrop]
Memo :
This item can be configured only when [System]
B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B [WFrame
Rate] is set to “60p”, “30p”, or “60i”. When
[Frame Rate] is “24p”, “Non Drop” becomes
fixed and cannot be selected.
0
When [Frame Rate] is “50p”, “25p”, or “50i”, this
item appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
TC/UB Menu
127
LCD Bright
LCD/VF Menu
Item for specifying settings related to the LCD
monitor or viewfinder screen.
For configuring the brightness of the LCD monitor.
Increasing the value increases the brightness.
[Setting Values: +10 to +1, R0, -1 to -10]
This menu screen can be used to specify settings
related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern
display, screen size, marker, and safety zone. In
addition, it is also used for selecting whether to
display characters on the LCD monitor or
viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the
picture quality of the LCD monitor.
LCD Peaking
For adjusting the outline of the image displayed on
the LCD monitor.
[Setting Values: +10 to +1, R0, -1 to -10]
Convert to ITU709
When [Color Space] is set to “ITU2020”, “J-Log1”
or “HLG”, the video images on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder are converted to the ITU709 color space
for display.
Shooting Assist...
Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function.
0
When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT2]
Marker Settings...
is set to “VF”, the [HD/SD SDI OUT2] terminal
output is also converted.
For setting items such as the safety zone and
0
When [A/V Set] B[Video Set] B [HDMI OUT]
center mark.
is set to “VF”, the [HDMI] terminal output is
also converted.
Cam + Return:
0
Display Type...
The camera and return videos are converted
from the color space configured in [Color
Space] to the ITU709 color space.
Cam:
For specifying display-related settings.
0
0
Display On/Off...
Only the camera video is converted to the
ITU709 color space.
For configuring the on/off setting of the screen
display.
Off:
Not converted.
[Setting Values: Cam + Return, Cam, ROff]
VF Color
Memo :
For selecting whether to display the image on the
viewfinder screen in color or black-and-white.
Select “On” to display in color, and “Off” to display
in black-and-white.
This item can be configured only when [Color
0
Space] is set to “ITU2020”, “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
LCD Contrast
For setting the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the LCD monitor.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: +10 to +1, R0, -1 to -10]
LCD/VF Menu
128
Shooting Assist Item
Focus Assist
White Level
9
For configuring the white level during adjustment of
the dynamic range that is visible in the LCD monitor
or viewfinder when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.
When [Color Space] is set to “HLG” and [Convert
to ITU709] is set to a value other than “Off”, this item
can be used to configure the output luminance level
(%) of HLG videos that corresponds to 100% on
the ITU709 gamma curve during the conversion.
[Setting Values: 80.0%, 77.5%, 75.0%, R 72.5%,
70.0%, 67.5%,65.0%, 62.5%, 60.0%, 57.5%,
55.0%, 52.5%, 50.0%]
For setting whether to add color to the contour of
the focused image upon switching the image to
black-and-white.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Type
9
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the [Focus
Assist] function.
Memo :
ACCU-Focus:
0
0
This item can be configured only when [Color
0
Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU-Focus
(forced focus) functions. The depth of field of the
object becomes shallower to enable easier
focusing. The ACCU-Focus function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
Normal:
Space] is set to “HLG”.
The value on the spot meter changes in tandem
with this setting.
0
Example: When [White Level] is set to “75.0%”,
the point at which the HLG output is 75% is
displayed as 100% on the spot meter.
to the ITU709 color space is performed with
gamma and knee adjusted such that the
maximum HDR dynamic range is visible during
the conversion.
Enables only the Focus Assist function. The
focused area is displayed in color to enable
easier focusing. Display color can be specified
with [Color].
0
[Setting Values: ACCU-Focus, RNormal]
Color
9
For setting the display color of the focused area
when Focus Assist is activated.
[Setting Values: RBlue, Green, Red]
LCD RGB Gain
For adjusting the R (red), G (green) and B (blue)
Zebra
gain level of the LCD monitor.
[Setting Values: +127 to R 0 to -128]
For selecting whether the number of zebra patterns
to display at the bright areas of the subject.
Reset
9
Restores [LCD RGB Gain] to the default settings.
2 Patterns:
0
Displays two types of zebra patterns (Zebra1
and Zebra2).
VF RGB Gain
1 Pattern:
0
For adjusting the R (red), G (green) and B (blue)
Displays one type of zebra pattern (Zebra1).
[Setting Values: 2 Patterns, R1 Pattern]
gain level of the viewfinder.
[Setting Values: +127 to R 0 to -128]
Detect
9
Reset
9
For configuring the timing to detect the zebra
Restores [VF RGB Gain] to the default settings.
pattern display.
Converted ITU709:
0
0
Performs detection after converting to the
ITU709 color space.
HLG/J-Log1:
Performs detection before converting to the
ITU709 color space.
[Setting Values: Converted ITU709, RHLG/J-
Log1]
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Color Space]
is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and [Convert to
ITU709] is set to “Cam” or “Cam + Return”.
0
LCD/VF Menu
129
Top 1
Type
9
9
For setting the maximum luminance level to display
For configuring the video signal monitor to be
Zebra1.
displayed.
[Setting Values: Over, 100%, 98%, 95% to 5% (in
5% increments)] (R80%)
Histogram:
0
Displays the distribution of points in the image
based on the degree of brightness and the
corresponding number of points.
Vector Scope:
Bottom 1
9
For setting the minimum luminance level to display
0
0
Displays the saturation and hue of the video as
a circle.
Zebra1.
[Setting Values: 100%, 98%, 95% to 0% (in 5%
increments)] (R70%)
Waveform:
Displays the luminance signal of the video as a
waveform.
Top 2
9
[Setting Values: Histogram, Vector Scope,
For setting the maximum luminance level to display
Zebra2.
RWaveform]
[Setting Values: Over, 100%, 98%, 95% to 5% (in
5% increments)] (ROver)
Histogram Top
9
For selecting the maximum brightness limit for
changing the histogram display color.
[Setting Values: 5% to 110% (in 5% increments)]
(R 80%)
Memo :
This item cannot be selected when [Zebra] is set
0
to “1 Pattern”.
When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”
0
Bottom 2
9
[Setting Values: -5F-stop, -4F-stop, -3F-stop(2%),
-2F-stop, -1F-stop, 0F-stop(18%), ⅓F-stop, ⅔F-
stop, 1F-stop, 1⅓F-stop, 1⅔F-stop, 2F-stop, 2 ⅓
F-stop(90%), 2 ⅔ F-stop, R3F-stop, 3 ⅓ F-stop, 3
⅔ F-stop, 4F-stop, 4 ⅓ F-stop, 4 ⅔ F-stop, 5F-
stop, 5 ⅓ F-stop, 5½F-stop]
For setting the minimum luminance level to display
Zebra2.
[Setting Values: 100%, 98%, 95% to 0% (in 5%
increments)] (R80%)
Memo :
This item cannot be selected when [Zebra] is set
Memo :
0
to “1 Pattern”.
When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”, a green
line appears which corresponds to the “0F-
stop(18%)” portion of the subject with 18%
reflectance.
0
Peaking Frequency
For configuring the frequency band for applying
outline enhancement using [LCD Peaking] and the
[PEAKING] adjustment knob on the viewfinder.
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
Histogram Bottom
9
For selecting the minimum brightness limit for
changing the histogram display color.
[Setting Values: 0% to 105% (in 5% increments)]
(R 20%)
Video Signal Monitor
For configuring whether to display or hide the video
When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”
0
signal monitor.
[Setting Values: -6F-stop, -5F-stop, -4F-stop,
R-3F-stop(2%), -2F-stop, -1F-stop, 0F-stop(18%),
⅓ F-stop, ⅔ F-stop, 1F-stop, 1 ⅓ F-stop, 1 ⅔ F-
stop, 2F-stop, 2 ⅓ F-stop(90%), 2 ⅔ F-stop, 3F-
stop, 3 ⅓ F-stop, 3 ⅔ F-stop, 4F-stop, 4 ⅓ F-stop,
4 ⅔ F-stop, 5F-stop, 5 ⅓ F-stop]
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
This may not be selectable depending on the
0
operating mode and status.
Memo :
When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”, a green
line appears which corresponds to the “0F-
stop(18%)” portion of the subject with 18%
reflectance.
0
LCD/VF Menu
130
Marker Settings Item
Aspect Marker
9
For specifying how boundary markers are to be
used to indicate the parts of an image that are
beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in
[Aspect Ratio].
For setting the marker and safety zone, which are
useful in helping you determine the angle of view
for the image according to the shooting purpose.
Line+Halftone:
0
Displays the boundary using lines, and areas
outside the boundary in halftone.
Halftone:
Memo :
During Clip Review or when in the Media mode,
the markers do not appear regardless of the
setting.
0
0
0
0
Displays areas outside the boundary in halftone.
Line:
Displays the boundary using lines.
Off:
Marker
Hides the boundary markers.
For setting whether to display marker, safety zone,
[Setting Values: Line+Halftone, Halftone, Line,
and center marks on the screen.
ROff]
Memo :
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Grid Marker
9
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to “16:9” or
“16:9(+4:3)”, this item is fixed at “Off” and cannot
be selected.
0
For setting whether to display a 3x3 grid on the
screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Safety Zone
9
Memo :
For setting the percentage of area that is to be
deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the
boundary of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect
Ratio].
When [Grid Marker] is set to “On”, [Aspect
Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do
not function.
0
[Setting Values: 95%, 93%, 90%, 88%, 80%, ROff]
Aspect Ratio
9
For selecting the final image aspect ratio to be used
Center Mark
9
from the overall angle of view.
For specifying whether to display a mark to indicate
the screen center within the aspect ratio selected
in [Aspect Ratio].
[Setting Values: 16:9(+4:3), 2.35:1 Top, 2.35:1
Center, 1.85:1 Top, 1.85:1 Center, R16:9, 1.75:1,
1.66:1, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3]
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item
is fixed at “4:3” and selection is disabled.
0
LCD/VF Menu
131
Display Type Item
Focus
This menu is used to set the displays on the LCD
For setting the display method of the approximate
distance to the subject in focus during manual
focus.
monitor and viewfinder screen.
Battery
Feet:
0
Displays the distance in feet.
Meter:
For setting the display of the remaining battery
0
power on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
Displays the distance in meters.
Time:
0
0
0
[Setting Values: Feet, RMeter]
Displays the remaining battery power in
minutes. (min)
Memo :
Capacity%:
This item will not be displayed if the lens
attached does not support focus position
information.
0
Displays the remaining battery power in
percentage. (%)
Voltage:
Displays the current battery voltage in units of
0.1 V. (V)
Shutter
For setting the shutter display to be displayed on
[Setting Values: RTime, Capacity%, Voltage]
the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
Memo :
DEG:
0
0
The battery mark that appears before the “Time”,
“Capacity%” or “Voltage” value changes according to
the remaining battery power.
0
Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the
same way as film cameras.
SEC:
:
Battery which the capacity could not be
acquired
I
Displays the shutter speed in seconds.
[Setting Values: DEG, RSEC]
:
:
:
:
:
:
Below 13%
4
D
C
B
F
J
Memo :
13% or higher
30% or higher
0
“DEG” is selectable only when [WFrame Rate]
60% or higher
is set to “24p” or “25p”.
Battery communication error
Calibration required
When [WFrame Rate] is set to other values, the
shutter display setting is fixed at “SEC” and
cannot be selected.
0
While “Time” or “Capacity%” is displayed, “
E
”
appears when the level falls below the setting in
[System]
B
[Battery]
B
[Near End (%)]. Replace the
When a remote control unit is connected to the
[REMOTE] terminal, “SEC” is displayed and
selection is disabled.
0
battery as soon as possible.
The remaining battery power and remaining time are
intended as reference values for the shooting
duration.
0
0
When the battery that is connected does not support
communication, the voltage is displayed regardless
of the setting.
Zoom
For setting the display method of the zoom
position.
Number:
0
0
Displays the zoom position in numbers (Z00 to
99).
Bar:
Displays the zoom position in a bar.
[Setting Values: Number, RBar]
Memo :
This item will not be displayed if the lens
attached does not support zoom position
information.
0
LCD/VF Menu
132
Display On/Off Item
Gain
For setting the gain display to be displayed on the
For setting whether to turn on or off the display of
LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
an item on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
ISO:
0
0
Displays the gain as ISO sensitivity.
dB:
Battery, Clip Info, OK Mark, High-Speed, SDI
IN, Check Mark, Media Status, Rec Trigger,
TC/UB, Media Remain, Record Format, Video
Format, Guide, GPS u v, Return over
IP , Live Streaming, Network, Date, Time,
Operation Lock, Zoom, Focus, Zebra, Focus
Assist, Color Space, Black Toe, Skin Detail,
ND Filter, AE Level, Iris, Shutter, Gain, White
Balance, Audio Meter, Position Bar, Camera
Angle[Tagging]u w, ODK[Tagging]u
w
Displays the gain in dB (decibel).
[Setting Values: ISO, RdB]
Memo :
This item cannot be configured when [Color
0
Space] is set to “HLG”.
Audio Meter
For specifying whether to display the audio level
meter on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
For configuring whether to display or hide an item.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Auto:
0
4ch display when [System] B [Record Set] B
[Record Format] B [WAudio] is set to “4CH”, and
2ch display ([CH1]/[CH2]) in all other cases.
Whether 4 channels or 2 channels ([CH1]/
[CH2]) are displayed during playback is
dependent on the recorded clip.
CH1/2:
Memo :
This may not be selectable depending on the
0
operating mode and status.
0
Displays the audio level meter for [CH1] and
[CH2].
[Setting Values: RAuto, CH1/2]
LCD/VF Menu
133
SDI OUT2
A/V Set Menu
Menu screen for video output and audio.
For configuring video output from the [HD/SD SDI
OUT2] terminal.
VF:
0
0
Outputs the same display as that of the
viewfinder.
Video Set...
For specifying video output-related settings.
Camera:
Outputs from the terminal. The screen and menu
displays can be configured in [SDI OUT2] B
[Character].
Audio Set...
Return Video:
0
0
For specifying audio-related settings.
Outputs the return video in 1080p :
Off:
Does not output from the terminal.
Video Set Item
SDI OUT1
[Setting Values: VF, Camera, Return Video, ROff]
Memo :
When a resolution with no SDI output is
selected, “Camera” cannot be selected.
When [System] is set to “HD(SDI In)” or “SD(SDI
In)”, “Return Video” cannot be selected.
When “Return Video” is selected
0
0
0
For configuring video output from the [HD/SD SDI
OUT1] terminal.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
When a resolution with no SDI output is
selected, the setting is fixed at “Off”.
This item needs to be configured to “On” even
during SDI OUT1 output from the expansion unit
terminal (68-pin) at the back.
0
0
PinP display on the LCD is disabled.
0
Audio is not output.
0
Character (SDI OUT2)
9
For configuring whether to show the display and
menu on the [HD/SD SDI OUT2] terminal.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Resolution (SDI OUT1)
9
For selecting the resolution of video output from the
[HD/SD SDI OUT1] terminal according to the
monitor to be connected.
Memo :
When “VF” is selected for [SDI OUT2], the
0
0
0
0
setting is fixed at “On”.
[Setting Values: 1080psF, 1080p, R1080i, 720p,
When “Return Video” is selected for [SDI
OUT2], the setting is fixed at “Off”.
When [Overlay Settings] B [Overlay Function] is
set to “Enable”
576i, 480i]
Memo :
The selectable options vary according to the
setting in [System]/[WResolution] and [WFrame
Rate] of [System] B[Record Set] B [Record
Format].
0
The setting is fixed at “Off” when [Overlay
Settings] B [Output] B [SDI OUT2] is configured
to “Off”
Cross conversion output is not possible.
When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT1] B
[Resolution] is set to “1080p”, configuring
[System] B [GPS] to “On” changes the setting to
“1080i”. u v
0
0
The setting is fixed at “Off” when [Overlay
Settings] B [Output] B [SDI OUT2] is configured
to “On” and [Resolution] configured to “480i”
0
A/V Set Menu
134
Resolution (SDI OUT2)
SDI Rec Trigger
9
For selecting the resolution of video output from the
[HD/SD SDI OUT2] terminal according to the
monitor to be connected.
For configuring whether to superimpose trigger
signalsonthe[HD/SDSDIOUT]terminalintandem
with the [REC] button.
[Setting Values: 1080psF/i, 1080p, R1080i, 720p,
If “Type-A” or “Type-B” is specified, it is possible to
recordonadeviceequippedwithSDIrecordtrigger
in tandem with the operation of the [REC] button.
When a compatible device is connected,
recording/stop control signals are output in tandem
with the operation of the [REC] button.
576i, 480i]
Memo :
The selectable options vary according to the
setting in [System]/[WResolution] and [WFrame
Rate] of [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format].
0
The SDI record trigger output status to the
connected device is indicated by REC B/STBY B
on the display screen.
Cross conversion output is not possible.
When “Return Video” is selected for [SDI
OUT2], signal is output from the [HD/SD SDI
OUT 2] terminal at 1080p.
0
0
[Setting Values: Type-A, Type-B, ROff]
Memo :
If “Type-A” does not work, it may operate in the
“Type-B” setting, but the user’s bit to the
connected device will not be correctly output.
Even if REC B/STBY B is displayed on the
display screen, the compatible device may not
necessarily be recording.
0
0
0
3G-SDI Mapping
For configuring the mode of mapping for signals
output from the [HD/SD SDI OUT] terminal.
[Setting Values: Level B, RLevel A]
This item can be configured when [SDI OUT1]
is set to “On” or [SDI OUT2] is set to a setting
other than “Off”, and [Rec Mode] is set to
“Normal”, “Pre Rec” or “Clip Continuous”.
Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does
not support record trigger.
Memo :
This item can be configured only when [SDI
OUT1] B [Resolution] or [SDI OUT2] B
[Resolution] is set to “1080p”.
0
0
When [SDI OUT1] or [SDI OUT2] is configured
to “Off”, this item cannot be configured.
0
A/V Set Menu
135
HDMI OUT
Color
9
For setting the color format of HDMI signals.
[Setting Values: RGB, RAuto]
For configuring video output from the [HDMI]
terminal.
VF:
0
0
Memo :
Outputs the same display as that of the
viewfinder.
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
0
is set to a setting other than “Off”.
Camera:
Outputs from the terminal. The screen and menu
displays can be configured in [HDMI OUT] B
[Character].
Colorimetry
9
For configuring the colorimetry of the HDMI signal
when [Camera Process] B [Color Space] B
[Colorimetry] is set to “ITU2020”.
Return Video:
0
0
Outputs the return video in 1080p :
Off:
ITU2020:
0
0
0
Outputs using the colorimetry of ITU2020
Does not output from the terminal.
regardless of the device that is connected via
[Setting Values: VF, Camera, Return Video, ROff]
HDMI.
Memo :
ITU709:
When a resolution with no HDMI output is
selected, “Camera” cannot be selected.
When [System] is set to “HD(SDI In)” or “SD(SDI
In)”, “Return Video” cannot be selected.
When “Return Video” is selected
0
0
0
Outputs using the colorimetry of ITU709
regardless of the device that is connected via
HDMI.
Auto:
Switches the colorimetry automatically
according to the device that is connected via
HDMI.
0
PinP display on the LCD is disabled.
0
Audio is not output.
[Setting Values: ITU2020, ITU709, RAuto]
Character (HDMI OUT)
9
Memo :
For configuring whether to show the display and
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
0
0
0
menu on the [HDMI] terminal.
is set to a setting other than “Off”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
This item can be configured when [HDMI Color]
is set to “Auto”.
Memo :
This item cannot be configured when [Camera
Process] B [Color Space] B [Colorimetry] is set
to a setting other than “ITU2020”.
When “VF” is selected for [HDMI OUT], the
0
setting is fixed at “On”.
Resolution (HDMI OUT)
9
Enhance
9
For selecting the resolution of video output from the
[HDMI] terminal according to the monitor to be
connected.
For setting the color range of HDMI signals. When
connecting to a PC monitor, set this to “On”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
[Setting Values: 1080psF/i, 1080p, R1080i, 720p,
576p, 576i, 480p, 480i]
Memo :
Memo :
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
0
is set to a setting other than “Off”.
The selectable options vary according to the
setting in [System]/[WResolution] and [WFrame
Rate] of [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format].
0
Cross conversion output is not possible.
When “Return Video” is selected for [HDMI
OUT], signal is output from the [HDMI] terminal
at 1080p.
0
0
A/V Set Menu
136
Rec Trigger
SD Aspect
9
For configuring whether to superimpose trigger
signals on the [HDMI] out terminal in tandem with
the [REC] button.
For setting the style of displaying images with a
16:9 aspect ratio on a 4:3 aspect ratio screen.
Side Cut:
0
0
0
If “On” is specified, it is possible to record on a
device equipped with HDMI record trigger in
tandem with the operation of the [REC] button.
When a compatible device is connected,
recording/stop control signals are output in tandem
with the operation of the [REC] button.
The HDMI record trigger output status to the
connected device is indicated by REC B/STBY B
on the display screen.
Displays image with the left and right sides cut
off.
Letter:
Displays as a wide image with the top and
bottom blackened.
Squeeze:
Displays image that is squeezed horizontally.
[Setting Values: Side Cut, Letter, RSqueeze]
Memo :
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
When [Record Format] B [System] is set to
“SD”, and [Record Format] B [SD Aspect] is set
to “4:3”, “---” is displayed and selection is
disabled.
0
Even if REC B/STBY B is displayed on the
display screen, the compatible device may not
necessarily be recording.
0
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
is set to a value other than “Off”, and [Rec
Mode] is set to “Normal”, “Pre Rec” or “Clip
Continuous”.
0
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[System] is set to “SD”, “Squeeze” and “Letter”
can be selected.
0
Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does
not support record trigger.
0
SD Set Up
For selecting whether to add a setup signal to the
video signal output from the [VIDEO OUT] terminal.
Setup signals are added when “7.5%” is selected.
[Setting Values: 7.5%, R0.0%]
TC
9
For setting whether to superimpose time code to
the [HDMI] terminal.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
Depending on the menu settings of the camera
recorder and the condition of the cable
connected to it, the setup signal setting may be
fixed at “0.0%”. “0.0%” is displayed in gray in this
case.
0
Memo :
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
0
is set to a setting other than “Off”.
Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does
not support HDMI TC.
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format]B[Frame Rate] is set to “50p” or “50i”,
“---” is displayed and selection is disabled.
0
VIDEO OUT
For configuring video output from the [VIDEO
OUT] terminal.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Character (VIDEO OUT)
9
For configuring whether to show the display and
menu on the [VIDEO OUT] terminal.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
A/V Set Menu
137
Genlock Input
Return Input
For selecting the input destination of video
For selecting the input destination of the return
synchronizing signals.
video.
SDI IN:
Network:
0
0
0
0
Inputs video synchronizing signals from the [HD/
SD SDI IN] terminal.
For inputting the return video from the
preconfigured network.
Adapter:
SDI:
Inputs video synchronizing signals from the
adapter connected to the accessory connection
terminal (68 pins) on the rear of the camera
recorder.
Inputs return video from the [HD/SD SDI IN]
terminal.
[Setting Values: Network, RSDI]
GENLOCK:
0
Return Aspect
Inputs video synchronizing signals from the
[GENLOCK] terminal.
For selecting the aspect ratio of the return video.
16:9:
0
[Setting Values: SDI IN, Adapter, RGENLOCK]
Select this option if the return video is a squeeze
Memo :
signal.
4:3:
When “HD(SDI In)” or “SD(SDI In)” is selected in
[System], “SDI IN” is displayed and selection is
disabled.
0
0
Select this option if the return video is a 4:3
aspect signal (including Letter Box).
[Setting Values: R16:9, 4:3]
Genlock Adjust...
Adjusts the H Phase of the camera recorder’s video
signals with respect to the input synchronizing
signals.
Audio Set Item
Front Mic Select
SD-SDI H Phase
9
For selecting the microphone to be connected to
Adjusts the H Phase of the camera recorder’s SD-
SDI signal with respect to the external
synchronizing signal input to the terminal set in the
[Genlock Input] item.
[Setting Values: -373 to +373] (R 0)
Memo :
the [MIC IN] terminal.
Stereo M/S:
0
Selects the stereo M/S (Mid/Side) direct output
microphone.
Stereo L/R:
0
0
Selects the stereo L/R type microphone.
Mono:
When there is no SD video output from the [SDI
OUT] terminal, “---” is displayed and selection is
disabled.
0
Selects the monophonic microphone.
[Setting Values: Stereo M/S, RStereo L/R, Mono]
Memo :
0
HD-SDI H Phase
9
When “Stereo M/S” is configured, use only
stereo M/S (Mid/Side) direct output
microphone.
Adjusts the H Phase of the camera recorder’s HD-
SDI signal with respect to the external
synchronizing signal input to the terminal set in the
[Genlock Input] item.
[Setting Values: -1024 to +1023] (R 0)
Memo :
When there is no HD video output from the [SDI
OUT] terminal, “---” is displayed and selection is
disabled.
0
A/V Set Menu
138
Front Mic Power
CH1 Audio Level/CH2 Audio Level/CH3
Audio Level/CH4 Audio Level
Configure this setting when it is necessary to
supply +48 V power to the microphone that is
connected to the [MIC IN] terminal.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Front, Rear/Wireless
9
For configuring the method for adjusting volume
level when the [MANUAL/AUTO] selection switch
of [AUDIO INPUT CH1 (/2/3/4)] is set to
“MANUAL”.
Memo :
When using a microphone that does not require
0
a +48V power supply, make sure that it is set to
the “Off” position before connecting the
microphone.
Front + CH1(/2/3/4):
0
Adjust using the [MIC LEVEL] knob on the front
and the [AUDIO INPUT CH1(/2/3/4)] recording
level adjustment knob.
CH1(/2/3/4) Knob:
0
0
Front Mic 1 Ref.
Adjust using the [AUDIO INPUT CH1(/2/3/4)]
recording level adjustment knob.
Front Knob:
For setting the reference input level when the
[AUDIO INPUT CH1] or [AUDIO INPUT CH3]
selection switch is set to “FRONT”.
Adjust using the [MIC LEVEL] knob on the front.
[Setting Values: -30dB, -40dB, R -50dB, -60dB]
[Setting Values: Front + CH1(/2/3/4), CH1(/2/3/4)
Knob, Front Knob]
Front Mic 2 Ref.
(Default setting: “Front Knob” for Front, “CH1(/
2/3/4) Knob” for Rear/Wireless)
For setting the reference input level when the
[AUDIO INPUT CH2] or [AUDIO INPUT CH4]
selection switch is set to “FRONT”.
CH1/2 Audio Ref. Lv.
[Setting Values: -30dB, -40dB, R -50dB, -60dB]
For setting the reference recording level of [CH1]
and [CH2].
Rear Mic 1 Ref.
(Applies to both [CH1] and [CH2].)
[Setting Values: -12dB, -18dB, R-20dB]
For configuring the reference input level when the
[AUDIO INPUT CH1] or [AUDIO INPUT CH3]
selection switch is set to “REAR”, and the [AUDIO
INPUT1] selection switch to “MIC” or “MIC+48V”.
[Setting Values: -30dB, -40dB, -50dB, R -60dB]
CH3/4 Audio Ref. Lv.
For setting the reference recording level of [CH3]
and [CH4].
(Applies to both [CH3] and [CH4].)
Rear Mic 2 Ref.
Ch1/2 -6 dB:
0
0
0
Sets to a value that is 6dB lower than that of
[CH1] and [CH2].
For configuring the reference input level when the
[AUDIO INPUT CH2] or [AUDIO INPUT CH4]
selection switch is set to “REAR”, and the [AUDIO
INPUT2] selection switch to “MIC” or “MIC+48V”.
[Setting Values: -30dB, -40dB, -50dB, R -60dB]
Ch1/2 -12 dB:
Sets to a value that is 12dB lower than that of
[CH1] and [CH2].
Ch1/2 Linked:
Sets to the same value as [CH1] and [CH2].
Rear Line Ref.
[Setting Values: Ch1/2 -6 dB, Ch1/2 -12 dB,
For configuring the reference input level when one
of the [AUDIO INPUT CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4]
selection switches is set to “REAR”, and the
corresponding [AUDIO INPUT1/2] selection switch
is set to “LINE”.
RCh1/2 Linked]
[Setting Values: R+4dB, 0dB, -3dB]
A/V Set Menu
139
CH1/2 DRC..., CH3/4 DRC...
Mic Wind Cut...
CH1(/2/3/4)
For configuring the individual parameters of DRC
9
(Dynamic Range Compression).
For configuring whether to cut the low-frequency
range of the audio signal when “FRONT” or “REAR”
is selected for [AUDIO INPUT] of each channel and
“MIC” or “MIC+48V” is selected for [AUDIO INPUT
1/2] at the back of the camera.
Threshold Level
9
For configuring the threshold of DRC for CH1/2 and
Set this item to reduce wind noise from the
microphone.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
CH3/4.
[Setting Values: R -6dBFS, -9dBFS, -12dBFS,
-15dBFS, -17dBFS, Off]
Memo :
Attack Time
9
0
When [Mic Wind Cut] is set to “On”, a
icon
For configuring the time before DRC for CH1/2 and
is displayed on the status screen (audio input)
CH3/4 operates.
while the function is operating.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
Decay Time
9
Test Tone
For configuring the time before the DRC operation
For specifying whether to output the audio test
signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
for CH1/2 and CH3/4 is canceled.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
Mode
9
AUDIO OUT Ch.
For configuring whether DRC for each channel
operates independently or in tandem with each
other.
For setting the channel to output to the [AUDIO
OUT] terminal.
([CH1] and [CH2], [CH3] and [CH4])
Select “Linked” to link or “Separate” to separate.
[Setting Values: Linked, RSeparate]
CH3/4:
0
0
0
Outputs the audio of [CH3] and [CH4].
CH1/2:
Outputs the audio of [CH1] and [CH2].
MONI SEL SW Set:
Limitter...
Outputs according to the [MONI SELECT]
switch setting.
CH1(/2/3/4)
9
For configuring whether to enable limiter operation
[Setting Values: CH3/4, CH1/2, RMONI SEL SW
for each channel.
Set]
On:
0
0
0
Enables limiter operation.
Off:
AUDIO OUT Ref.
For configuring the reference output level of the
Disables limiter operation.
AUTO/MANUAL SW Set:
Operates according to the [AUDIO INPUT
MANUAL/AUTO] selection switch.
Operation is “On” in the AUTO mode and “Off”
in the MANUAL mode.
[AUDIO OUT] terminal.
[Setting Values: +4dB, R 0dB, -3dB]
[Setting Values: On, Off, RAUTO/MANUAL SW
Set]
A/V Set Menu
140
AUDIO OUT Limiter
IFB/RET Monitor...
CH1(/2)
For configuring whether to enable limiter operation
9
for the output of the [AUDIO OUT] terminal.
For configuring the output from the [PHONE]
On:
0
0
terminal during IFB Return over IP of each channel.
Enables limiter operation.
Off:
Auto:
0
Outputs upon mixing the IFB/Return over IP
audio with the microphone audio when IFB/
Return over IP audio input is detected. Outputs
only the microphone audio when IFB/Return
over IP audio input is not detected.
IFB/RET Only:
Disables limiter operation.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [AUDIO OUT Limiter] is set to “On”, a
0
0
icon is displayed on the status screen (audio
Outputs only the IFB/Return over IP audio at all
times.
output).
Off:
PHONE Output
IFB/Return over IP audio is not output.
[Setting Values: Auto, IFB/RET Only, ROff]
For selecting whether to output audio from the
[PHONE] terminal as stereo sound or mixed sound
when the [MONI SELECT] switch is set to “BOTH”.
Memo :
To enable different settings for CH1 and CH2 of
[IFB/RET Monitor], configure [PHONE] output to
“Stereo”.
0
Stereo:
0
Outputs stereo sound (outputs audio sound of
CH1(CH3) to L, and CH2(CH4) to R).
Mix:
0
IFB/RET Audio ALC
9
Outputs mixed sound (mixed sound of
CH1(CH3) and CH2(CH4)) to both L and R.
For configuring the audio ALC operation during
IFB/Return over IP.
[Setting Values: Stereo, RMix]
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
Min. ALARM Level
[IFB/RET Audio ALC] is an automatic level
adjustment function that enables clear IFB/
Return over IP audio.
0
For configuring whether to output or mute the alarm
sound when the [ALARM] volume adjustment knob
is turned to the minimum level.
[Setting Values: Audible, ROff]
ALC Level
9
For setting the IFB/Return over IP audio level
Speaker Gain
For configuring the speaker gain.
[Setting Values: +6dB, +3dB, R0dB, -3dB, -6dB]
during ALC operation.
High:
0
0
0
Automatically adjusts the IFB/Return over IP
audio to maximum sound level.
Middle:
Wireless Channel
For configuring the wireless channels.
Automatically adjusts the IFB/Return over IP
audio to middle sound level.
Low:
Dual:
0
Inputs the wireless Ch1 output to Ch1(Ch3)
Audio In and the wireless Ch2 output to
Ch2(Ch4) Audio In.
Automatically adjusts the IFB/Return over IP
audio to low sound level.
Single:
0
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
Inputs the wireless Ch1 output to both of
Ch1(Ch3)/Ch2(Ch4) Audio In.
[Setting Values: Dual, RSingle]
A/V Set Menu
141
Memo :
If the IFB/Return over IP audio is too loud, set
0
this item to “Low”. If the sound is still loud even
after setting to “Low”, set [IFB/RET Audio ALC]
to “Off”.
Caution :
The IFB/Return over IP audio may not be audible if
all the following conditions are true, please readjust
each setting accordingly.
[IFB/RET Audio ALC] is set to “Off”
0
0
0
[IFB/RET Monitor]/[CH1][CH2] is set to “Auto”
The audio input of IFB/Return over IP is low
VF Audio Output
For configuring the SDI audio output from the [VF]
terminal.
[Setting Values: IFB/RET, Camera, ROff]
Memo :
This audio output setting is also applied when
[SDI OUT2] or [HDMI OUT] is configured to
“VF”.
0
When “IFB/RET” is selected, the only options
available for the audio output are IFB and Return
over IP. SDI return audio is not output.
0
A/V Set Menu
142
Return over IP...
Network Menu
For specifying network-related settings.
The display of the software keyboard for input
varies according to the item you are setting.
For configuring settings related to Return over IP.
This function allows video and audio to be received
via the network.
Memo :
Connection Setup...
Users cannot access this menu in the following
0
cases.
For configuring the network connection settings.
A [Wizard] screen will appear according to the
mode of connection. Follow the instructions to
perform the setting.
0
Recording
0
When [System] is set to a setting other than
“HD” or “SD”
0
When [Frame Rate] is set to “24p”
The preconfigured settings can be loaded, saved
or deleted.
0
When [Overlay Settings] B [Overlay
Function] is set to “Enable”
0
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup
”
Memo :
0
When [Optional Adapter] is set to “Enable”
Configure the [LAN] terminal and the USB
terminal/built-in wireless LAN u v or USB
terminal w x such that each has a
different network address (network segment).
Users cannot access this menu in the following
cases.
0
Web...
For setting the functions that make use of the web
0
browser.
0
During manual FTP transfer
0
During live streaming
Metadata Server
0
Return over IP in Progress
For registering the FTP server for importing the
metadata and the path of the file to be imported.
Up to 4 settings can be registered.
Live Streaming...
For configuring settings for distributing live video
images and audio.
Upload Settings
Memo :
For configuring the method for uploading to the
FTP server as well as the server and directory for
uploading the clip recorded in the media to the FTP
server.
Users cannot access this menu in the following
0
cases.
0
When [Record Format] B [System] is set to
“HD+Web” or “High-Speed”
0
During FTP transfer
0
When [Record Format] B [Frame Rate] is set
to “24p”
Network Menu
143
Import Metadata
Zero Config
For importing metadata from the FTP server.
Metadata loaded by the setup files (“User File”/
“All File”) will be deleted.
For allowing this camera recorder to be detected
automatically by external devices (such as
switchers) connected to the same LAN.
Connection can be established via one link from
the menu of the external device.
0
0
Memo :
Memo :
This option is not selectable if the network
0
The Zero Config function is not equipped with
connection is not established.
This option is not selectable while using the
network.
0
the function to change the settings of the camera
recorder.
0
Announcement
9
NTP
For configuring the method of connection from an
external device during automatic detection of this
camera recorder.
[Setting Values: RAll, LAN, USB/Int. WLAN, Off]
u v
[Setting Values: RAll, LAN, USB, Off] w x
Only for cellular adapter connection (USB)
[Setting Values: RLAN, Off]
The time of the videos recorded simultaneously on
multiple cameras can be synchronized by
reflecting the time information retrieved from the
NTP server in the time code.
The synchronization status with the NTP server
can be checked in the Status screen (network).
Memo :
If the network connection is incomplete, a
0
different result may occur.
Hostname Prefix
9
An error of about several frames may occur in
the time code information that reflects the NTP
time.
0
Part of the host name can be changed.
It will appear in the format of “XXXX-YYYY.local”
on the Status screen (network).
It may take a while to update the synchronization
with the NTP server. To update immediately,
turn off the power first, then turn it on again.
0
XXXX : Character string (maximum 8 characters)
configured in [Hostname Prefix]
YYYY : Serial number of this camera recorder
Memo :
Server Address
9
When [Announcement] is set to “Off”, this item
does not appear on the Status screen (LAN,
USB/Int. WLAN u v, USB w x).
0
For setting the address of the NTP server.
If this is not configured, “Master Mode” appears on
the Status screen (network).
However, “Not Synchronized” is displayed if the
unit is not connected to a network when the power
is turned on.
Reset Network
Restores all items in the [Network] menu to their
default settings.
Connection Setup Item
Wizard
Displays a [Wizard] screen for connecting to the
network.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
USB/Int. WLAN u v
For configuring the USB/built-in wireless LAN
network connection to On/Off.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Network Menu
144
APN
Setup Fileu v/USB Setup Filew x
Load
Loads the settings on the [Wizard] screen.
For specifying APN (Access Point Name).
9
*
This item is grayed out and cannot be selected
if APN cannot be set for the adapter attached.
Caution :
The APN setting is written into the cellular
0
Store
9
adapter, not this camera recorder.
Setting a wrong APN may result in
communication failure or expensive bills from
the telecommunications company. Set the APN
correctly.
Saves the settings on the [Wizard] screen.
Delete
9
Deletes the saved settings.
Live Streaming Item
Live Streaming
Starts live distribution when “On” is selected.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Default Gateway
For configuring the gateway to be used. Select the
terminal that is connected to the router for external
network access.
[Setting Values: RLAN, USB/Int. WLAN] u v
[Setting Values: RLAN, USB] w x
Memo :
“On” cannot be selected if streaming is not
possible with the selected resolution, frame rate
and bitrate combination.
0
FTP Proxy...
For setting the FTP proxy.
“On” cannot be selected if connection of the
selected network in [Interface] is not
established.
0
Type
9
“On” cannot be selected when FTP is running.
Live streaming switches to “Off” when the power
is turned off.
0
0
Select the type of FTP proxy.
[Setting Values: RNo Proxy, HTTP]
Server
9
Auto Restart
9
Set the FTP proxy server name.
Memo :
When the network is reconnected after
disconnection, live streaming will resume
automatically.
Enter the name using the onscreen keyboard.
You can enter characters not more than 127
bytes using single-byte alphanumeric
characters (a to z, 0 to 9), single-byte hyphen
(“-”) or dot (“.”).
0
0
On:
0
Once the network is reconnected, live streaming
resumes automatically.
Off:
0
When [Type] is set to “No Proxy”, changes
cannot be made.
0
Live streaming does not resume automatically
even when the network is reconnected.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Port
9
Memo :
Set the FTP proxy port number.
Memo :
When the power of the camera is turned off,
regardless of the settings in [Auto Restart], live
streaming does not begin automatically even
when power is turned on again and network
connection is established.
0
Enter the name using the onscreen keyboard.
0
0
Enter an integer between 1 and 65535.
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when live streaming is configured to
“On”).
0
Network Menu
145
o
Type
Optional Adapter
For configuring the system for transferring video
H.265/HEVC streaming is possible with the use of
and audio to be distributed.
KA-EN200 (sold separately).
[Setting Values: RMPEG2-TS/UDP, MPEG2-TS/
TCP, MPEG2-TS/RTP, RTSP/RTP, ZIXI(SRT),
RTMP, RTMPS]
Configure to “Enable”, followed by configuring the
streaming server after rebooting.
[Setting Values: Enable, RDisable]
Memo :
Use reception devices that are compatible with
0
0
0
Interface
the respective transfer systems.
For selecting the terminal for live streaming.
[Setting Values: RLAN, USB/Int. WLAN] u v
[Setting Values: RLAN, USB] w x
To use the “ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is
needed separately.
SRT protocol update needs to be performed
before using the SRT protocol. Doing so will
make the Zixi protocol unusable.
Server
To enable the use of the Zixi protocol again,
perform Zixi protocol update.
For selecting the server for live streaming.
[Setting Values: RServer1, Server2, Server3,
Server4]
The following items that can be set vary
depending on the setting of this item.
0
Memo :
o
Connection Mode
The setting cannot be changed during live
0
For configuring the SRT connection mode.
[Setting Values: RCaller, Listener, Rendezvous]
Memo :
0
streaming (when [Live Streaming] set to “On”).
Streaming Server
9
For setting the server for live streaming.
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“SRT”.
The setting cannot be changed during live
0
o
Destination Address
streaming (when [Live Streaming] set to “On”).
For setting details such as the host name and the
IP address of the live distribution destination.
Server1, Server2, Server3, Server4
9
*
Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
*
The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed
individually.
o
Alias
o
Destination URL
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
For entering the URL of the live distribution
destination beginning with “rtmp://” or “rtmps://”.
There is no default value (blank).
camera.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Server] options.
*
You can enter up to 191 characters and ASCII
*1 The default value is “Server1/Server2/
characters.
Server3/Server4”.
Memo :
Available when [Type] is set to “RTMP” or
*2 You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII
characters.
0
“RTMPS”.
Network Menu
146
o
o
Destination Port
Username
Enter the network port number of the live
distribution destination using an integer between 1
and 65535.
For setting the user name.
The default value is “jvc”.
*
Enter not more than 31 characters.
When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/UDP”, “MPEG2-
TS/TCP” or “MPEG2-TS/RTP”, the default value is
“6504”. If “ZIXI” is set, the default value is “2088”.
Memo :
0
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“RTSP/RTP”.
Password
Memo :
0
When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/RTP”, only
o
even numbers from 2 to 65530 can be specified
for the port number.
For setting the [Stream ID] password.
For ZIXI, there is no default value (blank).
For RTSP/RTP, a random alphanumeric value that
varies with each model is assigned as the default
value.
When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/RTP” and
0
[SMPTE 2022-1 FEC] is set to “On”, N+2 and N
+4 port numbers are also used in addition to the
specified port number (N).
*
Enter not more than 127 characters. Enter not
more than 31 characters for RTSP/RTP setting.
o
Port
o
Latency
Enter a SRT port number using an integer between
For setting the latency mode.
[Setting Values: High, Medium, RLow, Min]
1 and 65535.
The default value is “6504”.
Memo :
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
0
“SRT”.
“ZIXI”.
o
Stream ID
o
PCR Mode
For setting the registered stream ID of the live
distribution destination. It allows direct streaming
of multiple cameras on a single device.
For configuring the low latency mode.
[Setting Values: Fast, RStandard]
Memo :
0
The default value varies with the product model.
Available when [Type] is set to “MPEG2-
TS/UDP”, “MPEG2-TS/RTP”, “ZIXI” or “SRT”.
Configuring to “Fast” minimizes the lag but the
video image may be disrupted depending on the
shooting and network conditions as priority is
given to low latency. It is intended for use in a
stable network environment to prevent packet
loss from occurring.
*
Enter not more than 63 characters.
Memo :
0
0
Available when [Type] is set to “ZIXI” or “SRT”.
o
Stream Key
Enter the stream key specified at the live
transmission destination.
There is no default value (blank).
*
Enter not more than 127 characters.
Memo :
Available when [Type] is set to “RTMP” or
0
“RTMPS”.
Network Menu
147
o
o
Adaptive Bit Rate
Latency
If “On” is selected, the bit rate setting value of live
streaming is set to maximum limit, and the bit rate
is changed automatically according to changes in
the network bandwidth.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
Enter the amount of SRT latency using an integer
between 20 ms and 8000 ms.
The default value is “500ms”.
Memo :
0
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“SRT”.
[Adaptive Bit Rate] can be configured when
o
Encryption
[Type] is configured to “ZIXI” or “SRT”.
For configuring the SRT encryption mode.
[Setting Values: AES-256, AES-192, AES-128,
ROff]
*
The bit rate is displayed on the status screen
only when “On” is set.
o
SMPTE 2022-1 FEC
Memo :
Set to “On” to use FEC (Forward Error Correction).
A transmission system that recovers the missing
packets in the decoding process without having to
retransmit the missing packets.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
*
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
“SRT”.
o
Passphrase
For configuring the SRT passphrase.
You can enter a passphrase between 10 to 79
characters. The default passphrase is generated
randomly.
The decoder must be compatible with SMPTE
2022-1.
Memo :
0
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
“MPEG2-TS/RTP”.
FEC Matrix
“SRT”.
The passphrase can be configured when
[Encryption] is configured to a setting other than
“Off”.
0
o
For setting the amount of FEC (Forward Error
Correction) overhead for configuring
SMPTE2022-1.
o
FEC
For configuring the FEC mode.
Memo :
0
It enables recovery of data streaming packet loss
without retransmission.
This item is selectable only when [SMPTE
2022-1 FEC] is set to “On”.
[Setting Values: 6x6, 8x8, 10x10, ROff]
Memo :
o
Bandwidth Overhead
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
Enter the SRT bandwidth overhead using an
integer between 5% and 100%.
The default value is “25%”.
“SRT”.
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
“SRT”.
Network Menu
148
Resolution
Bit Rate
For setting the resolution of the video image during
For setting the encode bitrate of the video image
live distribution.
during live distribution.
The available options vary according to the settings
for [WResolution] and [WFrame Rate] under
[Record Format].
The selectable options vary according to the
settings in [Live Streaming Set] B [Resolution] and
[Bit Rate].
For details on the settings, please refer to
Setting Value
W Resolution
1920x1080
1920x1080, 1280x720,
640x360,
Memo :
720x480 (U model)
720x576 (E model)
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when [Live Streaming] set to “On”).
Depending on the type of network adapter used
and the connection, images and audio sound
during live streaming may be choppy.
0
1280x720
1280x720,
0
640x360
720x480 (U model) 720x480
720x576 (E model) 720x576
Interlace Format
Memo :
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when [Live Streaming] set to “On”).
The Aspect Ratio for the live streaming image is
fixed to “16:9”.
0
For configuring the interlace mode.
Configure the setting according to the decoder in
use.
0
[Setting Values: Field, RField Pair]
Frame Rate
Return over IP Item
Return over IP
For configuring Return over IP to On/Off.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
For setting the frame rate of the video image during
live distribution.
The options vary according to the settings of [Live
Streaming Set] B [Resolution] and the [WFrame
Rate] settings under [Record Format].
Server
Setting Value
60p, 60i, 30p
50p, 50i, 25p
30p
W Frame Rate
60p, 60i
50p, 50i
30p
25p
Memo :
For selecting the source server for sending out
Return over IP audio/video.
[Setting Values: RServer1, Server2, Server3,
Server4]
25p
Memo :
The setting cannot be changed while Return
over IP is operating (when [Return over IP] is set
to “On”).
0
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when live streaming is configured to
“On”).
0
Return Server
9
For configuring the source server for sending out
Return over IP audio/video.
Memo :
The setting cannot be changed while Return
over IP is operating (when [Return over IP] is set
to “On”).
0
Network Menu
149
o
Source Address
Server1, Server2, Server3, Server4
9
For configuring details such as the host name and
IP address of the video/audio transmission source.
There is no default value (blank).
*
The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed
individually.
o
Alias
*1 A maximum of 191 ASCII characters can be
entered when [Type] is configured to a setting
other than “SRT”.
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Server] options.
*2 A maximum of 191 characters including
single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0
to 9) and single-byte hyphen [-] and dot [.] can
be entered when [Type] is configured to
“SRT”.
*1 The default value is “Server1/Server2/
Server3/Server4”.
*2 You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII
characters.
o
Source Port
Enter the network port number of the video/audio
transmission source using an integer between 1
and 65535.
o
Type
For configuring the system for transferring video
and audio to be distributed.
The default value is “554” when [Type] is set to
“RTSP/RTP”, “2077” when it is set to “ZIXI”, and
“5000” when it is set to Icecast.
[Setting Values: RRTSP/RTP, ZIXI(SRT), Icecast]
Memo :
Operates as IFB when the setting is configured
0
0
0
0
Memo :
0
to “Icecast”.
When [Type] is set to “RTSP/RTP”, only even
numbers from 2 to 65530 can be specified for
the port number.
Use transmission devices that are compatible
with the respective transfer systems.
To use the “ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is
needed separately.
o
Port
SRT protocol update needs to be performed
before using the SRT protocol. Doing so will
make the Zixi protocol unusable.
Enter a SRT port number using an integer between
1 and 65535.
The default value is “6510”.
To enable the use of the Zixi protocol again,
perform Zixi protocol update.
Memo :
0
The following items that can be set vary
depending on the setting of this item.
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
“SRT”.
o
Protocol
o
Stream ID
For configuring the protocol of the video/audio
For configuring the stream ID registered on the
source server to be connected.
video/audio transmission source.
There is no default value (blank).
[Setting Values: RUDP, TCP]
*
Enter not more than 63 characters.
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
Memo :
0
“RTSP/RTP”.
This item is available for setting when [Type] is
set to “RTSP/RTP” or “ZIXI”.
Username
o
Connection Mode
For configuring the SRT connection mode.
[Setting Values: RCaller, Listener, Rendezvous]
o
For setting the user name.
There is no default value (blank).
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
*
Enter not more than 63 characters.
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
“SRT”.
0
“RTSP/RTP”.
Network Menu
150
o
o
Password
Encryption
For setting the password.
For configuring SRT encryption.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
There is no default value (blank).
*
You can enter up to 31 characters when [Type]
Memo :
is set to “RTSP/RTP”.
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
“SRT”.
*
You can enter up to 127 characters when [Type]
is set to “ZIXI”.
o
Passphrase
Memo :
0
For configuring the SRT passphrase.
There is no default value (blank).
You can enter a passphrase between 10 to 79
characters.
This item is available for setting when [Type] is
set to “RTSP/RTP” or “ZIXI”.
Name
o
Memo :
For configuring the name.
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
The default value is “HC900”.
0
“SRT”.
*
Enter not more than 31 characters.
This item is selectable when [Encryption] is set
to a value other than “Off”.
0
Memo :
0
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
o
Resolution (Fixed)
“ZIXI”.
This is fixed at “1280x720”.
o
Latency
o
Frame Rate
For setting the latency mode.
[Setting Values: Medium, RMinimum, Off]
Memo :
0
For configuring the frame rate.
0
When [Record Format] B [Frame Rate] is set to
“60p”, “60i” or “30p”
[Setting Values: R60p, 30p]
0
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
When [Record Format] B [Frame Rate] is set to
“ZIXI”.
“50p”, “50i” or “25p”
o
Mountpoint
[Setting Values: R50p, 25p]
Enter the mountpoint (character string for
identifying a stream) for streaming servers that
support multiple streams.
Memo :
This item is available for setting only when
0
[Type] is set to “RTSP/RTP”, “ZIXI” or “SRT”.
There is no default value (blank).
*
Enter not more than 63 characters.
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
“Icecast”.
Latency
o
Enter the amount of SRT latency using an integer
between 20 ms and 8000 ms.
The default value is “20ms”.
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
“SRT”.
Network Menu
151
Web Item
Metadata Server Item
Web Access
To access via a web browser, set to “On”.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Meta-FTP1, Meta-FTP2, Meta-FTP3, Meta-
FTP4
*
The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed
individually.
Camera Name
o
Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
For setting the name to be displayed on the web
browser. Enter not more than 8 characters using
the software keyboard.
camera.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Import Metadata] options.
(Default value: HC900)
*
o
Enter not more than 31 characters.
Protocol
Username
For setting the user name. Enter not more than 31
characters using the software keyboard.
(Default value: jvc)
For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be
connected.
FTP:
0
0
0
Protocol that does not encrypt the incoming and
outgoing data.
Password
SFTP:
Changes the password for accessing via a web
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSH.
browser.
The current password is displayed. Enter a new
password directly.
FTPS:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit mode
(starts encrypted communication once
connection starts).
Enter not more than 31 characters using the
software keyboard.
(Default value: random alphanumeric value that
varies with each model)
FTPES:
0
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit mode
(starts encrypted communication after
permission is granted).
Port
For configuring the port number during access to a
web page from an external source.
[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES]
Memo :
o
Server
Enter the name using the software keyboard.
Enter an integer between 1 and 65535. (Default
value: 80)
0
0
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP
server.
To configure the setting to a number other than
the default value, specify the number of an
unused port.
0
*
Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
For more details, please consult the
administrator of the network in use.
0
o
Port
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an
integer between 1 and 65535.
The default value varies with the protocol setting.
(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21)
o
File Path
Enter the path name for the metadata file (“/pub/
meta.xml”, “/home/user/meta2.xml”, etc.)
Enter not more than 127 characters.
0
Network Menu
152
o
Username
Auto Upload
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
When [Upload] is configured to “Auto”, FTP
transfer starts automatically when the setting is
configured to “On”.
server.
*
Enter not more than 31 characters.
Password
o
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
*
This is fixed at “Off” when [System] is set to
0
Enter not more than 31 characters.
PASV Mode
“High-Speed”.
o
For setting whether to set the communication mode
used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a
connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
Slot
9
For selecting the recording media slot to enable
automatic upload.
[Setting Values: RA, B]
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Division
9
Memo :
Automatically splits the clips and performs FTP
transfer during recording at the preconfigured time
when [System] is configured to “HD+Web”.
[Setting Values: Off, 15 sec, R30 sec, 45 sec, 60
sec, 90 sec, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min]
When [Protocol] is set to “SFTP”, this item
0
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
Upload Item
Upload
Memo :
[Slot] is fixed at “B”.
0
For configuring the method for uploading to the
Cellular
9
FTP server.
For configuring whether to enable connection via a
Auto:
0
0
USB cellular adapter.
Select this option for automatic FTP transfer.
FTP transfer starts when [Auto Upload] is
configured to “On”.
[Setting Values: Enable, RDisable]
Server
9
Manual:
For configuring the server for uploading to the FTP
Select this option for manual FTP transfer from
the Media mode.
server.
[Setting Values: RClip-FTP1, Clip-FTP2, Clip-
FTP3, Clip-FTP4]
[Setting Values: RAuto, Manual]
Network Menu
153
o
Server
Clip Server
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP
server.
Clip-FTP1, Clip-FTP2, Clip-FTP3, Clip-FTP4
*
The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed
*
Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
individually.
o
Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
o
Port
camera.
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an
The name set in this item will appear on the [FTP
Upload] action screen of the thumbnail display.
integer between 1 and 65535.
The default value varies with the protocol setting.
(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21, ZIXI:
2088)
*
o
Enter not more than 31 characters.
Protocol
o
Dir. Path
For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be
Enter the path name for the directory to upload to
connected.
(“/pub”, “/home/user”, etc.)
FTP:
0
0
0
Protocol that does not encrypt the incoming and
outgoing data.
*
o
Enter not more than 127 characters.
Username
SFTP:
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSH.
server.
*
o
Enter not more than 31 characters.
Stream ID
FTPS:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit mode
(starts encrypted communication once
connection starts).
For configuring the stream ID that is registered at
the distribution destination.
The default value varies with the product model.
FTPES:
0
0
*
Enter not more than 63 characters.
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit mode
(starts encrypted communication after
permission is granted).
Memo :
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
0
“ZIXI”.
ZIXI:
o
Password
Enables stable transmission by reducing jitter
and packet loss significantly through
communicating via a relay server.
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
*
Enter not more than 31 characters. Enter not
more than 127 characters for ZIXI setting.
[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES, ZIXI]
Memo :
o
PASV Mode
To use the “ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is
0
For setting whether to set the communication mode
used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a
connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
needed separately.
If “ZIXI” is set, the resume function is enabled.
0
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
When [Protocol] is set to “SFTP”, this item
0
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
Network Menu
154
Type
Overlay Settings Menu
This screen is used to configure overlay settings.
Images can be overlaid onto recorded video and
live stream video.
By selecting [Type], overlay images can be
displayed.
[Setting values: Broadcast, RNone]
Output
Overlay Function
For specifying overlay output settings.
For specifying whether to activate the overlay
REC
9
function.
For setting whether to record overlay images
[Setting Values: Enable, RDisable]
together with the recorded video into an SD card.
Memo :
On:
0
0
The setting cannot be changed during
recording, streaming or Return over IP.
When [System] is configured to a setting other
than “HD” and “HD+Web”, this item is fixed at
“Disable”.
0
Saves the video with overlay images into an SD
card.
0
Off:
Overlay images are not recorded into an SD
card.
0
0
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup
item is fixed at “Disable”.
”, this
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
When “Disable” is selected, settings of the
overlay function cannot be changed.
Displays overlay images on the recording in slot
B when [System] is configured to “HD+Web”.
When the setting is configured to “Off”, live
streaming is limited to a maximum bit rate of 12
Mbps.
0
0
Layout
For selecting a SDP file.
Memo :
SDI OUT2
9
Create a SDP file using SDP Generator in
0
For setting whether to display overlay images on
Windows or Mac before recording.
SDI OUT2 output.
On:
0
0
Import User Layout
Displays overlay images on streaming videos
and SDI OUT2 output.
Load the SDP file that is created by using SDP
Off:
Generator onto this camera recorder.
Displays overlay images only on streaming
videos.
Memo :
Maximum 4 files can be saved in this camera
0
[Setting values: ROn, Off]
recorder.
The SDP file may not be saved depending on
the available memory capacity of the camera
recorder.
0
Delete User Layout
For deleting the SDP file.
Memo :
The SDP file is not deleted by selecting [System]
B [Reset All]. Delete the file from the camera
recorder.
0
Overlay Settings Menu
155
HDMI OUT
Full Screen Graphic
9
For setting whether to display overlay images on
Images can be displayed across the whole screen.
HDMI output.
Status
9
On:
0
0
Displays overlay images on streaming videos
For displaying the number of images saved in this
camera recorder and the memory capacity used.
and HDMI output.
Off:
Displays overlay images only on streaming
videos.
9
Import Graphic W / Y
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
For reading the images to be used in Full Screen
VIDEO OUT
9
Graphic from an SD card.
For setting whether to display overlay images on
Memo :
VIDEO OUT output.
JPEG and PNG formats are supported.
Enter not more than 31 characters for the file
name.
0
0
On:
0
0
Displays overlay images on streaming videos
and VIDEO OUT output.
Off:
Delete Graphic
9
Displays overlay images only on streaming
videos.
For deleting all images saved in this camera
recorder.
[Setting values: ROn, Off]
Live Streaming (Fixed)
9
Password Lock
Displays overlay images on live streaming videos.
The Overlay Settings menu can be locked with a
Setting is fixed at “On” and cannot be changed.
password.
On:
0
0
Watermark
A password is required to open the Overlay
Settings menu.
Inserting watermarks (digital watermark) on
Off:
recorded videos protects the content of your work.
Opens the Overlay Settings menu without a
password.
On:
0
0
Displays watermark.
Off:
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Does not display watermark.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
Caution :
It can be displayed when the SDP file for which
“Watermark” is preconfigured is selected in
[Layout].
Do not forget the password that you have set. If
the password is lost or forgotten, you cannot
deactivate the password protection function.
0
0
Position
9
The display position of the watermark can be
changed by using the cross-shaped button.
Overlay Settings Menu
156
Tally System
System Menu
For setting the display conditions of the tally lamp
(front and back) on the camera recorder.
This menu screen allows system-related settings.
For configuring recording settings, formatting and
restoration of a recording media, tally lamp setting,
date/time, time zone and other settings.
It can also be used to reset the menu settings to
their default values.
Internal:
0
0
Displays mainly the status of the camera
recorder.
Studio:
Displays the TALLY IN/PREVIEW IN signals
from an external device, such as a remote
control unit.
Record Set...
[Setting Values: RInternal, Studio]
For specifying recorded video-related settings.
Front Tally/Back Tally
For configuring how the front and back tally lamps
on this camera recorder are illuminated when [Tally
System] is set to “Internal” and while recording is in
progress, when a remaining level warning is
displayed or during live streaming.
Media
Format Media
9
For formatting (initializing) a recording media.
Select a card slot, select [Format] from [Cancel]/
[Format], and press the [STATUS/SET] button (R)
to format (initialize) the card.
Rec/Live Streaming:
0
Lights up during recording or live streaming.
Live Streaming:
0
Lights up during live streaming. Does not light
up during recording.
Rec:
Restore Media
0
9
Lights up during recording.
For restoring a recording media.
[Setting Values: Rec/Live Streaming, Live
Select a card slot, and press the [STATUS/SET]
button (R) to restore the SD card.
Streaming, RRec]
Memo :
When [Tally System] is set to “Studio”, this item
0
Memo :
appears as “---” and selection is disabled.
This item appears only when the recording
media needs to be restored. However, it is not
selectable when recording in Camera mode and
during Clip Review.
0
GPS u v
For setting the GPS function to On or Off (power
on/off).
Setup File
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
This allows you to save the menu settings as well
as the performance results of shutter speed and
AWB.
Memo :
When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT1
Res.] is set to “1080p”, configuring [System] B
[GPS] to “On” changes the setting to “1080i”.
u v
0
It is useful to save settings according to different
shooting conditions.
Load File...
9
Loads the settings.
Store File...
9
Saves the settings.
Delete File...
9
Deletes the configured file.
System Menu
157
Memo :
Battery
This cannot be configured to a value that is
0
For configuring the warning voltage or warning
level (%) according to the battery specifications
and condition of use.
higher than the setting of [Near End (%)].
A warning sound is also output when the voltage
reaches 12.0 V, and the power will turn off
automatically when the voltage reaches 11.9 V
or lower.
0
Type
9
For configuring the battery warning using voltage
or remaining level (%).
[Setting Values: Capacity%, RVoltage]
Language
Memo :
Switches between languages in the menu screen.
[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Español] (U
model)
[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Deutsch,
Italiano, Español, Türkçe] (E model)
For batteries where information on the
0
remaining level cannot be acquired, the status
will be the same as when “Voltage” is selected
even when “Capacity%” is selected. To find out
whether information on the remaining level can
be obtained for the battery, check the remaining
battery level icon on the display screen.
Reset All
Resets all menu settings.
Memo :
Near End (V)
9
[Date/Time] and [Time Zone] cannot be reset.
0
Outputs a warning sound when the voltage falls
below the preset level.
[Setting value: 12.1 V to 14.0 V (R13.1 V)]
This item is not selectable when recording in
Camera mode, during Clip Review, during live
streaming and in Media mode.
0
Memo :
This cannot be configured to a value that is lower
0
than the setting of [End (V)].
Date/Time
End (V)
9
For setting the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Memo :
The display order of the date (year, month, day)
follows the setting in [Display Settings] B [Date
Style]. However, the 24-hour format is used for
the hour display regardless of the [Time Style]
setting.
Outputs a warning sound upon reaching the preset
voltage, andturnsoffthepowerautomaticallywhen
the voltage falls below the preset level.
0
[Setting value: 12.0 V to 13.9 V (R12.8 V)]
Memo :
This cannot be configured to a value that is
0
higher than the setting of [Near End (V)].
If the signal reception for GPS satellites allows
date and time to be set based on the GPS
information, you can set the time obtained from
the GPS satellite by pressing the [USER1]
button.
0
Near End (%)
9
Outputs a warning sound when the voltage falls
below the preset level (%).
[Setting Values: 10 %, 15 %, R20 %, 25 %, 30 %]
Memo :
The [USER1] button is grayed out if information
for setting the date and time cannot be acquired
from the GPS satellite. u v
This cannot be configured to a value that is lower
0
than the setting of [End (%)].
When [NTP] in the Status screen (Network)
becomes “Synchronized”, pressing the
[USER3] button reflects the NTP time.
A warning sound is also output when the voltage
reaches 12.5 V or lower.
0
0
End (%)
9
Outputs a warning sound upon reaching the preset
level (%), and turns off the power automatically
when the remaining level falls below the preset
level.
[Setting Values: 1 %, 5 %, R10 %, 15 %, 20 %]
System Menu
158
Date Style
System Information
Version
For setting the date display sequence for display
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen as well
as for time stamp recording.
9
Displays the version of the camera in the upper row
and the version of the dedicated viewfinder in the
lower row.
Display examples of the setting values are as
follows.
Display
:
0000-0000
00-00-00
DMY2: 30 Jun 2020
DMY1: 30-06-2020
MDY2: Jun 30, 2020
MDY1: 06-30-2020
YMD: 2020-06-30
0
0
0
0
0
Memo :
The lower row is displayed only when a
viewfinder (supplied u v or separately
sold w x) is connected .
0
[Setting Values: DMY2, DMY1, MDY1, MDY2,
YMD]
(Default values: MDY2 (U model), DMY1 (E
model))
Fan Hour
9
For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.
Memo :
Time Style
Under normal environment, dust will
0
For setting the time display for display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen as well as for time
stamp recording.
accumulate on the internal fan when the camera
recorder is used over a long period. Dust may
enter the camera recorder especially if it is used
outdoors. This may affect the image and sound
quality of the camera recorder. Check and
replace the fan after every 9000 hours
(suggested guideline).
[Setting Values: R24hour, 12hour]
Time Zone
For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30
minutes.
[Setting Values: UTC-12:00-UTC-00:30, UTC,
UTC+00:30-UTC+14:00 (in 30 min increments)]
(Default values: UTC-05:00 (U model), UTC (E
model))
Open Source License
9
Displays the license for the open source software
used by this camera recorder.
Memo :
If [Date/Time] is already set, the [Date/Time]
item is automatically adjusted when [Time
Zone] is altered.
0
Reserved
For setting the additional function to “On” or “Off”.
Reserved 1 to Reserved 16
9
Normally set to “Off”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
System Menu
159
Record Set Item
Record Format
After setting of all items in the [Record Format]
menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the
screen to apply the new settings on the camera
recorder and switch the recording format. A
“Please Wait...” message appears during
switching.
9
WFormat/
Format
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to
the recording media in slot A or Expansion slot.
QuickTime(MPEG2):
0
0
0
0
0
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
MXF(MPEG2):
MXF file format
QuickTime(H.264):
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
Exchange: (U model only)
Sports Video Interop Group format
MP4(H.264): (E model only)
MP4 file format
System
9
For selecting a system definition.
HD EXT (SSD):
0
0
0
0
Records videos in “HD EXT” quality to
[Expansion slot] (SSD media).
HD:
[Setting Values: QuickTime(MPEG2),
MXF(MPEG2), RQuickTime(H.264), Exchange]
(U model only)
Records in “HD” (High Definition) quality for both
slots A and B.
[Setting Values: QuickTime(MPEG2),
MXF(MPEG2), RQuickTime(H.264), MP4(H.264)]
(E model only)
SD:
Records in “SD” (Standard Definition) quality for
both slots A and B.
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to “HD EXT(SSD)”, this
HD+Web:
item is fixed at “ProRes”.
Records in “HD” (high definition) for slot A, and
in resolution suitable for web distribution for slot
B.
When [System] is set to “SD” or “SD(SDI In)”,
0
this item is fixed at “QuickTime(H.264)”.
When [System] is set to “HD+Web”, this item is
HD(SDI In):
0
0
0
0
fixed at “QuickTime(H.264)”.
Records the HD SDI video of the device
connected to the [HD/SD SDI IN] terminal in
“HD” to both slot A and slot B.
SD(SDI In):
When [System] is set to “High-Speed”, this item
0
is fixed at “QuickTime(H.264)”.
Exchange (U model) and MP4(H.264) (E model)
0
are selectable only when [System] is configured
to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”.
Records the SD SDI video of the device
connected to the [HD/SD SDI IN] terminal in
“SD” to both slot A and slot B.
High-Speed:
Exchange format is used under license from
0
Sports Video Interoperability Group, Inc..
Records slow motion videos in “HD” (High
Definition) for both slot A and slot B.
[Setting Values: HD EXT(SSD), RHD, SD, HD
+Web, HD(SDI In), SD(SDI In), High-Speed]
Caution :
0
The selectable options for the [WFormat]/[
Format], [WResolution]/[ Resolution],
[WFrame Rate]/[
Frame Rate], [WBit Rate]/
[
Bit Rate][WAudio]/[
Audio],
[YFormat], [YResolution], [YFrame Rate],
[YBit Rate] and [YAudio] settings vary
depending on the setting of this item.
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is configured to “High-
Speed”, network cannot be used via wireless
LAN u v or the [HOST] terminal (USB).
Configure as follows in this case.
0
0
Set [Network] B [Connection Setup] B [USB/
Int. WLAN] to “Off”. u v
0
Unplug the USB network adapter
Note that camera operation will come to an
emergency stop and the power will turn off if the
above steps are not performed.
File data may be damaged if this happens while
recording is in progress.
System Menu
160
9
9
WResolution/
Resolution
WFrame Rate/
Frame Rate
For selecting the size of the image to be recorded
to the recording media in Slot A or the expansion
slot. (Horizontal x vertical)
For selecting the frame rate for recording to the
recording media in Slot A or the expansion slot.
The available options vary according to the settings
The available options vary according to the settings
of [System] and [WFormat].
for [System], [WResolution]/[
[WFormat]/[ Format].
Resolution] and
When [System] is set to “HD EXT(SSD)”:
Fixed at “1980x1080”.
0
When [System] is set to “HD EXT(SSD)”:
[Setting Values: 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p]
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
[WFormat] is set to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or
“MXF(MPEG2)”, and [WResolution] is set to
“1920x1080”:
0
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
and [WFormat] is set to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or
“MXF(MPEG2)”:
0
0
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080,
1280x720]
[Setting Values: 60i, 50i, 30p, 25p]
When [System] is set to “HD”, “HD(SDI In)” or
“HD+Web”, [WFormat] is set to “QuickTime(H.
264)”, and [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”:
[Setting Values: 60p, 60i, 50p, 50i, 30p, 25p,
24p]
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
and [WFormat] is set to “QuickTime(H.264)”:
[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
and [WFormat] is set to “Exchange” (U model
only):
0
0
0
When[System]issetto “HD”or“HD(SDIIn)”and
[WResolution] is set to “1440x1080”:
[Setting Values: 60i, 50i]
0
0
[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
and [WFormat] is set to “MP4(H.264)” (E model
only):
0
When [System] is set to “HD”, “HD(SDI In)” or
“HD+Web” and [WResolution] is set to
“1280x720”:
[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]
When [System] is set to “HD+Web”:
[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]
When [System] is set to “High-Speed”:
Fixed at “1920x1080”.
0
0
0
[Setting Values: 60p, 50p]
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
and [WFormat] to “Exchange”:
0
0
Fixed at “60p”. (U model only)
When [System] is set to “SD” or “SD(SDI In)”:
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
and [WFormat] to “MP4(H.264)”:
Fixed at “60p” or “50p”.
Fixed at either “720x480” or “720x576”.
Memo :
0
The selectable values of [WFrame Rate]/[
When [System] is set to “SD” or “SD(SDI In)”:
Fixed at either “60i” or “50i”.
0
0
Frame Rate] and [WBit Rate]/[
Bit Rate]
When [System] is configured to “High-Speed”:
[Setting Values: 120/60p, 100/50p, 120/30p,
100/25p, 120/24p]
vary according to the setting of this item.
Memo :
When [System] is configured to “HD(SDI In)”,
0
“30p”/“25p”/“24p” under [WFrame Rate] cannot
be selected.
System Menu
161
9
9
WBit Rate/
Bit Rate
WAudio/
Audio
For selecting the bit rate for recording to the
recording media in Slot A or the expansion slot.
The available options vary according to the settings
For selecting the audio (2ch/4ch) to be recorded to
the recording media in Slot A or the expansion slot.
The selectable options vary according to the
for [System], [WResolution]/[
[WFormat]/[ Format].
Resolution] and
settings in [WFormat]/[
Bit Rate].
Format] or [WBit Rate]/
[
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
[WFormat] is set to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or
“MXF(MPEG2)”, and [WResolution] is set to
“1440x1080”:
0
0
When [WBit Rate] is configured to a setting other
than “
70M (XHQ)” and “
50M
(XHQ)”:
[Setting Values: R4CH 16 bit, 2CH 16 bit]
[Setting Values: 35M (HQ), 25M (SP)]
0
When [WBit Rate] is set to “
(XHQ)” or “ 50M (XHQ)”:
[Setting Values: R4CH 24 bit, 2CH 24 bit]
Memo :
70M
*
When [WResolution] is set to a setting other than
“1440x1080”, it is fixed at “35M (HQ)”.
When [System] is set to “HD”, “HD(SDI In)” or
“HD+Web” and [WFormat] is set to
“QuickTime(H.264)”:
0
0
0
9
When [WFormat] is configured to “Exchange” (U
model) or “MP4(H.264)” (E model), the setting
is fixed at “2CH”.
0
When [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”,
and [WFrame Rate] is set to “60p” or “50p”:
When [System] is configured to “High-Speed”,
the setting is fixed at “2CH”.
[Setting Values:
70M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ), 50M (XHQ)]
0
When [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”,
and [WFrame Rate] to “60i”/“50i”/“30p”/“25p”/
“24p”:
Y Format
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to
the SD card in slot B when [System] is configured
to “HD+Web”.
[Setting Values:
50M (XHQ), 50M
This is fixed at QuickTime (H.264).
(XHQ), 35M (UHQ)]
0
When [WResolution] is set to “1280x720”:
Memo :
0
[Setting Values:
(UHQ)]
50M (XHQ), 35M
When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,
this item is fixed at the same setting as
[WFormat].
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD(SDI In)”,
and [WFormat] is set to “Exchange” or “MP4(H.
264)”:
0
9
Y Resolution
0
When [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”:
For selecting the size of the image to be recorded
to the SD card in slot B when [System] is configured
to “HD+Web”. (Horizontal x vertical)
Fixed at “12M(LP)”.
0
When [WResolution] is set to “1280x720”:
Fixed at “8M(LP)”.
When [System] is set to “HD+Web”:
0
0
When [System] is set to “SD” or “SD(SDI In)”:
Fixed at 8M (HQ).
0
0
When [WFrame Rate] is configured to “60p”/
“60i”/“30p”
When [System] is set to “High-Speed”:
[Setting Values: 960x540, 720x480,
480x270]
0
When [WFrame Rate] is set to “120/60p” or
0
“100/50p”
When [WFrame Rate] is configured to “50p”/
“50i”/“25p”
[Setting Values:
70M (XHQ),
[Setting Values: 960x540, 720x576,
480x270]
50M (XHQ), 50M (UHQ)]
0
When [WFrame Rate] is configured to a
0
When [WFrame Rate] is configured to “24p”
setting other than “120/60p” and “100/50p”
[Setting Values: 960x540, 480x270]
[Setting Values:
(XHQ), 35M (UHQ)]
50M (XHQ), 50M
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,
Memo :
this item is fixed at the same setting as
[WResolution].
When [System] is configured to “HD(SDI In)”,
“30p”/“25p”/“24p” under [WFrame Rate] cannot
be selected.
0
System Menu
162
Rec Mode
9
Y Frame Rate
The frame rate of the image to be recorded to the
SD card in slot B is fixed when [System] is set to
“HD+Web”.
For selecting the mode for recording to the
0
recording media.
The value fixed varies according to the settings for
[WFrame Rate].
[Setting Values: RNormal, Pre Rec, Clip
Continuous, Interval Rec, Frame Rec]
Fixed at “60i”, “50i”, “30p”, “25p” or “24p”.
0
Memo :
Memo :
0
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup Y” or
“Backup ”, this item is fixed at “Normal”.
When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,
0
this item is fixed at the same setting as [WFrame
This is fixed at “Normal” when [System] B
[Record Format] B [System] is configured to any
of the following.
0
Rate].
9
Y Bit Rate
0
HD(SDI In)
0
The bit rate of the image to be recorded to the SD
card in slot B is fixed when [System] is set to “HD
+Web”.
SD(SDI In)
0
HD EXT (SSD)
0
HD+Web
0
The value fixed varies according to the settings for
[YResolution].
High-Speed
0
Pre Rec Time
9
“3M(HQ)” when [YResolution] is configured
to “960x540”
For setting the pre-recording time when [Rec
0
“1.2M(LP)” when [YResolution] is configured
Mode] is set to “Pre Rec”.
to “480x270”
[Setting Values: R5sec, 10sec, 15sec]
0
“8M(HQ)” when [YResolution] is configured
Rec Frames
9
to “720x480” or “720x576”
Memo :
When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,
this item is fixed at the same setting as [WBit
Rate].
For setting the number of frames to record when
[Rec Mode] is set to “Frame Rec” or “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1frame, 3frames, 6frames]
0
Rec Interval
9
For setting the recording time interval when [Rec
9
Y Audio
Mode] is set to “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1sec, 2sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec,
1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 30min, 1hour]
The audio (2ch/4ch) to be recorded to slot B is the
same as the audio to be recorded to slot A.
SD Aspect
9
For setting the aspect ratio of the image when
[System] is set to “SD” or “SD(SDI In)”.
[Setting Values: R16:9, 4:3]
Memo :
For conditions other than those above, this item
0
is fixed at “16:9”.
System Menu
163
Slot Mode
Backup Rec
9
For starting/stopping backup recording with [REC]/
For setting the operation of the card slot.
[STBY].
Series:
0
This item is selectable only when [Slot Mode] is set
Mode that activates slots A and B sequentially.
Dual:
to “Backup Y” or “Backup
”.
0
Mode that activates slots A and B
simultaneously.
Memo :
When recording is stopped due to no remaining
space on the media, etc., this item is fixed at
“STOP” and cannot be selected.
0
Backup Y:
0
0
Mode that enables recording to slot B without
using the [REC] button. This item is selectable
only when [Rec Mode] is set to “Normal”.
Record, start and stop operations can be
controlled from the [Backup Rec] menu or using
the user button that is assigned with “Backup
Trig”.
4GB File Spanning(SDXC)
A recording file is automatically split when the size
exceeds 4 GB, but if an SDXC card is used, you
can record clips larger than 4 GB by setting this
option to “Off”. (Up to a maximum of 64 GB or 4
hours)
Backup
:
On:
0
Mode that enables recording to the [expansion
slot] without using the [REC] button. This item is
selectable only when [Rec Mode] is set to
“Normal”.
Splits a file when it exceeds 4 GB or 30 minutes.
Off:
0
Splits a file when it exceeds 64 GB or 4 hours.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Record, start and stop operations can be
controlled from the [Backup Rec] menu or using
the user button that is assigned with “Backup
Trig”.
Memo :
This option is only valid if the SD card used for
0
recording is of the SDXC format.
During simultaneous recording, such as Dual
Rec and backup recording, this option is valid
only when the SD cards in slots A and B are of
the SDXC format.
0
[Setting Values: RSeries, Dual, Backup Y, Backup
]
Memo :
LPCM (QuickTime)
When this is configured to “Series” and
recordable media is inserted into slot A or slot B
or both the slots, pressing the [REC] button
starts recording only to the card in the selected
slot (active slot).
0
For setting the audio recording format of
QuickTime.
[Setting Values: Dual Mono, RStereo]
When this is configured to “Dual” and recordable
media are inserted into both slots A and B,
pressing the [REC] button starts simultaneous
recording to the cards in both slots.
0
0
When [System] is configured to “HD
EXT(SSD)”“HD+Web”, “---” is displayed.
System Menu
164
Time Stamp
For setting whether to display shooting date/time
information in the recorded video.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
The date/time display style can be changed in
0
[Date Style]/[Time Style].
When [System] is set to “High-Speed”, this item
is fixed at “Off”.
0
Clip Set
Clip Name Prefix
9
For configuring the first four characters of the name
oftheclipfiletoberecordedtotherecordingmedia.
Enter any of the 36 characters including alphabets
(upper case) and numbers (0 to 9) using the
software keyboard.
[Setting Values: xxxG] (The default value of xxx is
the last three digits of the serial number.)
Reset Clip Number
9
For assigning a new number (Clip Number) by
resetting it (0001).
Select [Reset] and press the [STATUS/SET] button
(R) to reset the number.
If there are other clips on the recording media, it will
be assigned with the smallest available number.
Example:
0
If the [Clip Name Prefix] is “ABCD” and
“ABCD0001” already exists on the recording
media, “ABCD0002” will be assigned.
Clear Planning Metadata
Erases the planning metadata downloaded from
the FTP server.
This item also deletes the metadata loaded using
the setup files (“User File”/“All File”).
System Menu
165
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu
Adding/Editing
1
2
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to open
Frequently Used Menu
Items (Favorites Menu)
the [Main Menu] screen.
Select the menu or submenu item to add.
You can select and add/edit frequently used menu
items freely to create a personal menu screen
(Favorites Menu).
Display Settings
Focus
Meter
2
Memo :
[Favorites Menu] is only enabled in the Camera
mode. [Favorites Menu] remains unchanged
even when the recording format changes.
Up to 20 menu items can be added.
Added items in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset
even when [Main Menu] B [Reset All] is
executed.
0
0
0
.
Memo :
Long descriptive names may be displayed for
the menu items in [Favorites Menu] to enable
better understanding.
0
Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be
performed in the following cases. [USER1 Add]
is displayed in gray in the operation guide.
0
0
Selected item is already added to [Favorites
Menu].
0
Number of menu items that can be added (20
items) is exceeded.
3
Press the [USER1] button.
A screen to confirm the addition appears.
4
Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).
The selected menu item is added to [Favorites
Menu].
Add to Favorites Menu?
Focus
Add
Cancel
4
.
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
166
Editing Favorites Menu
4
Press the [USER2] button.
A delete mark (b) appears at the beginning of
the menu item.
You can delete or change the order of the items
added to [Favorites Menu].
Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]
Edit Favorites
Aspect Marker
1
Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to
A
open the [Main Menu] screen.
Press the [DISPLAY] button or press and
B
hold down the [MENU/THUMB] button to
open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
2
Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
.
Memo :
When the [USER2] button is pressed again
0
while the menu item with the delete mark (b) is
selected, the menu item will be excluded from
the items to be deleted and the delete mark (b)
disappears.
Favorites Menu
5
Press the [USER1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
Edit Favorites
2
6
Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
Edit Favorites
Camera Function...
Header
Edit Favorites
(Magenta)
Save & Exit
Exit without Saving
Cancel
6
.
.
3
Select the menu or submenu item to delete.
Memo :
Deletion is not complete until the changes are
0
0
0
Edit Favorites
saved with [Save & Exit].
To exit the editing mode without deleting any
items, select [Exit without Saving].
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
Aspect Marker
3
.
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
167
Changing the Order of Items in [Favorites
Menu]
3
Select the menu or submenu item to move
and press the Set button (R).
1
Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to open the
[Favorites Menu] screen.
The moving mode is activated and a position
selection bar for the move appears.
Edit Favorites
2
Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
TC/UB
3
Favorites Menu
Edit Favorites
Edit Favorites
2
TC/UB
Position
Selection
Bar
Edit Favorites
Camera Function...
Header
(Magenta)
.
4
Select the position to move to with the
cross-shaped button (JK).
Move the position selection bar with the cross-
shaped button (JK) and select a position to
move to.
.
5
Press the Set button (R).
The selected item moves to the new position.
Edit Favorites
4
TC/UB
Edit Favorites
TC/UB
5
.
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
168
6
7
Press the [USER1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
Edit Favorites
Save & Exit
Exit without Saving
Cancel
7
.
Memo :
Moving is not complete until the changes are
0
0
0
saved with [Save & Exit].
To exit the editing mode without saving any
changes, select [Exit without Saving].
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
169
B
Remaining Space on Media
Display Screen in Camera
Mode
When the display setting for [LCD/VF] B [Display
On/Off] is set to “Off”, the corresponding display is
hidden but it will appear for approximately 3
seconds when changes are being made.
Displays the remaining recording time for the
recording media in slot A and slot B separately.
:
Currently selected slot. (White card)
W
W z
:
Write-protect switch of SD card is set.
:
:
SD card cannot be read or
written to, or restored.
SD card requires
W!INVALID
W!FORMAT
W!RESTORE
formatting.
Memo :
:
:
SD card requires restoring.
When the display screen is turned off, it will
0
W
!INCORRECT
appear only in the following cases.
0
When the SD card is not supported.
When an SD card lower than Class 10 is
inserted while in the XHQ mode.
0
Approximately 3 seconds when changes are
0
being made
0
During event display or warning display
:
W!REC INH
0
When attempting to record more than 4
GB while a media that does not support
recording of more than 4 GB is inserted.
The following icons are displayed during FTP
upload.
Display Screen
h g f e dcb a Z Y
X
W
SDI IN
282min
100min
50min
00:00:00.00
A
B
1080 /30p
V
T
R
5 . 6 f t
U
S
C
12 :34 :56
D
E
F
SB
P
COMPRESS
ITU709
Icon
Status
Q
[Auto Upload] is configured to
“On” and in the standby state.
“A” is displayed at the top left
corner of the icon while in the
Auto FTP mode.
P
.
G
H
I
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
5600
102400
J K L M
N
O
.
Auto FTP transfer is in progress.
Three images are alternately
displayed, and the arrows
become animated.
Enlarged Display
Enlarged Display (LCD Monitor Only)
.
FTP transfer is in progress.
Three images are alternately
displayed, and the arrows
become animated.
.
G
WV
Error has occurred during FTP
transfer.
B
e
.
(Yellow)
Memo :
C
X
b
U
a g
Z
A
.
The displayed time is an estimate.
0
0
Even when the display screen is hidden and
[LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [Media Remain]
is set to “Off”, this will be displayed when there
is a warning.
Memo :
Only the display on the LCD monitor is enlarged.
0
A
Voltage/Battery Power
You can view the status of FTP transfer during
an upload under [Upload] on the Status screen.
Displays the current status of the power supply
in use.
0
Memo :
Even when the display screen is turned off and
0
[LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [Battery] is set to
“Off”, this will be displayed when there is a
warning.
Display Screen in Camera Mode
170
C
I
Operation lock
Audio Level Meter
Displays the audio levels for CH-1 to CH-4.
a appears on the screen when in the Auto
mode.
0
0
The r icon appears during operation lock.
Memo :
0
The s icon appears for 3 seconds after
operation lock is turned off.
D
.
Camera Angle[Tagging] u w
This is grayed out when in a mode that does
not support audio recording or when the
audio is not supported. The CH display is
grayed out in the enlarged display mode.
0
0
Displays the camera angle tagging information
when [WFormat] is configured to “Exchange”.
E
ODK[Tagging] u w
Displays the ODK (Offence, Defence, Kick)
tagging information when [WFormat] is
configured to “Exchange”. It flashes in red when
in the REMOVE mode.
.
F
Black Toe
When in the enlarged display mode, the
display changes with the setting of the
[AUDIO INPUT CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4]
selection switch.
Displays the Black Toe setting.
Memo :
The “Normal” appears for 3 seconds after
0
changing to Normal.
Example: During 1ch and 3ch display
FRONT1: When the selection switch is set
to “FRONT” and [Front Mic Select] is set to
a value other than “Mono”
G
Skin Detail
e appears when Skin Detail is functioning.
Memo :
0
FR1+2: When the selection switch is set to
“FRONT” and [Front Mic Select] is set to
“Mono”
f appears for 3 seconds after Skin Detail is
turned off.
REAR1: When the selection switch is set to
“REAR”
H
Color Space Display
Displays the color space.
WL1: When the selection switch is set to
“WIRELESS”
Memo :
0
This can be configured in [Camera Process] B
J
Iris F-Number
[Color Space].
Displays F-number of the lens iris.
Memo :
This item may not be displayed depending on
0
the lens used.
0
A a icon appears on the left side of the lens
aperture value (F-number) during Auto Iris
mode.
While in the Auto Iris mode, and [AE Lock] is set
0
to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a
icon appears on the
left side of the lens aperture value (F-number)
during lock operation.
K
ND Filter Position
Displays the current ND filter position.
Display Screen in Camera Mode
171
L
O
Shutter
White Balance Mode
The current shutter speed appears on the
Displays the current white balance mode.
(*****K indicates color temperature)
0
screen.
A *****K
B *****K
P *****K
:
:
:
When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRST]
switchissetto“A”intheManualWhite
Balance mode.
When the camera recorder is switched to the
Full Auto shooting mode using the user
button that is assigned with “Full Auto” or
when it is switched to the Automatic Shutter
mode with [Camera Function] B [Shutter] set
to “EEI”, the a icon appears on the left side of
the shutter speed.
0
When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRST]
switch is set to “B” in the Manual
White Balance mode.
When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRST]
switch is set to “PRST” in the Manual
White Balance mode.
Memo :
0
:
:
During Full Auto White Balance
mode.
a
FAW
FAW
The variable range of the shutter speed varies
according to the video format settings.
While in the Automatic Shutter mode, and [AE
While in the Full Auto White Balance
mode, and [AE Lock] is set for “FAW”
or “AE/FAW” during lock operation.
0
Lock] is set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a
icon
appears on the left side of the shutter speed
during lock operation.
[OFF] is displayed when the shutter is turned off
or when in the Low-light shooting mode.
0
Memo :
0
When [Preset Paint], [AWB Paint] or [FAW
M
AE Level
Paint] is set to a setting other than the default
value, a q icon is displayed to the right of the
color temperature.
Displayed when the AE function is activated.
When operated while manual operation is
disabled, “AE” blinks for about 5 seconds.
0
0
P
Expanded Focus/Video Signal Monitor/Return
Video (PiP)
N
Gain
You can select to display the gain in “dB” or
0
Displayed upon pressing the user button that is
assigned with “Expanded Focus”, “Video Signal
Monitor” and “Return Video” (PiP).
“ISO”.
Displays the gain value when in the Manual
Gain mode.
0
0
0
Memo :
0
A a icon appears on the left side of the gain
value in the “AGC” mode.
The order of display is “Expanded Focus” >
“Video Signal Monitor” > “Return Video” (PiP).
Focus Assist
“LUX” is displayed to the left of the gain value
when in the Low-light shooting mode.
Q
“
” is displayed when auto focus is
0
Memo :
0
activated.
While in the “AGC” mode, and [AE Lock] is set
When ACCU-Focus is enabled, “ACCU
”
0
to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a
icon appears on the
blinks for about 10 seconds while Focus
left side of the gain value during lock operation.
Assist starts up, after which the “
indicator lights up.
”
If recording starts while [ACCU-Focus] is
active, [ACCU-Focus] will be forcibly
deactivated.
0
Display Screen in Camera Mode
172
R
S
W
Luminance Information
Displayed when the Spot Meter function is
activated.
Network Connection Icon
USB connection or built-in wireless LAN
0
connection u v
MAX
MIN
:
:
Maximum luminance
0
Set [Network] B [Connection Setup] B
Minimum luminance
Zebra pattern
[USB/Int. WLAN] to “On”. u v
0
In the case of connecting to an external
During zebra pattern display,
(zebra icon)
network, check the destination in
[Network] B [Connection Setup] B
[Default Gateway].
is displayed on the display screen in Camera
mode.
T
Time Display
Icon
Status
Displays the current time.
Wireless LAN connection from the
Memo :
0
host terminal (USB) is established
The date/time display style can be configured in
.
[System] B [Date/Time].
Wired LAN connection from the
host terminal (USB) is established
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Time Stamp]
is set to “On”, this item is not displayed.
0
.
Cellular adapter connection from
the host terminal (USB) is
established
U
Focus Display
Displays the approximate distance to the
subject in focus during manual focus.
.
When a USB adapter different
from the connection settings is
detected
Memo :
0
.
The displayed unit of measurement (feet or
meter) can be configured in [LCD/VF] B [Display
Type] B [Focus].
Built-in wireless LAN connection is
established
u v
This item may not be displayed depending on
the lens used.
0
.
When [USB/Int. WLAN] is set
to “Off”
0
V
Zoom Display
(No
u v
Displays the zoom position. (Zoom bar or
value)
0
display)
When an unusable USB
0
adapter is detected
Memo :
.
The icon appears blinking when the camera
recorder is starting up, and is displayed in yellow
while getting ready to connect.
The zoom bar will only be displayed for 3
seconds after the zoom operation is
activated.
0
0
0
The value will always be displayed. (Z00 to
99)
LAN terminal connection
0
Inthecaseofconnectingtoanexternalnetwork,
Memo :
check the destination in [Network] B
The mode of display (value or bar) can be
0
[Connection Setup] B [Default Gateway].
configured in [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B
[Zoom].
Icon
Status
LAN terminal connection is
This item may not be displayed depending on
the lens used.
0
established
.
(No
When the LAN cable is not
display) connected
Memo :
The icon appears blinking when the camera
0
recorder is starting up, and is displayed in yellow
while getting ready to connect.
Display Screen in Camera Mode
173
X
Z
IFB/RET Mark
Time Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display
Displays the status of the IFB or Return over IP.
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data.
Example of time code display:
Display Screen
0
Icon
Status
During audio feed only
0
.
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
When an error occurs during
audio feed only
*
.
.
(Yellow)
*
Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot
(.) denotes drop frames.
During video+audio feed
.
Enlarged Display
When an error occurs during
video+audio feed
[NDF] is displayed to the right of [TC] in the
case of non-drop frames and [DF] in the case
of drop frames.
.
(Yellow)
a
NDF
SDI/HDMI Record Trigger
R-RUN
00H 00M 00S 00F
:
When [SDI Rec Trigger] is set to
“Type-A” or “Type-B”, or [HDMI Rec
Trigger] is set to “On” and recording
is stopped
STBY B
.
Example of user’s bit display:
Display Screen
0
:
When [SDI Rec Trigger] is set to
“Type-A” or “Type-B”, or [HDMI Rec
Trigger] is set to “On” and recording
is in progress
REC B
FF EE DD 20
.
Memo :
b
GPS Mark u v
Use the [TC DISPLAY] switch to toggle between
0
When [System] B [GPS] is set to “On”, the
the time code display and user’s bit display.
Time Code Lock Indicator
signal reception status is displayed.
Y
Memo :
When the built-in time code generator is
synchronized to the external time code data
input during the synchronization of time code
with another camera recorder, Z lights up.
When in the enlarged display mode, [EXTZ]
is shown in the TC mode display.
0
The display changes according to the signal
0
0
reception sensitivity. If signals cannot be
received, the H mark appears in yellow
regardless of the [LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off]
B [GPS] setting.
This item is not displayed when [GPS] is set to
“Off”.
0
0
Z lights up when [TC/UB] B [TC Mode] is
configured to “NTP” and the unit has
detected and synchronized to the NTP
server. When in the enlarged display mode,
[NTPZ] is shown.
Z lights up when [TC/UB] B [TC Mode] is
configured to “GPS” and the unit is
synchronized to GPS. When in the enlarged
display mode, [GPSZ] is shown. u v
Display Screen in Camera Mode
174
c
d
Media Status
----
Live streaming mark
:
A card is not detected in the
selected slot, and [Tally
System] is also not set to
“Studio”
When [Network] B [Live Streaming] B [Live
Streaming] is set to “On”, the distribution status
is displayed.
STBY
RREC
REVIEW
:
:
:
Recording standby
Recording
Icon
(Red)
(Red)
Status
Distribution in progress (good
Clip Review
connection quality)
.
:
Pre Rec recording standby
STBY P
Distribution in progress (poor
connection quality)
Pre Rec recording
.
:
RRECP
Waiting for connection
(RTSP/RTP only), connection
failed
:
Clip Continuous Rec recording
standby
STBY C
.
:
Clip Continuous Rec recording
(Yellow)
SDI Input Mode/High-Speed Frame Rate
RRECC
e
:
Clip Continuous Rec recording
pause
STBYC
0
“SDI INZ” is displayed when a device is
connected to the [HD/SD SDI IN] terminal,
and [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is set to “HD(SDI In)” or
“SD(SDI In)”.
(displayed in
yellow)
:
Interval Rec recording standby
STBY N
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is configured to “High-
Speed”, the setting value for [WFrame Rate]
is displayed.
0
:
Interval recording pause
STBYN
(displayed in
red)
:
Interval Rec recording
RRECN
f
g
OK Mark
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.
:
Frame Rec recording standby
Frame Rec recording
STBY M
Recording Format/Bit Rate (Enlarged Display
:
RRECM
Mode Only)
Displays the recording format and bit rate (only
when in the enlarged display mode).
:
Frame Rec recording pause
STBYM
(displayed in
yellow)
Memo :
0
The resolution, frame rate and bit rate can be
viewed on the status screen.
STOP
:
Unable to record to the card in
the slot
h
Event/Warning Display Area
P.OFF
Q
:
:
Power OFF
Displays error messages.
During clip cutter recording
(displayed for 3 seconds)
i
Dual Rec/ Backup Rec Display (Enlarged
Display Mode Only)
“DUAL” is displayed in the Dual Rec mode and
“BACKUP” is displayed in the Backup Rec
mode.
CALL
PGM
PVW
:
:
:
Receiving call signals from an
external device, such as a
remote control unit
Receiving program signals
from an external device, such
as a remote control unit
Memo :
0
Displayed only when in the enlarged display
Receiving preview signals
from an external device, such
as a remote control unit
mode.
Display Screen in Camera Mode
175
A
Voltage/Battery Power
Display Screen in Media
Mode
Displays the current status of the power supply
in use.
Memo :
When the display setting for [LCD/VF] B [Display
On/Off] is set to “Off”, the corresponding display is
hidden.
Even when the display screen is turned off and
0
[LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [Battery] is set to
“Off”, this will be displayed when there is a
warning.
Memo :
Display on the information display area can be
0
toggled using the [USER4] button.
B
C
D
Resolution
When the display screen is turned off, it will
appear only in the following cases.
0
Displays the video image resolution.
Frame Rate/Bit Rate
0
During event display or warning display
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
If “VF Display” is assigned to the [USER1(VF)]
button or [USER2(VF)] button of the viewfinder,
the corresponding button can also be used in the
Media mode.
0
Operation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
E
Audio Level Meter
P O
N
M L K
J
A
Displays the audio levels for CH-1 to CH-4.
0
1000/2000
282min
1920x1080
30p 50M
00:00:00.00
I
H
B
C
Jan 24,2018
12 :34 :56
.
D
E
F
Position Bar
Displays the current position in the video.
During trimming, the position bar appears in
green, and icons for the in and out points are
displayed.
F
G
.
:
:
Current position of the video
Position to start trimming
(In point)
6
7
:
Position to end trimming
(Out point)
8
Display Screen in Media Mode
176
G
I
Information Display
Network Connection Icon
Use the [USER4] button to switch between
camera information display, GPS display and
turning off the display.
USB connection or built-in wireless LAN
0
connection u v
0
Set [Network] B [Connection Setup] B
The GPS display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
0
0
[USB/Int. WLAN] to “On”. u v
0
In the case of connecting to an external
network, check the destination in
[Network] B [Connection Setup] B
[Default Gateway].
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
Icon
Status
Wireless LAN connection from the
host terminal (USB) is established
0dB
F1.6
.
1/100
Wired LAN connection from the
host terminal (USB) is established
5600K
USER4
.
Camera Information Display
Display Off
Cellular adapter connection from
the host terminal (USB) is
established
USER4
.
When a USB adapter different
from the connection settings is
detected
+35.483197
+139.652172
USER4
.
Built-in wireless LAN connection is
established
GPS Display
.
u v
.
When [USB/Int. WLAN] is set
to “Off”
0
Memo :
(No
Trimming information is displayed while
trimming is in progress. In this case, pressing the
[USER4] button does not switch the display.
The information display area is not subject to the
display settings of the items in [LCD/VF] B
[Display On/Off].
0
u v
display)
When an unusable USB
0
adapter is detected
0
Memo :
The icon appears blinking when the camera
recorder is starting up, and is displayed in yellow
while getting ready to connect.
0
H
Date/Time Display
Displays the date/time that is recorded on the
currently played recording media.
LAN terminal connection
0
Inthecaseofconnectingtoanexternalnetwork,
Memo :
check the destination in [Network] B
The date/time display style can be specified in
0
[Connection Setup] B [Default Gateway].
[System] B [Date Style]/[Time Style].
Icon
Status
LAN terminal connection is
established
.
(No
When the LAN cable is not
display) connected
Memo :
The icon appears blinking when the camera
0
recorder is starting up, and is displayed in yellow
while getting ready to connect.
Display Screen in Media Mode
177
J
Time Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data recorded in
the recording media being played back.
Example of time code display:
0
0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
*
.
*
Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot
(.) denotes drop frames.
Example of user’s bit display:
0
FF EE DD 20
.
Memo :
Use the [TC DISPLAY] switch to toggle between
0
the time code display and user’s bit display.
K
Media Status
PLAY
STILL
FWD *
:
:
:
Playing
Still picture playback mode
High-speed playback in the
forward direction (* playback
speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or 360x)
High-speed playback in the
reverse direction (* reverse
playback speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or
360x)
REV *
:
STOP
P.OFF
:
:
Stop mode
Power OFF
L
M
N
O
Check Mark
Displayed when the currently played clip is
selected.
OK Mark
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.
Clip Information
Displays current clip number/total number of
clips.
Media
0
Displays the media slot (W or Y) of the
currently played clip.
0
z appears when the write-protect switch of
the SD card is set.
P
Event/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
Display Screen in Media Mode
178
Record Format Screen
Status Screen
For checking the settings of the camera recorder.
For checking settings related to the recording
format.
USER Switch Set Screen
For checking the status (functions assigned) of the
user buttons.
.
Audio Input Screen
For checking settings related to audio input
channels and their input levels.
.
Camera Screen
For checking information related to shooting using
the camera recorder.
.
Audio Output Screen
For checking settings related to audio output
channels and their output levels.
.
LCD/VF Screen
For checking information related to the contents
displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screens.
.
.
Status Screen
179
Video Screen
For checking the settings related to video output.
Planning Metadata Screen
For checking the current planning metadata
setting.
.
.
Power Screen
For checking the power consumption.
Network Screen
For checking the network login information.
.
Memo :
.
[System] shows the power consumption of the
0
entire camera system (camera recorder +
connecting devices) while [Connected Devices]
shows the estimated power consumption of the
peripheral equipments such as lens and
wireless slots.
LAN Screen
For checking the network information for LAN
connection.
When the bar on the bar graph enters the red
zone, it indicates that the power consumption
has exceeded its rating. As this may result in
malfunction, do keep the power consumption
within the rating.
0
0
If [System] shows a value that exceeds the
rating, the power to the [LIGHT], [DC OUT] (rear)
and [DC OUT] (LAN) terminals is automatically
cut off. This is not a malfunction. Use peripheral
equipments with lower power consumption then
turn on the power of this camera recorder again.
.
Status Screen
180
USB/Int. WLAN Screen v v
Marker and Safety Zone
Displays (Camera Mode
Only)
USB Screen w x
For checking the network information for the USB
adapter and built-in wireless LAN connections.
The marker and safety zone displays are useful in
helping you determine the angle of view for the
image according to the shooting purpose.
The marker is displayed only in the Camera mode.
Displaying the Grid Marker
1
Set [LCD/VF] B [Marker Settings] B [Grid
Marker] to “On”.
.
A grid that divides the screen into 3x3 is
displayed.
Streaming Screen
For viewing information related to live streaming.
.
Memo :
.
When [Grid Marker] is set to “On”, [Aspect
0
Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do
not function.
Upload Screen
For checking the FTP transfer status during an
upload.
Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = “4:3”,
[Aspect Marker] = “Line+Halftone”, and [Center
Mark] = “On”
0
Safety Zone
Center Mark
.
Aspect Marker
.
Status Screen
181
Memo :
Adjusting the Gamma
You can turn On/Off the safety zone and center
0
mark displays using [LCD/VF] B [Marker
Settings] B [Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone], and
[Center Mark].
The gamma curve can be adjusted to various
characteristics when Color Space is set to a value
other than “HLG” and “J-Log1”.
Standard
:
Standard gamma curve based on
video standard.
Color Bar Output
Color bars can be output on this camera recorder.
Memo :
The adjustable level is 0.35 to 0.45
to 0.55 in steps of 0.01.
When the level is at 0.45, the
gamma curve becomes one that
conforms to the ITU709 standard.
Sets to a cinema-like gamma
curve.
The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
Cinema 1
Cinema 2
:
:
0
The level can be adjusted
extensively from -10 to 0 to +10.
Sets to a gamma curve with soft
expression giving priority to high
luminance gradation.
To output color bars, follow the setting procedure
below.
1
Set the [OUTPUT] switch to “BARS”.
The level can be adjusted
extensively from -10 to 0 to +10.
Color bars are output.
Gamma Variation
The typical characteristics are shown in the
following figure. The figure shows the
characteristics when “Standard”, “Cinema 1” or
“Cinema 2” is configured and [Knee Level] is set to
“95%” for the “Standard” or “Cinema 1” graph.
120
Cinema1
+10
100 STANDARD
0.45
Cinema2
-10
Cinema2
-5
80
60
Cinema2
0
Cinema2
+10
Cinema1
-10
STANDARD 0.45
Cinema2 NORMAL
Cinema2 -5
Cinema1
Cinema2 -10
Cinema2 +10
Cinema1 NORMAL
Cinema1 -10
Cinema1 +10
0
40
20
0
0
100
200
300
SCEAN(%)
400
500
600
.
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode Only)
182
HLG and J-Log1 Gamma
Adjusting Color Matrix
The gamma switches automatically to the
respective “HLG Gamma” and “J-Log1 Gamma”
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”.
The HLG Gamma becomes an ITU2100 HLG HDR
gamma. Output signals above 100 IRE can be
clipped by adjusting “White Clip”.
The color matrix of the camera recorder can be
adjusted to a color of the user’s preference.
When shooting is performed using multiple
cameras, the colors of the different cameras can
be adjusted, and a color of the user’s preference
can be set on this camera recorder.
0
0
The J-Log1 Gamma becomes a Log gamma with
dynamic range of max 800%.
Adjust the color on the vector scope and
0
waveform monitor using the DSC color chart.
120
100
*
The adjusted values of “Natural”, “Standard”,
“Cinema Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in
[Color Matrix] can be stored individually.
80
60
J-Log1
HLG
HLG
STANDARD0.45
+KNEE 95%
J-Log1
ITU709+KNEE
40
20
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
INPUT (%)
.
Adjusting the Gamma
183
Linear Matrix Adjustment
The Saturation, Hue and Lightness of the primary
and complementary colors (6 colors in total) can be
set individually.
3
Adjust Saturation.
0 Press the cross-shaped button (I) to move
the cursor to Saturation.
Each of the colors changes in the direction
indicated by the arrow on the vector scope.
0
1
Set [Camera Process] B [Color Matrix]/
[Adjust] B [Linear Adjust] to “On” and
select [Adjust].
0 Pressing the cross-shaped button (J) moves
the color outward from the center of the circle
on the vector scope.
Adjust Hue.
0 Pressing the cross-shaped button (K) moves
the color toward to the center of the circle on
the vector scope.
2
Select the color using the cross-shaped
button (JK) and confirm using the cross-
shaped button (I). (The cursor moves to
Hue.)
0
Red
Cyan
R
R
R
R
Mg
Mg
I
I
I
I
Y
0 Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)
rotates the hue in the clockwise direction on
the vector scope.
Y
B
B
B
B
B
G
G
G
G
G
Cy
Cy
0 Pressing the cross-shaped button (K)
rotates the hue in the anti-clockwise direction
on the vector scope.
Yellow
Blue
R
Mg
Mg
I
Y
Y
Red
Cyan
R
R
R
R
Mg
Mg
I
I
Cy
Cy
Y
Y
Y
Y
B
B
B
B
Green
Magenta
R
Mg
Mg
G
G
G
I
Cy
Cy
Y
YI
Yellow
Blue
R
Mg
B
Mg
I
I
G
Cy
Cy
Y
.
B
4
Adjust Lightness.
G
Cy
Cy
0 Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)
Green
Magenta
lightens; and pressing the cross-shaped
R
Mg
Mg
button (K) darkens.
I
I
0 Press the cross-shaped button (I) to return
Y
the cursor to Hue.
B
G
G
Cy
Cy
.
Adjusting Color Matrix
184
Multi-Matrix Adjustment
Multi-matrix adjustment is capable of advanced
configuration of the Saturation and Hue for 16
colors than linear adjustment.
Configuring Setup Files
The menu settings can be stored on an SD card by
saving them as a setup file.
Loading a saved setup file enables you to
reproduce the appropriate setup state speedily.
The following types of setup files are available.
1
Set [Camera Process] B [Color Matrix]/
[Adjust] B [Multi Adjust] to “On” and select
[Adjust].
o
Picture File:
Adjust Hue.
File that contains image creation settings in
accordance to the shooting conditions ([Camera
Process] menu items).
2
Select the color using the cross-shaped
button (J K) and confirm using the cross-
shaped button (I). (The cursor moves to
Hue.)
0
o
All File:
File that contains all menu settings, ranging from
video format settings to image creation settings
such as device settings and shooting
conditions, as well as the contents of the
[Favorites Menu]. Settings in Network Settings
are not saved.
0 Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)
rotates the hue in the clockwise direction on
the vector scope.
0 Pressing the cross-shaped button (K)
rotates the hue in the anti-clockwise direction
on the vector scope.
o
User File:
File that contains settings from All File that are
not included in the [Camera Process] menu
items.
3
Adjust Saturation.
0 Press the cross-shaped button (I) to move
the cursor to Saturation.
Memo :
0 Pressing the cross-shaped button (J) moves
the color outward from the center of the circle
on the vector scope.
Make use of the [Setup File] menu to save or
0
load a setup file.
The following operations can be performed on
the [Setup File] menu.
0
0 Pressing the cross-shaped button (K) moves
the color toward to the center of the circle on
the vector scope.
0
0
Even when [Record Format] B [System] is
configured to “HD EXT(SSD)”, setup files will be
saved to this camera recorder or the SD card.
0
R+
R
Mg-
R-
Mg
Number of Storable Setup Files
Yl+
Yl
G+
B-
B
SD slot A
SD slot B
:
:
[ W 1 ] to [ W 8 ]
[ Y 1 ] to [ Y 8 ]
Hue
Compatibility
o
User File/All File
Saturation
B+
Only User File/All File of the GY-HC900 series
can be loaded.
0
o
Picture File
CY-
Only Picture File of the GY-HC900 series can be
loaded.
G
G-
CY
Cy+
.
Adjusting Color Matrix
185
Saving Setup Files
6
Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
1
Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [System] B [Setup File] and press the
Set button (R).
2
3
Select [Store File] and press the Set button
(R).
5
Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
6
The existing files are displayed.
.
4
Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
7
Save the file.
A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
0
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and“Storing...” appears on the screen.
Store Picture File
<no file>
4
<no file>
<no file>
<no file>
<no file>
<no file>
Overwrite Picture File?
Overwrite
.
7
Cancel
Memo :
Files cannot be written in the following cases.
0
(Displayed in gray, selection disabled)
0
When the inserted SD card is not supported or
Load Picture File
.
not formatted. (File name appears as “---”.)
Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
0
0
When a write-protected SD card is inserted
(a z mark appears beside the SD card icon).
5
Name the file.
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
0
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Store File]/[Picture File] subname.
0
Memo :
When overwriting an existing file, the subname
0
of the existing file is displayed.
.
0 Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL/RESET] button to return to
the previous screen.
8
Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Configuring Setup Files
186
Loading a Setup File
Deleting Setup Files
1
1
Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [System] B [Setup File] and press the
Set button (R).
Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu] B [System] B [Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
2
3
2
3
Select [Load File] and press the Set button
Select [Delete File] and press the Set button
(R).
(R).
Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
The existing files are displayed.
4
4
Select the file to load using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
Select the file to delete using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
Load Picture File
Delete Picture File
4
CAM1
CAM2
4
.
.
Memo :
When the write-protect switch of the inserted SD
Memo :
0
card is set, a z mark appears beside the SD
card icon. Setup files can be loaded from an SD
card even if the write-protect switch is set.
Setup files that are completely incompatible will
not be displayed.
Setup File saved on the SD card cannot be
0
deleted.
0
5
Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the
screen.
5
Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the
screen.
Delete Picture File?
CAM1 :SUNSET
Delete
5
Load Picture File?
Cancel
Load
5
.
Cancel
6
Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
.
6
Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Configuring Setup Files
187
Connecting External
Monitor
To output live or playback video images and
audio sound to an external monitor, select the
output signals from the camera recorder, and
connect using an appropriate cable according to
the monitor to be used.
0
Choose the most suitable terminal according to
the monitor in use.
0
0
[HD/SD SDI OUT] terminal:
Outputs either the 3G-SDI/HD-SDI signal or SD-
SDI signal.
[VIDEO OUT] terminal:
0
0
Outputs composite video signals.
[HDMI] terminal:
Outputs HDMI signals.
Memo :
If the [HD/SD SDI OUT] terminal or [HDMI]
0
terminal is connected, configure the settings in
the [A/V Set] menu according to the monitor to
be connected.
SDI IN
HDMI
VIDEO IN
.
*
Select the output signal in [A/V Set] B [SDI
OUT1]/[SDI OUT2]/[HDMI OUT].
*
*
When [Record Format] B [System] is set to
“SD”, only SD-SDI signals are output.
To display the menu screen or display screen on
the external monitor, set [A/V Set] B [Video
Set] B [SDI OUT2] B [Character]/[HDMI OUT]
B [Character]/[VIDEO OUT] B [Character] to
“On”.
Connecting External Monitor
188
Connecting via SDI
Connecting a Remote
Control Unit
Digital video signals, together with embedded
(superimposed) audio signals and time code
signals, are output for both the 3G-SDI/HD-SDI
and SD-SDI signals.
0
The switch functions of the camera recorder can be
configured using the remote control unit.
Memo :
*
Remote control units supported: RM-LP25U,
RM-LP55U, RM-LP20G
The sampling frequency for embedded
0
(superimposed) audio signals is 48 kHz. Time
code of the built-in time generator as well as
playback time code are also output.
o
Attaching Core Filter Beforehand v
Before using the remote control unit, attach the
core filter (small) to the remote cable of the
remote control unit.
Setting the Aspect
For setting the mode to convert images with a
16:9 aspect ratio to display on a 4:3 aspect ratio
screen.
0
Release the
5 cm
Wind twice
stopper.
Set using [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SD
Aspect].
0
0
To be connected to the camera recorder. [Core filter (small)]
.
The available modes include “Side Cut”, “Letter”
(blackened at the top and bottom), and
“Squeeze” (full size, compressed at the left and
right).
1
Connect the remote control unit to the
camera recorder.
Connect the remote cable of the remote control
unit to the [REMOTE] terminal.
Memo :
When [Record Format]
B
[System] is set to “SD”,
0
and [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item cannot be
selected.
When [Record Format] B [System] is set to
“SD”, and [SD Aspect] is set to “16:9”, “Side
Cut” in [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SD Aspect]
cannot be selected.
0
REMOTE
Connect to the
Remote Control
Unit
.
Caution :
Turn off the power of the camera recorder when
0
connecting a remote control unit.
2
Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
3
Set the operate switch of the remote control
unit to ON.
Precautions on Using the Remote Control Unit
When the switches of the camera recorder and
remote control unit are operated at the same
time, the switch operation of the remote control
unit takes priority over that of the camera
recorder.
0
Focus and zoom operations cannot be
performed using the remote control unit.
The shutter speed may vary slightly from the
value displayed on the camera recorder.
While the camera recorder is in the Media mode,
the Auto White Balance feature does not
function even if you operate it from the remote
control unit.
0
0
0
Connecting External Monitor
189
Connecting the
Headphone
Combinations of
[MONI SELECT]
and [CH SELECT]
Switches
Channels
to
Description
Monitor
CH1
The audio input to
[CH1] is output.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CH2
The audio input to
[CH2] is output.
CH1/CH2 The audio inputs
to [CH1] and
.
Audio output from the [PHONE] terminal can be
selected using [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B
[PHONE Output] and the combination of the
[MONI SELECT] and [CH SELECT] switches.
0
0
[CH2] are output.
The outputs from the [PHONE] terminal and
monitor speaker are as follows according to the
different combinations of settings.
CH3
CH4
The audio input to
[CH3] is output.
[MONI
[PHONE]
Terminal
[PHONE
Output]
Setting
SELECT]
Switch
Speaker
L
R
Setting
[CH1/
-
CH1
CH1
CH1+CH2
CH2
CH3]
The audio input to
[CH4] is output.
Mix
Stereo
CH1+CH2
CH1 CH2
[BOTH]
[CH2/
CH4]
-
CH2
1
2
Connect the headphone.
CH3/CH4 The audio inputs
to [CH3] and
Select the channels to monitor using the
different combinations of the [MONI
SELECT] and [MONI SELECT] switches.
[CH4] are output.
3
Use the [MONITOR] adjustment knob to
adjust the monitor volume.
Memo :
There is no sound output from the speaker when
0
the headphone is connected.
Connecting the Headphone
190
Inputting External
Synchronizing Signals
(Genlock)
1
2
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode.
Set [Genlock Input] to “GENLOCK”.
Set [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [Genlock Input] to
“GENLOCK”.
A [GENLOCK] terminal is available on the side
0
of the camera recorder.
Memo :
0
You can input synchronizing signals from
FS-790 (sold separately) or FS-900 (sold
separately) that is connected to the accessory
connection terminal (68 pins) on the rear of the
camera recorder.
0
Set to “Adapter” to input synchronizing signal
from the accessory connection terminal (68
pins) on the rear of this unit.
3
When in the standby or stop mode, input
synchronizing signals from the SYNC
signal generator to the [GENLOCK]
terminal.
SDI signals (digital signals) can be input from the
[HD/SD SDI IN] terminal.
0
0
Input external synchronizing signals from the
[GENLOCK] terminal and [HD/SD SDI IN]
terminal, and synchronize the camera video with
the external signal.
When the camera recorder’s video is locking
to the external synchronizing signal, “Sync
Locking” appears on the screen.
0
0
0
Input external synchronizing signals from the
[GENLOCK] terminal, and synchronize the
camera video with the external signal.
The H (Horizontal) Phase of the camera
recorder’s video signals can be adjusted with
respect to the external synchronizing signals on
the [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [Genlock Adjust]
screen.
0
0
After locking to the external synchronizing
signal is complete, the display disappears
and recording can be performed.
If there is genlock signal input but the signal
format is not supported, “Invalid Sync” is
displayed.
Memo :
0
If the frame rate in [WFrame & Bit Rate]/
[YFrame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Format]
menu is set to “60p”, “60i” or “30p”, 59.94 Hz
synchronizing signals (vertical synchronization)
are input.
Memo :
ThegenlockfeatureisonlyusableintheCamera
0
mode.
50 Hz/60 Hz synchronizing signals are not
synchronized.
Genlock Signal Settings
0
If the frame rate of [WFrame & Bit Rate]/
[YFrame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Format]
menu is set to “50p”, “50i”, or “25p”, 50 Hz
synchronizing signals (vertical synchronization)
are input.
For analog signal input
o Synchronizing signal used
SD synchronizing BB (Black Burst) signal
:
signal
Supports SMPTE170M
(RS-170A)-NTSC
59.94 Hz/60 Hz synchronizing signals are not
synchronized.
Supports ITU-R BT.470-6 PAL
HD synchronizing HDTV tri-level synchronizing
:
signal
signal
Do not connect or disconnect the input cable for
the synchronizing signals during recording or
playback
0
0
0
0
Supports SMPTE ST296-
HD720p
Supports SMPTE ST274-
HD1080i
If the power is turned on during input of external
synchronizing signals, vertical oscillation may
occur. This is not a malfunction.
Signals such as VTR playback signals with
jitters may not be synchronized on this camera
recorder.
Only H (Horizontal) and V (Vertical) genlock
functions are available on this camera recorder.
It does not come with a lock function for SC (sub-
carrier). Color flash may occur during switching
such as when composite signals are used by a
switcher.
GENLOCK
External Synchronizing Signal
SYNC Signal
Generator
External Synchronizing Signal
Video
Equipment
.
Inputting External Synchronizing Signals (Genlock)
191
o Phase Items to Synchronize
1
2
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode.
The phase items to be synchronized may vary
depending on the input synchronizing signal and
output video signal.
Set [Genlock Input] to “SDI IN”.
Set [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [Genlock Input] to
“SDI IN”.
Input Synchronizing
Signal
Output Video Signal
BB
Tri-sync
720p 1080i
Memo :
0
VIDEO
SDI
Composite H, V, F
V
V
H, V
V, F
V, F
V
Set to “Adapter” to input synchronizing signal
SD-SDI
H, V, F
V
from the accessory connection terminal (68
pins) on the rear of this unit.
HD-SDI
720p
HD-SDI
1080i
V, F
V
H, V, F
3
When in the standby or stop mode, input
synchronizing signals from the SDI signal
generator to the [HD/SD SDI IN] terminal.
H
V
F
Horizontal Phase
Vertical Phase
Field Phase
:
:
:
When the camera recorder’s video is locking
to the external synchronizing signal, “Sync
Locking” appears on the screen.
0
0
0
After locking to the external synchronizing
signal is complete, the display disappears
and recording can be performed.
For digital signals (SDI) input
Input external synchronizing signals from the
[HD/SD SDI IN] terminal, and synchronize the
camera video or playback image with the external
signal.
If there is genlock signal input but the signal
format is not supported, “Invalid Sync” is
displayed.
Input external synchronizing signals from the
[HD/SD SDI IN] terminal, and synchronize the
camera video with the external signal.
Memo :
0
If the frame rate in [WFrame & Bit Rate]/
[YFrame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Format]
menu is set to “60p”, “60i” or “30p”, 59.94 Hz
synchronizing signals (vertical synchronization)
are input.
o Synchronizing signal used
SD synchronizing Supports SMPTE259M
:
signal
HD synchronizing Supports SMPTE ST296
:
signal
50 Hz/60 Hz synchronizing signals are not
synchronized.
3G-SDI
Supports SMPTE ST424
:
synchronizing
signal
0
If the frame rate of [WFrame & Bit Rate]/
[YFrame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Format]
menu is set to “50p”, “50i”, or “25p”, 50 Hz
synchronizing signals (vertical synchronization)
are input.
+'ꢀ6'ꢁ6',ꢁ,1
59.94 Hz/60 Hz synchronizing signals are not
synchronized.
External Synchronizing Signal
SYNC Signal
Do not connect or disconnect the input cable for
the synchronizing signals during recording or
playback
0
0
0
0
Generator
.
If the power is turned on during input of external
synchronizing signals, vertical oscillation may
occur. This is not a malfunction.
Signals such as VTR playback signals with
jitters may not be synchronized on this camera
recorder.
Only H (Horizontal) and V (Vertical) genlock
functions are available on this camera recorder.
It does not come with a lock function for SC (sub-
carrier). Color flash may occur during switching
such as when composite signals are used by a
switcher.
Inputting External Synchronizing Signals (Genlock)
192
o Phase Items to Synchronize
Displaying Return Videos
from an External Device
Return video from an external device (switcher,
etc.) can be displayed on the viewfinder or LCD
monitor of the camera recorder.
The phase items to be synchronized may vary
depending on the input synchronizing signal and
output video signal.
Input Synchronizing
Signal
HD-SDI
Output Video Signal
3G-
SDI
SD-
SDI
720p 1080i
Memo :
H, V,
VIDEO
SDI
Composite
SD-SDI
V
V
V, F
V, F
V
F
This feature is only usable in the Camera mode.
0
H, V,
F
V
V
1
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode.
HD-SDI
V
H, V
V
720p
HD-SDI
1080i
H, V,
F
2
3
Assign the “Return Video” function to any
V
V
-
V, F
-
of the user buttons.
3G-SDI
H, V
-
1080p
Configure the input destination of the
Adjusting H Phase
return video to “SDI”.
1
2
Select [Genlock Adjust] in the [A/V Set]
To specify the input destination of the return
video, configure [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B
[Return Input] to “SDI”.
menu.
Adjust the [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B Genlock
Adjust item as follows.
[SD-SDI H Phase]
[HD-SDI H Phase]
:
:
Adjusts the H Phase
of the SD SDI signal.
Adjusts the H Phase
of the HD SDI signal.
Memo :
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
0
Format] B [System] is configured to “HD(SDI
In)” or “SD(SDI In)”, “---” is displayed and the
setting cannot be configured.
Select a value using the cross-shaped
buttons (JK).
The H Phase of the camera recorder’s video
signal is adjusted with respect to the external
synchronizing signal input from the
[GENLOCK] terminal.
0
4
Select the aspect ratio of the return video.
Set using [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [Return
Aspect].
Memo :
0
5
6
Select the way the return video is to be
Adjustment cannot be made while recording or
displayed.
playback is in progress.
The video image may be disrupted momentarily
during adjustment. This is not a malfunction.
Select in [Camera Function] B [User Switch
Set] B [Return Video]. The camera will operate
according to the setting.
0
Press the user button that is assigned with
the “Return Video” function.
By pressing the user button assigned with the
“Return Video” function, the captured image
or return video is displayed according to the
0
method specified in step 5.
Memo :
Compatible input formats for the return video are
0
as follows.
0
1920x1080/60p, 60i, 50p, 50i
0
0
0
1280x720/60p, 50p
720x480/60i (U model)
720x576/50i (E model)
Inputting External Synchronizing Signals (Genlock)
193
Editing Metadata
Functions of Network
Connection
The network feature comprises web-browser-
based functions using devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, as well as FTP
and live streaming functions that run via thumbnail
screens and menu operation.
Planning Metadata
0
You can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s metadata via a web browser on
devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
or PC, and edit the metadata that is to be applied
to clips to be recorded.
Clip Metadata
0
You can access the page for editing the
metadata via a web browser on devices such as
a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
display or rewrite the metadata that is recorded
to a clip.
Memo :
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is set to “High-Speed”, only
“Planning Metadata” can be used for the [LAN]
terminal connection.
0
View Remote
Connecting to the Network
You can access via a web browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check
the live image or remotely control the camera.
[LAN] Terminal
0
0
0
Built-in Wireless LAN u v
Connect the following adapters to the [HOST]
terminal (USB)
0
Wireless LAN adapter
0
Ethernet adapter
Camera Control
0
Cellular adapter
You can access via a web browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to remotely
control the camera.
List of Functions
Importing Metadata
Live streaming
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format) from the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
By combining with the decoder or PC application
that supports live streaming, you can perform audio
and video streaming via the network.
Uploading Recorded Clips
Broadcast Overlay
You can upload clips recorded in the SD card to a
preset FTP server.
Texts, images and watermark can be overlaid onto
recorded video and live stream video. In addition,
changes such as changing the image are possible
with the SDP Generator app.
Memo :
Uploading can also be performed via a web
0
browser.
Functions of Network Connection
194
Preparing Network
Connection
Caution :
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
0
Format] B [System] is configured to “High-
Speed”, network cannot be used via wireless
LAN u v or the [HOST] terminal (USB).
Configure as follows in this case.
Operating Environment
Operation has been verified for the following
0
environments.
Set [Network] B [Connection Setup] B [USB/
Computer
Int. WLAN] to “Off”. u v
OS: Windows 10
0
0
Unplug the USB network adapter
Web browser: Chrome
OS: macOS 10.13
Note that camera operation will come to an
emergency stop and the power will turn off if the
above steps are not performed.
0
Web browser: Safari 10
Smartphone/Tablet Terminal
File data may be damaged if this happens while
recording is in progress.
OS: iOS11 (iPhone X/iPad Pro)
Web browser: Safari 11
OS: Android 6 (Smartphone)
Web browser: Chrome
0
0
0
Connecting to Network via [LAN]
Terminal
OS: Android 7 (Tablet)
Web browser: Chrome
You can connect a device such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC directly to the camera
recorder using a cross cable to access the camera
recorder’s web functions. Alternatively, you can
also connect using an Ethernet hub.
Camera Setup for Network Connection
1
Connect using the corresponding method
of connection
[LAN] Terminal
0
1
Configure the connection settings with
[Wizard].
Connect a PC to this camera recorder directly
using a cross-over cable or via devices such
as an Ethernet hub using a LAN cable.
Select “LAN” in [Network] B [Connection
Setup] B [Wizard], and configure the settings
according to the instructions on the screen.
Perform setting for the following.
0
0
Built-in Wireless LAN u v
Attach the wireless LAN antenna if it is not
mounted.
0
IP address setting (DHCP or manual)
0
IP Address
0
Subnet mask
0
Default gateway
0
DNS Server
Memo :
When an address is manually assigned in a NAT
environment, it is also necessary to set the
default gateway correctly besides conversion of
the address at the router’s end in order to
perform operations such as access to the
Internet from an external network via the router.
0
Connect the following adapters to the
[HOST] terminal (USB)
0
0
Wireless LAN adapter
0
Ethernet adapter
0
Cellular adapter
2
Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
Memo :
Only a network connection adapter can be
0
Memo :
connected to the [HOST] terminal (USB).
Connect or disconnect an adapter only after you
have turned off the power of the camera
recorder.
0
After setting is complete, the following items will
0
be automatically configured.
0
The [Network] B [Connection Setup] B
You can find the latest information on the
compatible adapters at the product page of our
website.
0
0
[Default Gateway] setting changes to “LAN”.
0
The [Network] B [Live Streaming] B
[Interface] setting changes to “LAN”.
Two types of network coverage (WAN and LAN)
are available for each application.
Preparing Network Connection
195
Connecting to Network via [HOST]
Terminal (USB)
o
USB wired LAN connection
0
IP address setting (DHCP or manual)
0
IP Address
1
Configure the connection settings with
[Wizard].
0
Subnet mask
0
Default gateway
Select “USB” in [Network] B [Connection
Setup] B [Wizard], and configure the settings
according to the instructions on the screen.
0
0
DNS Server
Memo :
When an address is manually assigned in a NAT
0
Configure the settings for the following
according to the type of connection.
environment, it is also necessary to set the
default gateway correctly besides conversion of
the address at the router’s end in order to
perform operations such as access to the
Internet from an external network via the router.
o
USB wireless LAN connection
0
Mode of connection
0
Configuration method
*
For P2P connections, it is necessary to
configure the [Default Gateway] and
[Passphrase] according to the steps below
after the above settings are configured.
o
USB cellular adapter connection
0
Connection phone number
0
Username
0
Password
A Configure [Network] B [Connection
Setup] B [Default Gateway] to “USB/Int.
WLAN” u v or “USB” w x
Caution :
You can access the web functions via a web
0
browser on devices such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC only in a LAN environment.
Note that you may have to pay very high bills in
the case of pay-per-use contracts. Fixed price
contract is recommended if you are using the
network function.
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
B
mode, and display the status screen
([USB/Int. WLAN] screen u v or
[USB] screen w x).
0
Press the [STATUS/SET] button on the
camera recorder to display the status
screen.
0
Note that the use of improper settings may result
in expensive bills from the phone service
provider. Make sure that the setting is correct.
To avoid expensive bills due to the roaming
connection, you are recommended to use this
function by disabling the roaming contract.
There may be communication even when you
are not using the network function. Remove the
cellular adapter when the function is not in use.
0
0
0
Press the cross-shaped button (H I) to
display the [USB/Int. WLAN] screen u
v or [USB] screen w x.
Check to ensure that the [SSID] and
[Passphrase] that you have set in the
wizard are displayed.
0
Select an SSID from the list of access
points (smartphone, tablet terminal, PC,
etc.) and enter a passphrase.
C
2
Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
Display the list of access points in the
wireless connection settings of the
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
select “HC900-****”. (**** are numbers
that vary with the device used.)
0
Memo :
After setting is complete, the following items will
0
be automatically configured.
0
The [Network] B [Connection Setup] B [USB/
After the password confirmation screen
appears, enter the [Passphrase]
0
Int. WLAN] setting changes to “On”. u
v
displayed on the [USB/Int. WLAN] screen
u v or [USB] screen w x.
0
The setting of [Network] B [Connection
Setup] B [Default Gateway] changes to
“USB/Int. WLAN” u v or “USB” w
x. However, this does not apply to the
P2P connection.
0
The setting of [Network] B [Live Streaming]
B [Interface] changes to “USB/Int. WLAN”
u v or “USB” w x.
Preparing Network Connection
196
Connecting to Network via Built-in
2
Setting is complete.
Wireless LAN u v
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
1
Configure the connection settings with
[Wizard].
Memo :
0
After setting is complete, the following items will
Select “USB/Int. WLAN” in [Network] B
[Connection Setup] B [Wizard], and
configure the settings according to the
instructions on the screen.
0
be automatically configured.
0
The [Network] B [Connection Setup] B [USB/
Int. WLAN] setting changes to “On”.
0
The [Network] B [Connection Setup] B
Perform setting for the following.
0
0
[Default Gateway] setting changes to “USB/
Int. WLAN”. However, this does not apply to
the P2P connection.
Mode of connection
Configuration method
*
For P2P connections, it is necessary to
configure the [Default Gateway] and
[Passphrase] according to the steps below
after the above settings are configured.
0
The [Network] B [Live Streaming] B
[Interface] setting changes to “USB/Int.
WLAN”.
A Set [Network] B [Connection Setup] B
[Default Gateway] to “USB/Int. WLAN”.
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
B
mode, and display the [USB/Int. WLAN]
(status) screen.
Press the [STATUS/SET] button on the
camera recorder to display the status
screen. Press the cross-shaped button
(H I) to display the [USB/Int. WLAN]
screen.
0
0
Check to ensure that the [SSID] and
[Passphrase] that you have set in the
wizard are displayed.
Select an SSID from the list of access
points (smartphone, tablet terminal, PC,
etc.) and enter a passphrase.
C
Display the list of access points in the
wireless connection settings of the
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
select “HC900-****”. (**** are numbers
that vary with the device used.)
After the password confirmation screen
appears, enter the [Passphrase]
displayed on the [USB/Int. WLAN]
screen.
0
0
Preparing Network Connection
197
Configuring the Server for Downloading
Importing Metadata
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP server for downloading the metadata (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
path of the file to download.
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format) from the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
The imported metadata is applied to clips to be
recorded.
1
Open the [Metadata Server] screen.
Open the [Network] B [Metadata Server]
screen.
Preparing Metadata
You can record the four metadata types below.
0
Metadata Server
Title1
:
ASCII only, max. 63 characters
(bytes)
Meta-FTP1...
Meta-FTP2...
Meta-FTP3...
Meta-FTP4...
Title2
:
:
:
UNICODE, max. 127 bytes
UNICODE, max. 127 bytes
UNICODE, max. 2047 bytes
Creator
Description
Metadata makes use of the XML description
0
0
format.
Edit the
<Title1><Title2><Description><Creator> tag
element using the XML editor. (Indicated by the
frames below)
.
2
Register the [Metadata Server].
Select a server using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The server settings screen appears. Perform
setting for each item.
0
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<NRT-MetaInterface lastUpdate="2015-01-29T18:06:21+09:00"
xmlns="urn:schemas-proHD:nonRealTimeMetaInterface:ver.1.00"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<MetaData>
Up to 4 settings can be registered.
0
<Title1>Title1 sample</Title1>
<!-- only "en",max63bytes -->
<Title2>Title2 sample</Title2>
<!-- ,max127bytes -->
<Description>Description sample</Description>
<!-- ,max2047bytes -->
Metadata Server Set
Alias
Protocol
Server
Port
File Path
Username
<Creator>Creator sample</Creator>
<!-- ,max127bytes -->
</MetaData>
</NRT-MetaInterface>
.
.
Memo :
For details on the registered information, please
0
consult the network administrator for the server.
Importing Metadata
198
Importing Metadata
3
Select [Import] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Import starts.
Download the metadata settings file (XML format)
from the FTP server.
After import is complete, the display is restored
to the screen before the [Import Metadata]
screen appears.
1
Select [Network] B [Import Metadata] and
press the Set button (R).
The [Import Metadata] screen appears.
Import Metadata
Import Metadata?
Import
Cancel
3
.
2
Select the server for importing the
metadata.
The name that is registered in [Metadata
Server] B [Alias] is displayed.
0
Importing...
Select a server using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
0
.
Import Metadata
Memo :
2
You cannot exit the menu or perform recording
0
while import is in progress.
If import of the metadata failed, “Import Error!” is
displayed, and a message indicating the cause
of the error appears.
0
Press the Set button (R) to return to the [Import
Metadata] screen in step 1.
.
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
0
0
If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
Importing Metadata
199
Uploading Clips Automatically (Auto
FTP)
The following are steps to automatically upload
clips recorded in a recording media to a preset FTP
server.
Uploading a Recorded
Video Clip
The following are steps to upload clips recorded in
a recording media to a preset FTP server.
1
Configure the settings for automatic
upload.
Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP server to upload recorded clips to (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
directory of the upload destination.
Configure [Network] B [Upload Settings] B
[Upload] to “Auto” and configure the settings for
each of [Slot], [Cellular] and [Server].
1
Open the [Clip Server] screen.
Open the [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Clip
Server] screen.
Clip Server
.
2
Start uploading.
Configuring [Network] B [Upload Settings] B
[Auto Upload] to “On” starts uploading.
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Auto Upload”.
0
0
.
Memo :
2
Register the [Clip Server].
FTP transfer is performed for the slot configured
0
Register the server to upload recorded clips in
the recording media to.
in [Slot].
If recording is started for the same slot as the
one configured in [Slot] while FTP transfer is in
progress, FTP transfer will be interrupted.
FTP transfer is not performed while live
streaming or Return over IP is in progress.
FTP transfer is disabled when [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
configured to “High-Speed”. To perform FTP
transfer, select a setting other than “High-
Speed”.
0
Up to 4 servers can be registered.
Memo :
0
0
0
For details on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
While automatic upload is in progress, you can
view the FTP transfer status on the Status
screen.
0
0
To play back a recorded clip while automatic
upload is in progress, you can do so by switching
to Media mode, followed by pausing the upload
and selecting the clip to play back from the
thumbnail display. Switching to Camera mode
resumes automatic upload in the background.
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
200
Automatic Chunked Upload to FTP
Server
Uploading Clips Manually (Manual FTP)
The following are steps to upload clips recorded in
a recording media to a preset FTP server.
All playable clips on the thumbnail screen can be
uploaded.
Automatically splits the clips and uploads them to
the FTP server during recording at the
preconfigured time for proxy recording in Slot B
when [System] is configured to “HD+Web”.
1
Configure the FTP server for manual
uploading.
1
Configure the time to split the clips for
automatic chunked upload
Set [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Upload]
to “Manual”.
Configure the time in [Network] B [Upload
Settings] B [Auto Upload] B [Division] for
starting automatic upload while recording is in
progress.
2
Register the [Clip Server].
Open the [Network] B [Upload Settings] B
[Clip Server] screen.
0
Memo :
[Slot] is fixed at “B”.
Register the server to upload recorded clips
in the recording media to.
0
0
Up to 4 servers can be registered.
Memo :
For details on the registered information, please
0
consult the network administrator for the server.
When [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Upload]
is configured to “Auto”, manual uploading is also
disabled for slots other than the selected “Slot”.
To perform manual uploading, select “Manual”.
FTP transfer is disabled when [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
configured to “High-Speed”. To perform FTP
transfer, select a setting other than “High-
Speed”.
0
0
Uploading a Video Clip
1
Set the camera recorder to the Media mode.
Press and hold the [CAM/MEDIA] selection
button in the Camera mode to enter the
Media mode. A thumbnail screen of the clips
recorded on the SD card is displayed.
You can upload the selected clips on the
thumbnail screen to the FTP server.
0
0
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
201
2
5
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded.
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
Upload is complete.
After upload is complete, “Successfully
Completed.” appears on the screen.
0
0 Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
2
FTP Upload
Successfully Completed.
.
Exit
5
3
Press the [USER4] button.
.
The action selection screen is displayed.
Selecting and Uploading Multiple Clips
To select and upload multiple clips, refer to
This Clip
Selected Clips
All Clips
3
Uploading All Video Clips
1
Press the [USER4] button.
.
The action selection screen is displayed.
4
Select [FTP Upload] B [This Clip] B server
to upload to, and press the Set button (R).
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
2
Upload the clips.
Select [FTP Upload...] B [All Clips] B server to
upload to, and press the Set button (R).
FTP Upload
This Clip
Selected Clips
All Clips
2
Stop
Upload in Background
.
.
3
Upload starts.
Memo :
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
The name for the server to upload files to are
0
indicated using the preset names in [Clip
Server] B [Alias].
FTP Upload
0 To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
Stop
Upload in Background
.
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
202
4
Upload is complete.
Memo :
After all clips are uploaded successfully,
“Successfully Completed.” is displayed.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
0
0 To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
When clips are not uploaded successfully,
the following errors are displayed.
0
If the file to be uploaded has the same name as
an existing file in the FTP server, an overwrite
confirmation window appears.
0
FTP Upload
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
the overwrite confirmation window will not be
displayed and the existing file is overwritten.
Even after upload has started (FTP transfer in
0
Failed.
Internal Error.
Exit
Cause of
Error
0
0
progress) in step 3, pressing the [CAM/MEDIA]
button switches the camera recorder to the
Camera mode, allowing you to start shooting.
If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
.
Memo :
If there is an error message or other notifications
0
when you switched to the Camera mode while
FTP upload is in progress, a 5 icon (yellow) will
appear in the remaining media space display
area in the Camera mode.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
0
Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with
You can press the [CAM/MEDIA] button to
switch to the Media mode and display the above
error screen.
each public key and certificate.
0
For details of the fingerprint, please consult
the administrator of the server to be
connected.
to clear the error message.
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
0
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
203
FTP Resume Feature
Connecting from a Web
Browser
When FTP transfer starts and there is a file of the
same name on the server with a file size smaller
than the file to be transferred, the file on the server
will be regarded as an interrupted file during a FTP
transfer. A confirmation screen to resume transfer
(append writing) appears.
You can access the web functions of this camera
recorder via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Make the necessary preparations for connection in
advance.
1
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, and display the status screen
([LAN] or [USB/Int. WLAN] screen u v
or [USB] screen w x).
Press the [STATUS/SET] button on the
camera recorder to display the status screen.
Press the cross-shaped button (HI) to
display the [LAN] or [USB/Int. WLAN] screen
u v, or [USB] screen w x.
Check the displayed [IP Address].
0
.
If “Resume” is selected, FTP transfer is carried out
such that it appends from the position where it was
interrupted.
0
2
Start up the web browser on the terminal
you wish to connect to the camera
recorder, and enter the [IP Address] in the
address field.
When FTP transfer ends normally, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
Memo :
(Example: 192.168.0.10)
FTP server equipped with resume function is
0
If “192.168.0.10” is displayed in [IP Address],
enter “http://192.168.0.10”.
required.
If [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Clip Server]
B [Clip-FTP1/2/3/4] B [Protocol] is set to
“SFTP”, the resume function is disabled.
If “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP Proxy]
screen of the network connection setting, the
resume function is disabled.
0
0
http://192.168.0.10
.
3
Enter the user name and password.
Enter the user name and the password on the
login screen to display the main page of the
camera.
Check the [Web Username] and [Web
Password] in the [Network] screen (status
screen).
0
Memo :
The user name and password can be changed
0
in [Network] B [Web] B [Username] and
[Password].
FTP Resume Feature
204
Editing Metadata
You can create the metadata to be inserted into a
recorded file, or rewrite the metadata of a recorded
clip.
3
Edit the metadata.
Enter information for the necessary fields.
A
B
After input is complete, tap (click) [Save] to
overwrite the metadata.
Planning Metadata
You can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s metadata via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
edit the metadata that is to be applied to clips to be
recorded.
A
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
B
.
4
Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Update of the [Planning Metadata] starts.
After update is complete, “Renewal of
planning metadata is succeeded.” is
displayed. Tap (click) [OK].
0
0
2
Tap (click) the [Planning Metadata] tab to
open the [Planning Metadata] screen.
2
0
Returns to the screen in step 3.
Renewal of planning metadata is
succeeded.
OK
4
.
Memo :
If update failed, “Renewal of planning metadata
0
is failed.” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
.
3.
Editing Metadata
205
Clip Metadata
o
Switching from a web browser
You can access the page for editing the metadata
You will see a message indicating “It is
A
via a web browser on devices such as a
necessary to change the camera mode to
"Remote Edit Mode". Change the mode.”
on the web browser.
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and display or
rewrite the metadata that is recorded to a clip.
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
It is necessary to change the camera
mode to "Remote Edit Mode".
Change the mode.
A
2
Display the clip list.
Tap (click) the [Clip List] tab to display the clip
list.
Cancel
Change
B
.
Tap (click) [Change] to switch the camera
to the Remote Edit mode.
B
2
Remote Edit Mode
Exit
.
o
Switching from the camera
“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is
A
displayed on the display screen of the
camera unit.
Select [Change] and press the Set button
(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.
B
.
3
Set the camera recorder to the “Remote
Edit Mode”.
You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode” from a
web browser or through operation of the
camera.
Change to
A
B
Remote Edit Mode?
Change
Cancel
Remote Edit Mode
Exit
.
Editing Metadata
206
6
Edit the metadata of the selected clips.
Edit the information for the necessary fields.
Memo :
A
When the menu or status is displayed, display
0
0
0
of the confirmation screen will be put on hold.
If the menu is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the menu.
If you are using a PC, input using the mouse
0
and keyboard.
If you are using a smartphone or tablet
terminal, tap the text input area to display a
standard software keyboard on the screen.
Enter the information using the displayed
keyboard.
0
If the status is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the status display.
0 Pressing the Set button (R) on the camera
recorder while in the Remote Edit Mode ends
the Remote Edit Mode forcibly and switches to
the Camera mode.
You can tap (click) [OK Mark] to add an OK mark
B
C
to or delete it from selected clips.
When FTP upload via the camera unit is
currently in progress, switching to the Remote
Edit mode is disabled.
0
After editing is complete, tap (click) [Save] to
overwrite the metadata.
A B
4
Select the Metadata Edit mode.
Select the [Metadata] tab.
5
Select the clip to rewrite the metadata.
A list of the recorded clips appears on the
[Clip List] screen.
0
Tap (click) the clip for which you want to
rewrite the metadata.
0
4
C
.
5
.
Memo :
You can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot
0
A] and [Slot B] tabs.
0 You can use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to
the previous or next 30 clips on the list.
Editing Metadata
207
7
Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Update of the metadata starts.
After update is complete, “Renewal of clip
metadata is succeeded.” is displayed. Tap
(click) [OK].
0
0
0
Returns to the screen in step 4.
Renewal of clip metadata is
succeeded.
OK
7
.
Memo :
If update failed, “Renewal of clip metadata is
0
failed.” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
4.
Editing Metadata
208
Uploading a Recording
Clip via a Web Browser
o
Switching from a web browser
You will see a message indicating “It is
A
necessary to change the camera mode
to "Remote Edit Mode". Change the
mode.” on the web browser.
Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset
FTP server.
0
You can upload selected clips, all clips, or those
appended with an OK mark.
0
It is necessary to change the camera
mode to "Remote Edit Mode".
Change the mode.
A
Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading
Cancel
Change
B
.
Tap (click) [Change] to switch the
camera to the Remote Edit mode.
B
Uploading Video Clips
1
2
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Remote Edit Mode
Exit
Display the clip list.
Tap (click) the [Clip List] tab to display the clip
list.
.
o
Switching from the camera
2
“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is
A
displayed on the display screen of the
camera unit.
Select [Change] and press the Set button
(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.
B
Change to
A
B
Remote Edit Mode?
Change
Cancel
.
3
Set the camera recorder to the “Remote
Edit Mode”.
Remote Edit Mode
Exit
You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode” from a
web browser or through operation of the
camera.
.
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
209
7
Select a method to upload the clips.
Memo :
When the menu or status is displayed,
0
display of the confirmation screen will
be put on hold.
A
B
C
D
If the menu is displayed on the camera
recorder, close the menu.
0
0
If the status is displayed on the camera
recorder, close the status display.
0 Pressing the Set button (R) on the
camera recorder while in the Remote
Edit Mode ends the Remote Edit Mode
forcibly and switches to the Camera
mode.
When FTP upload via the camera unit
is currently in progress, switching to the
Remote Edit mode is disabled.
0
4
5
Select the Upload mode.
Select the [Upload] tab.
.
Select the clip you want to upload.
Upload all clips
A
A list of the recorded clips appears on the
[Clip List] screen.
0
0
0
Uploads all the clips in the displayed slots.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
Tap (click) the clip you want to upload to
select it.
Clips being selected are indicated by a check
Upload OK clips
B
mark.
Uploads all clips in the displayed slots that
are appended with an OK mark.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
Memo :
You can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot
0
A] and [Slot B] tabs.
0 You can use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to
Upload selected clips
C
the previous or next 30 clips on the list.
Uploads the clips you have selected.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
6
Select the upload operation.
Tap (click) the [Actions] button.
Clear all selection
D
Clears all clip selection and returns to the
4
6
[Clip List] screen.
5
.
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
210
8
Select the clip server and start uploading.
Memo :
Upon selecting the server to upoload clips to,
an upload screen appears.
0
To stop transfer, tap (click) the [Stop] button.
0
Tapping (clicking) [Yes] on the confirmation
screen stops the transfer halfway and brings you
back to the main page.
If there already exists a file on the FTP server
with a name identical to the file to be transferred,
a confirmation screen asking to overwrite the file
will appear.
0
8
However, if “HTTP” is selected in the [Select
FTP Proxy] screen of the network connection
settings, an overwrite confirmation screen does
not appear, and the existing file will be
overwritten directly.
After uploading in step 8 has started, other web
browser operations are disabled until uploading
is complete.
0
0
After uploading in step 8 has started and upon
shifting to the Media mode by pressing the
[CAM/MEDIA] selection button, operation from
the web browser will be disabled.
.
To enable web browser operation, press the
[CAM/MEDIA] selection button again to switch
to the Camera mode.
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
0
If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
0
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
0
Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with
each public key and certificate.
0
For details of the fingerprint, please consult
the administrator of the server to be
connected.
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
0
.
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
211
View Remote Control and
Camera Control Functions
9
Upload is complete.
After upload is complete, “Successfully
Completed.” appears on the screen.
0
You can control the camera by accessing via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
FTP Upload
You can perform the following operations for each
of the items.
Successfully Completed.
The image is displayed on the View remote.
Exit
9
A
.
B
C
When clips are not uploaded successfully,
the following errors are displayed.
0
D
E
F
FTP Upload
G
Failed.
.
Internal Error.
Exit
Cause of
Error
A
REC
For performing recording start or recording
pause operation.
.
.
Memo :
B
STREAMING
Turns on or off live streaming.
0
to clear the error message.
.
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
212
C
D
E
CAMERA
ZOOM
Enables operations related to the camera
functions.
Enables zooming operations.
.
FOCUS
Enables focusing operations.
.
F
USER SWITCH
You can enable or disable the user buttons that
are assigned with a function.
.
.
G
MENU
You can show or hide the display and menu
characters on an external monitor as well as
operation of menus, switching the display
screen and status display.
.
.
View Remote Control and Camera Control Functions
213
Changing the Settings via
a Web Browser
You can change the network-related settings by
accessing via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
A
B
View Remote
Settings for operations on the View Remote.
Connection Setup
Settings related to the network.
You can change the settings for each of the
preset items on the [Wizard] screen of the
camera recorder.
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
C
Metadata Server
Settings on the server for importing the
metadata.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the Metadata Server menu on the camera
recorder.
2
Tap (click) the [Settings] tab.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
2
D
Clip Server
Settings for the server to upload recorded clips
to.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the [Clip Server] menu on the camera recorder.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
E
F
Live Streaming
Setting for streaming audio and video via the
network.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
.
Return over IP
3
The [Settings] screen appears.
For specifying settings related to Return over IP.
For configuring settings for receiving video and
audio via the network.
Set each of the items as follows.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
A
B
Memo :
Priority is given to menu operation on the
0
camera recorder.
C
D
E
F
When the menu on the camera recorder is
opened while the [Settings] screen is opened
using a web browser, a warning appears, after
which the display returns to the main screen.
While the menu is displayed on the camera
recorder, the [Settings] screen cannot be
opened via the web browser.
0
.
0
Changing the Settings via a Web Browser
214
Changing View Remote Function
Settings
Changing Connection Setup
You can change the settings for each of the preset
items on the [Wizard] screen of the camera
recorder.
For performing setting for using the View Remote
function.
If all the items cannot be displayed in a single
page, scroll down to display the remaining
items.
0
A
B
Items that cannot be changed are grayed out
according to the type of adapter connected and
the mode of connection.
0
A
B
C
C
.
A
[Camera Name]
HC900
For setting the name that appears at the top
left of the view screen.
0
D
Tapping the text input area displays a
software keyboard.
0
If you are using a PC, enter using the PC
keyboard.
By tapping the Go key after input is complete,
0
.
the software keyboard disappears.
A
B
C
Type of Adapter Connected
Mode of Wireless LAN Connection
B
[Restrictions]
For setting the buttons to be disabled on the
View screen while in the locked mode.
[Search Access Point] Button
Tap (click) to display a list of the detected
access points.
[REC]:
0
For setting whether to disable the Stop
Record button, zoom operation, and camera
control during recording.
The currently selected access point is indicated
by a dot mark ( 0 ).
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock] and [Lock].
Search Access Point
[Except REC]:
0
For setting whether to disable the record
button, zoom operation, and camera control
in any mode other than the recording mode.
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock] and [Lock].
HC900
C
[Save]/[Cancel]
Tap (click) [Save] to save the settings.
Tap (click) [Cancel] to stop setting and return to
the main [Settings] screen.
Cancel
.
Changing the Settings via a Web Browser
215
D
Changing Metadata Server Settings
Settings on the [Select Setup Type] Screen
You can make direct changes to the FTP server for
importing the metadata set in [Network] B
[Metadata Server], as well as the path of the file to
import.
Changing Clip Server Settings
.
You can make direct changes to the server and
directory settings that are specified in [Network] B
[Clip Server] for uploading recorded clips in the
recording media to the FTP server.
E
Settings on the [IP Address Configuration]
Screen
When “DHCP” is selected, all items will be
grayed out.
Changing Streaming Settings
You can make direct changes to settings that are
specified in [Network] B [Live Streaming], such as
information on the destination of distribution.
F
G
H
.
F
G
H
Settings when using cellular adapter
Settings on the [Select FTP Proxy] Screen
[OK]/[Cancel] Button
After changing of settings is complete, tap
(click) the [OK] button.
On the confirmation screen, tap (click)
[Execute] to change the settings on the camera
recorder and restart the network.
Changing the Settings via a Web Browser
216
Saving the Connection Settings File
Managing the Network
Connection Settings File
1
2
Select [Network] B [Connection Setup] B
[Setup File]u v / [USB Setup File]w
x and press the Set button (R).
This camera recorder allows you to save the
network connection settings on the Wizard screen
to the camera recorder unit.
Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
Loading a saved connecting settings file enables
you to reproduce the appropriate network
connection state speedily.
Memo :
2
To save or retrieve the connection settings, go
to [Network] B [Connection Setup].
0
The following operations can be performed on
the [Connection Setup] menu.
0
0
.
0
3
Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
0
Number of Storable Setup Files
Camera recorder [CAM1] to [CAM4]
:
3
.
4
Name the file.
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
Memo :
When overwriting an existing file, the subname
0
of the existing file is displayed.
0 Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL/RESET] button to return to
the previous screen.
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
217
Reading the Connection Settings File
5
Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
1
2
Select [Network] B [Connection Setup] B
[Setup File]u v / [USB Setup File]w
x and press the Set button (R).
Select [Load] and press the Set button (R).
4
2
5
.
6
Save the file.
A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
0
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and“Storing...” appears on the screen.
.
3
Select the file to read using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
Overwrite Connection
Setup?
CAM3:KAMAKURA
Overwrite
6
3
Cancel
.
Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
0
.
4
Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the
screen.
Storing...
Load Connection
Setup?
.
CAM2 :YOKOHAMA
7
Load
Saving is complete.
4
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Cancel
.
5
Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
218
Deleting Connection Settings
1
2
Select [Network] B [Connection Setup] B
[Setup File]u v / [USB Setup File]w
x and press the Set button (R).
Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
2
.
3
Select the file to delete using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
3
.
4
Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the
screen.
Delete Connection
Setup?
CAM1 :TOKYO
Delete
Cancel
4
.
5
Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
219
Performing Live Streaming
By combining with the decoder or PC application that supports live streaming, you can perform audio and
video streaming via the network.
Supported Formats
.
Record Format
Usable Formats for Live Streaming
System Format Resolution Frame 1920x 1920x 1920x 1280x 1280x 720x
640x
360,
60p
640x
360,
30p
Rate 1080, 1080, 1080, 720,
720,
30p
480,
60i
60p 60i 30p 60p
HD
QuickTime
(H.264)
60p
60i
1920x
1080
HD(SDI In)
30p
1280x720 60p
Exchange 1920x1080 60p
(U model)
1280x720 60p
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
MXF
60i
1920x
1080
30p
1440x1080 60i
1280x720 60p
(MPEG2)
SD
QuickTime
(H.264)
SD(SDI In)
(U model)
720x480
60i
.
Record Format
Usable Formats for Live Streaming
System Format Resolution Frame
1920x 1920x 1920x 1280x 1280x 720x
640x
360,
50p
640x
360,
25p
Rate
1080, 1080, 1080, 720,
50p 50i 25p 50p
720,
25p
576,
50i
HD
QuickTime
(H.264)
50p
50i
1920x
1080
HD(SDI In)
25p
1280x720 50p
1920x1080 50p
1280x720 50p
MP4
(E model)
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
MXF
50i
1920x
1080
25p
1440x1080 50i
1280x720 50p
(MPEG2)
SD
QuickTime
(H.264)
SD(SDI In)
(E model)
720x576
50i
*
Not selectable when the setting is configured to HD(SDI In) or SD(SDI In).
Performing Live Streaming
220
Formats Supported on KA-EN200 (Sold Separately)
Record Format
Usable Formats for Live Streaming
System
HD
Format
Resolution Frame Rate
60p
1920x1080
1920x1080, 60p
1920x1080, 30p
1280x1080, 60p
1280x1080, 30p
QuickTime
c
c
-
c
c
c
-
c
-
c
c
c
-
c
c
-
c
c
c
c
-
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
(H.264)
60i
30p
60p
60p
60p
60i
30p
60i
60p
1280x720
1920x1080
1280x720
-
Exchange
(U model)
c
-
c
-
c
-
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
MXF
1920x1080
1440x1080
1280x720
c
(MPEG2)
c
Record Format
Usable Formats for Live Streaming
System
HD
Format
Resolution Frame Rate
50p
1920x1080
1920x1080, 50p
1920x1080, 25p
1280x1080, 50p
1280x1080, 25p
QuickTime
c
c
-
c
c
c
-
c
-
c
c
c
-
c
c
-
c
c
c
c
-
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
(H.264)
50i
25p
50p
50p
50p
50i
25p
50i
50p
1280x720
1920x1080
1280x720
-
MP4
c
-
c
-
c
-
(E model)
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
MXF
1920x1080
1440x1080
1280x720
c
(MPEG2)
c
*
The 4:2:2 and 4:2:0 modes are available for selection when the frame rate is 60p/50p.
Performing Live Streaming
221
Audio
AAC
Memo :
The distributable resolution, frame rate and bit
0
rate vary according to the recording format.
To distribute progressive video, set the frame
rate to any of the progressive frame rates. And
to distribute interlace video, set the frame rate to
any of the interlace frame rates.
0
Supported Protocols
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP/RTP
ZIXI
The following constraints apply depending on
the setting of [Network] B [Live Streaming] B
[Type].
0
SRT
0
A bit rate not exceeding maximum 12 Mbps
RTMP
can be configured when [Type] is set to
“RTSP/RTP”.
RTMPS
0
When [Type] is set to “ZIXI”, a bit rate not
Memo :
exceeding maximum 12 Mbps can be
configured regardless of the [Latency]
setting.
The model is equipped with the Zixi protocol,
thus SRT protocol update needs to be
performed before using the SRT protocol. Doing
so will make the Zixi protocol unusable.
To enable the use of the Zixi protocol again,
perform Zixi protocol update.
0
0
Depending on the type of network adapter
used and the connection, the images and
audio sound during live streaming can be
choppy.
Performing Live Streaming
222
Setting Distribution
2
3
Set the Resolution and Frame & Bit Rate for
the video to be distributed.
Specify the settings in [Network] B [Live
Streaming].
1
Set the [Record Format] according to the
resolution and frame rate of the video to be
distributed.
For details on the [Record Format] settings,
please refer to [Distributable [Record Format]
Specify the distribution protocol and
related items.
Specify the distribution protocol and related
items in [Network] B [Live Streaming] B
[Streaming Server].
Memo :
Live streaming cannot be performed in the
0
following cases.
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
4
Select the server for live streaming.
Select the distribution server in [Network] B
[Live Streaming] B [Server].
Format] B [System] is set to “HD+Web” or
“High-Speed”
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B[WFrame Rate] is set to “24p”
Distributable [Record Format] and [Live Streaming Set] Combinations
When [Optional Adapter] is configured to “Disable” (H.264 streaming)
0
1920 x 1080
Frame Rate 60p, 50p
Resolution
60i, 50i
30p, 25p
Type
Bit
Rate
*2
*2
*2
24 Mbps
20 Mbps
16 Mbps
12 Mbps
8 Mbps
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
5 Mbps
3 Mbps
1.5 Mbps
0.8 Mbps
0.3 Mbps
.
*
R: Distributable
o: Distributable when [Format] is configured as follows.
0
QuickTime(H.264), Exchange (U model)
0
MP4(H.264) (E model)
*1
*2
:
:
Distribution at a bit rate of 12 Mbps is possible when [FEC] is configured to “Off”.
Distribution is disabled when [System] is configured to “HD” and the following are configured.
When [Format] is configured to “QuickTime(H.264)”, “Exchange” (U model) or “MP4(H.264)” (E
model), [Overlay Function] is configured to “Enable” and [Overlay Settings] B[Output] is configured
to “Off”
0
0
[Overlay Function] is configured to “Enable” when [Format] is configured to “QuickTime(MPEG2)”
or “MXF(MPEG2)”
Performing Live Streaming
223
1280 x 720
Frame Rate 60p, 50p
640 x 360
60p, 50p
Resolution
720x480 or 720x576
60i or 50i
30p, 25p
30p, 25p
Type
Bit
Rate
24 Mbps
20 Mbps
16 Mbps
12 Mbps
8 Mbps
*1
*1
*1
*1
5 Mbps
3 Mbps
1.5 Mbps
0.8 Mbps
0.3 Mbps
.
*
R: Distributable
*1
:
Distribution is disabled when [System] is configured to “HD” and the following are configured.
When [Format] is configured to “QuickTime(H.264)”, “Exchange” (U model) or “MP4(H.264)” (E
model), [Overlay Function] is configured to “Enable” and [Overlay Settings] B[Output] is configured
to “Off”
0
0
[Overlay Function] is configured to “Enable” when [Format] is configured to “QuickTime(MPEG2)”
or “MXF(MPEG2)”
When [Optional Adapter] is configured to “Enable” (H.265/HEVC streaming using KA-EN200)
0
1920 x 1080
4:2:2 10bit
1920 x 1080 1280 x 720 1280 x 720
Resolution
4:2:0 8bit
4:2:2 10bit
4:2:0 8bit
Frame Rate 60p, 50p
Type
60p, 50p, 30p, 25p 60p, 50p
60p, 50p, 30p, 25p
Bit
Rate
24 Mbps
20 Mbps
16 Mbps
12 Mbps
8 Mbps
5 Mbps
3 Mbps
1.5 Mbps
0.8 Mbps
0.3 Mbps
.
*
Streaming at a bit rate of 8 Mbps is possible when [FEC] is configured to “Off”.
Performing Live Streaming
224
Starting Distribution
Memo :
1
Perform the necessary setting for the
decoder and PC application.
You can also assign “Live Streaming” to a user
0
button.
For details on the settings, please refer to the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the respective devices
and applications.
You can view the status of distribution on the
LCD monitor.
0
Memo :
If there is an NAT router within the
0
0
0
communication path between the camera and
the decoder, port forwarding setup is required.
For details on the settings, please refer to the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the router in use.
The following parameters are required when
connecting to this camera recorder using the
RTSP/RTP.
Icon
Status
Distribution in progress (good
connection quality)
.
Blinks when distribution starts or
stops
(Red)
Distribution in progress (poor
connection quality)
Port number: 554
.
Stream ID: stream
(Red)
Use the following to access via URL.
rtsp://<IP address of the camera recorder>:554/
stream
Waiting for connection (during
RTSP/RTP) or connection failed
.
(Yellow)
2
With the network connection established,
set [Live Streaming] to “On”.
0
When the 5 icon is displayed, you can view the
details of the error on the [Streaming] screen of
the status screen.
Set [Network] B [Live Streaming] B [Live
Streaming] to “On”.
0
0
The network connection mark appears on the
display screen when a network connection is
established.
Cause of Error
.
Caution :
Streaming may be interrupted temporarily 24
0
hours after the process started.
Performing Live Streaming
225
Setting the FEC Matrix
Memo :
Increasing the amount of FEC overhead
0
Set the amount of FEC (Forward Error Correction)
increases the packet loss resilience but more
network bandwidth is used.
overhead for configuring SMPTE2022-1.
1
Even with the same amount of overhead,
increasing the L value will increase the packet
loss (continuous packet loss) resilience.
Select [Network] B [Live Streaming] B
0
[Streaming Server] B [Server1] to [Server4]
B [FEC Matrix] and press the Set button.
The FEC adjustment screen appears.
.
2
Adjust the L and D values.
Use the H/I buttons to adjust the L value, and
the J/K buttons to adjust the D value.
The amount of FEC overhead changes when
the L and D values are changed.
To restore the L and D values to their default
values, press the [USER3] button.
Memo :
Setting range
0
0
0
0
4 ≦ L ≦ 20 (Default value: L = 10)
4 ≦ D ≦ 20 (Default value: D = 10)
L × D ≦ 100 (Default value: L×D = 10×10)
3
Press the Set button (R).
The screen returns to the streaming server
setting screen.
.
Performing Live Streaming
226
Return Video/Audio from
the Network (Return over
IP)
Return video/audio from the network can be
displayed on the viewfinder or LCD monitor of the
camera or listened through a headphone.
2
Assign the “Return Video” and “Return
over IP” features to any of the user buttons.
Memo :
0
The “Return over IP” feature can also be
operated using “On”/“Off” under [Network] B
[Return over IP] B [Return over IP].
Memo :
3
Configure the input destination of the
return video to “Network”.
This feature is only usable in the Camera mode.
Start the encoder before activating Return over
IP. To end, turn off Return over IP before shutting
down the encoder. When the bit rate or frame
rate of the encoder is changed, adjust the
camera settings according to the encoder
settings, followed by restarting the camera.
This feature is available when [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
set to “HD” or “SD”. When [WFrame Rate] is set
to “24p”, this feature is not available.
0
0
To specify the input destination of the return
video, configure [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B
[Return Input] to “Network”.
Memo :
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
0
Format] B [System] is configured to “HD(SDI
In)” or “SD(SDI In)”, “---” is displayed and the
setting cannot be configured.
4
Select the aspect ratio of the return video.
Set using [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [Return
Aspect].
Configuring the Return over IP Server
Configure the Return over IP settings and establish
5
6
7
Press the user button that is assigned with
the connection before displaying the return video.
the “Return over IP” function.
1
When Return over IP is activated, the settings
in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [IFB/RET Monitor]
will be applied to the audio.
Register the [Return Server].
Configure [Network] B [Return over IP] B
[Server] to “Server”.
Configure the individual settings in the [Return
Server] item.
Select the way the return video is to be
Memo :
displayed.
Select in [Camera Function] B [User Switch
Set] B [Return Video]. The camera will operate
according to the setting.
For details on the registered information, please
0
consult the network administrator for the server.
Configure “Icecast” to a setting other than
[Type].
0
Operates as IFB when the setting is configured
to “Icecast”.
Press the user button that is assigned with
the “Return Video” function.
By pressing the user button assigned with the
“Return Video” function, the captured image or
return video is displayed according to the
Return Video and Audio from the
Network
method specified in step 6.
1
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode.
Return Video/Audio from the Network (Return over IP)
227
IFB (Return Audio)
3
Configure the input destination of the
return video to “Network”.
To specify the input destination of the return
video, configure [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B
[Return Input] to “Network”.
Return audio from the network can be played
through a headphone.
Memo :
This feature is only usable in the Camera mode.
Start the encoder before activating Return over
IP. To end, turn off Return over IP before shutting
down the encoder. When the bit rate or frame
rate of the encoder is changed, adjust the
camera settings according to the encoder
settings, followed by restarting the camera.
This feature is available when [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
set to “HD” or “SD”. When [WFrame Rate] is set
to “24p”, this feature is not available.
0
0
Memo :
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is configured to “HD(SDI
In)” or “SD(SDI In)”, “---” is displayed and the
setting cannot be configured.
4
Press the user button that is assigned with
the “Return over IP” function.
0
When Return over IP is activated, the settings
in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [IFB/RET Monitor]
will be applied to the audio.
Configuring the Return over IP Server
Configure the Return over IP settings and establish
the connection before displaying the return video.
1
Register the [Return Server].
Configure [Network] B [Return over IP] B
[Server] to “Server”.
Configure the individual settings in the [Return
Server] item.
Memo :
For details on the registered information, please
0
consult the network administrator for the server.
Configure “Icecast” to [Type].
0
Operates as IFB when the setting is configured
to “Icecast”.
Return Audio from the Network (IFB)
1
2
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode.
Assign the “Return over IP” function to any
of the user buttons.
Memo :
The “Return over IP” feature can also be
0
operated using “On”/“Off” under [Network] B
[Return over IP] B [Return over IP].
IFB (Return Audio)
228
Entering Tag Information via the Web Function
Tagging Feature u w
When using the Exchange file format, entering the
tag information on the camera recorder helps to
ease the management of tags during editing.
1
Access the web function of this camera
recorder via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal or
PC, and display the main page.
Configuring to Exchange Format
2
3
Press the “Sports Tagging” button to
To use the tagging feature, configure [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [WFormat] to
“Exchange”.
display the tag input screen.
Enter the tag information and press the
“Enter” button.
Enter “Title 1” and “Title 2” manually or using the
template input button.
4
5
Start recording.
Configuring Camera Angle Information
To make changes, enter the tag information
Camera angle information can be recorded to the
and press the “Enter” button.
metadata of the recorded clip.
Enter “Title 1” and “Title 2” manually or using the
template input button.
Configure the settings in [Camera Function] B
[Camera Angle[Tagging]].
6
7
Press the Set button.
Stop recording.
The tag is recorded to the .xchange file.
Entering Tag Information
Tag information can be entered on the camera
recorder or via the web function of the camera
recorder.
A
B
C
D
E
Entering Tag Information on the Camera
Recorder
1
Assign the tag to a user button.
F
2
Press the user button that is assigned with
G
the tag.
H
I
3
4
Start recording.
.
To make changes, press the user button
A
B
Sports Tagging Button
Current setting
that is assigned with the tag.
5
Stop recording.
Displays the text strings entered for [Title 1] and
[Title 2] just before the Set button is last
pressed.
The tag is recorded to the .xchange file.
C
D
Data input boxes [Title 1] and [Title 2]
Text can be entered into the boxes directly. For
smartphones or tablets, tapping the box
displays a OS keyboard.
Clear button
Clears the text in the [Title 1] and [Title 2] boxes.
Tagging Feature u w
229
E
Set button
Synchronizing GPS Time Code u
Sends the text strings in [Title 1] and [Title 2] to
the camera recorder and the tag data of the clip
is updated. Update of the tag data is possible
while recording is in progress.
Time code information can be synchronized with
the date/time information acquired from the GPS.
F
G
Template input button
Enters a template phrase into the [Title 1].
(Example) Pressing the [KO] button enters KO
into “Title 1”.
Configuring the TC Mode
Set [TC/UB] B [TC Mode] to “GPS”.
REMOVE Button
Memo :
Adds a REMOVE flag to the .xchange file of the
clip that is currently being recorded. When
recording is paused during Clip Continuous
recording, pressing the REMOVE button adds
a REMOVE flag to the .xchange file that was last
recorded.
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] is
configured to “Interval Rec” or “Frame Rec”,
“GPS” cannot be selected.
The Z icon lights up when the time code is
synchronized.
0
0
H
I
Stop Record Button
00:00:00.00
Stops clip recording by the camera recorder.
This button is active only during clip recording
by the camera recorder.
5 .
12 :3
Start Record Button
Starts clip recording by the camera recorder.
This button is active only when the camera
recorder is ready to start recording.
ND1
AE
/ 60
/64
0
K
5600
1
ISO
F2. 8
B
102400
.
Memo :
You can enter up to 64 characters for “Title 1”
0
and up to 128 characters for “Title 2”.
Changing (including clearing) the text in the
“Title 1” and “Title 2” boxes does not
automatically update the tag data of the
recorded clip. Make sure to press the Set button
to confirm the change. Changes in the tag data
cannot be made to clips for which recording has
already ended.
0
Input of tag data in file formats other than MOV
is not guaranteed.
0
0
When a recorded clip is split into multiple files,
the same tag information may not be saved to all
the files depending on the timing at which the tag
information is updated. It is recommended that
a SDXC card be used with [System] B Record
Set B [4GB File Spanning(SDXC)] configured to
“Off”.
Tagging Feature u w
230
Broadcast Overlay
3
4
Select the file for overlay from the imported
file in [Overlay Settings] B [Layout].
Texts, images and watermark can be overlaid onto
recorded videos and live streaming videos from a
smartphone or tablet device by importing the SDP
file for broadcast.
Select “Broadcast” in [Overlay Settings] B
[Type].
When the SDP file selected in [Layout] is
created in a type other than “Broadcast”, or
when the recording resolution of the
“Broadcast” type of the SDP file is different from
the recording resolution of the current camera,
“Broadcast” is not displayed in [Type].
Available when [System] is set to “HD” or “HD
+Web”.
Use the SDP Generator to create the SDP file for
broadcast.
For information on SDP Generator, please
contact your local dealer or download from our
website.
0
Broadcast:
0
Watermark
Live Mark
Text 1
Caution :
Regardless of the recording resolution
0
(1920x1080, 1440x1080, 1280x720), the SDP
file resolution that can be used on this camera
recorder is fixed at 1920x1080.
Logo
Text 3
Time
Text 2
None: No display
Memo :
.
Configuring Type to “Broadcast” in the factory
0
0
settings displays a sample of the overlaid image.
Check the display and operation in advance
before recording or live streaming starts.
5
Select the display in [Overlay Settings] B
[Output] B [REC]/[SDI OUT2]/[HDMI OUT]/
[VIDEO OUT].
0
Importing and Configuring Settings for
SDP Files for Broadcast
Memo :
When the recording format is “HD+Web”, the
scoreboard display is always overlaid on the
“Web” recording clip.
0
Entering Overlay Text
1
Connect this camera recorder to the
network.
The scoreboard display is always overlaid on
live video streaming.
0
0
The settings cannot be changed during
recording or live streaming.
2
3
Connect from a web browser.
When the web browser screen appears,
press the overlay icon at the top of the
screen or the [Overlay Control] button to
display the input screen.
1
Set [Overlay Settings] B [Overlay Function]
to “Enable”.
When [System] is configured to a setting other
than “HD” and “HD+Web”, this item is fixed at
“Disable”.
2
Use [Overlay Settings] B [Import User
Layout] to import the file.
.
To use an overlay other than the SDP file at
factory default, import the SDP file for broadcast
to the camera.
4
One of the following screens appears
according to the setting for [Type] in the
camera recorder menu.
Broadcast Overlay
231
Memo:
Range <A> Text 1
Range <B> Text 2
Range <C> Text 3
Range <D> Time
Range <E> Logo
Range <F> Live mark
A
B
<A>
<B>
C
D
E
F
A
Shows the current overlay status.
B
Text selection area
The highlighted text is overlaid and displayed.
C
[K] [J] Button
Selects the text.
D
[Edit] Button
Switches to the text entry mode.
E
[1][2][3][4] Button
Selects the image.
F
[Display] Button
Displays or hides specific areas.
G
Unit Button
<C>
<D>
Selects the unit to add after Text 3.
H
[Update] Button
G
Reflects the changed content in the overlay
display.
I
[Overlay] Button
Displays or hides the overlay.
Text that can be entered in [Text 1], [Text 2], and
[Text 3] are as follows:
<E>
<F>
! " # $%&' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ; < = > ?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU
VWXYZ[ \ ] ^ _ ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨
© ª « ¬ ® ¯ ° ² ³ ´ μ ¶ • ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
À Á Â Ã Ä ÅÆÇÈ É Ê Ë Ì Í Î ÏÐÑÒÓÔÕÖ×
ØÙÚÛÜÝ Þ ß à á â ã ä åæç è é ê ë ì í î ï
ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷øùúûüýþÿĞğİıOEoeŞşŠšŸ
H
I
Žžƒˆ˜–—‘’‚“”„†‡•…‰‹›€™
.
.
Memo :
Not more than 5 lines can be entered for Text 1
and Text 2 each. Up to 63 bytes can be entered
for each line.
0
Up to 5 bytes can be entered for Text 3.
For some types of text, the text that has been
entered may not be displayed fully on the
overlaid display. Check the display in advance.
0
0
Broadcast Overlay
232
Displaying Watermark Images
Displaying Images on the Whole Screen
(Full Screen Graphic Function)
Import the SDP file in which the watermark image
has been preconfigured to the camera recorder in
advance.
Announcement and advertising images can be
displayed across the whole screen.
The watermark setting menu will be displayed in
the [Overlay Settings] menu screen only when the
SDP file for broadcast is selected in [Overlay
Settings] B [Layout].
1
Set [Overlay Settings] B [Watermark] to
“On”.
2
Select [Overlay Settings] B [Position].
The watermark position setting screen appears.
The position is moved 2 steps at a time.
The displayed coordinates shows the
position at the top left of the watermark
image.
0
0
.
Importing Images for Display to the Camera
1
Prepare the image for display.
JPEG (extension .jpg) and PNG
(extension .png) formats are supported.
3
Use the cursor to move the watermark and
press the Set (R) button.
2
Copy the image file to the root directory of
Horizontal
Direction
the SD card.
Use an SD card of a recordable specification
in the current camera recording settings.
Up to 50 image files can be displayed.
The order of display by file name can be
specified.
0
0
0
Memo :
Add a two-digit number of 01 to 50 at the start of
0
Vertical Direction
the file name. Files will be displayed in the order
starting from those having the smallest number
in the file name.
.
Example: When 01flower.png, 02car.jpg,
13red.png are imported, they are displayed in
the order of 01flower.png B 02car.jpg B
13red.png.
Only alphanumeric characters and underscore
(_) can be used for the third character onwards
in the file name.
0
0
Enter not more than 31 characters for the file
name.
3
Select [Overlay Settings] B [Full Screen
Graphic].
4
Insert the SD card where the image files are
copied into the SD card slot A or B of the
camera, and select [Import GraphicW] or
[Import GraphicY] to import.
Once import is performed, all images
previously imported will be deleted.
To delete the imported image files, select
[Overlay Settings] B [Full Screen Graphic] B
[Delete Graphic].
0
0
Broadcast Overlay
233
Displaying Images
Display the image from the web screen for setting
the overlay.
Memo :
The total number of currently imported image
0
files and the used capacity can be checked in
[Overlay Settings] B [Full Screen Graphic] B
[Status]. This capacity may be bigger than the
actual image file size.
A
B
C
The maximum import size is approx. 23 MB,
after combining the capacity that can be
checked in [Status] and the size of the imported
SDP files.
0
0
Images that can be displayed are as follows:
0
Image Size: 960x540
D
E
0
File Size: 1MB and below
0
JPEG:
Gradation: 8 bit
Pixel format: YCbCr or grayscale
Baseline JPEG
0
PNG:
.
Bit/Channel: 1, 2, 4, 8
Pixel format: Grayscale, Index, True color
(RGB), grayscale with alpha, true color with
alpha (RGBA)
A
B
C
Start:
Starts the display of images.
Stop:
Non-interlaced PNG
Stops the display of images.
When images that cannot be displayed are
imported to the camera, an error message
“Unsupported Graphic Format” is displayed on
the camera recorder while image display is in
progress. Check in advance that images can be
displayed as per expectation.
0
Next:
Image in : Displays the next image.
display
Image
not in
:
Starts displaying from the next
image of the image at which the
display stopped previously.
display
Depending on the status of the camera, it may
take a while to display the next image after
pressing the [Next] button.
D
E
Interval Time:
Sets the display time per image.
Depending on the status of the camera, it may
take a while to display the next image after
pressing the [Start] button. A time longer than
the configured interval time may be
displayed.
Loop Playback:
Select [ON] to return to the first image after the
last image is displayed.
Broadcast Overlay
234
Protecting Overlay Settings with a
Password
You can use a password to protect overlay settings
to prevent the cancellation of watermark display by
a third party.
Memo :
To display only one image continuously, set
0
[Interval Time] to “0”.
When recording is performed together with live
streaming or when there is a lot of information
display on the LCD/VF screen, images may take
more than 10 seconds to display. It is possible
to reduce the time taken to display by lowering
the resolution of the recording and live
streaming or by pressing the [DISPLAY] button
of the camera recorder to turn off the display
screen.
0
Protecting with a Password
1
Set [Overlay Settings] B [Password Lock]
to “On”.
2
Enter the protection password and press
the cross-shaped button (I).
To use only the Full Screen Graphic function
without the overlay display, select [Overlay
Settings] B [Type] and choose options other
than “None”. Then, set the [Overlay] button on
the web screen for controlling the overlay to Off.
When the format of the next image to be
displayed is not supported during image display,
“Unsupported Graphic Format” will be displayed
on the camera recorder, and that image will not
be displayed. Import images that support a
displayable format.
0
0
Enter not more than 16 characters for the
password using the software keyboard.
3
4
Enter the same password again and press
the cross-shaped button (I).
Press [Set].
A password request screen will appear
subsequently before you enter the [Overlay
Settings] screen.
Caution :
Do not forget the password that you have set. If
0
the password is lost or forgotten, you cannot
deactivate the password protection function.
Memo :
When overlay settings are protected by a
0
password, the following items in [System] are
grayed out and cannot be selected.
0
[Reset All]
0
[Record Set] B [Record Format]
0
[Setup File] B [Load File] B [Picture File]/
[User File]/[All File]
0
[Setup File] B [Store File] B [Picture File]/
[User File]/[All File]
Deactivating Password Protection
1
Select [Overlay Settings].
A password request screen appears.
2
Enter the password and press the cross-
shaped button (I).
If the password matches the configured
password, the [Overlay Settings] menu
appears.
3
4
Change [Password Lock] to “Off”.
Press [Set] to close the deactivation
complete screen.
Broadcast Overlay
235
Specifying Text and Images
1
Connect the camera recorder to a network
compatible device such as a mobile device
via the network.
When network connection is established
between the devices, start the Web browser on
the network compatible device.
2
Enter the following URL in the address bar
of the Web browser.
http:// “IP address of camera ecorder”
Example; http://192.168.0.1
.
You can check the “IP address of camera
recorder” by pressing the [STATUS] button on
the camera recorder to display the Status
screen and use the cross-shaped button (H I)
to display the Network screen.
3
4
Enter the user name and password.
Enter the user name and the password on the
login screen to display the main page of the
camera.
Press the overlay control icon at the top of
the screen or the [Overlay Control] button
to display the Settings screen.
4
.
5
Press the [Update] button to reflect the
specified text and images in the overlay.
Broadcast Overlay
236
Error Messages and Actions
Warning display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen, tally lamp indication and warning tone are as
follows according to the error status.
Memo :
This camera recorder makes use of a microcomputer. Noise interference from external sources may
prevent it from functioning properly. When this occurs, turn off and on the power of the camera recorder
again.
0
Error Message
Turn Power Off Turn Back On System error.
Status
Action
Turn off the power, and turn it on
Later
again.
*
The warning tone sounds and the
tally lamp blinks twice every
second.
If the error persists, please contact
the local dealers in your area.
Fan Stop Detected Please
Turn P.Off
Fan Maintenance Required
The fan stopped running.
Please contact the local dealers in
your area.
0
Usage time of the fan has exceeded Check the fan and replace
9000 hours.
accordingly. For more details,
please contact the local dealers in
your area.
Memo :
You can check the usage time of
the fan in [System] B [System
Information] B [Fan Hour].
0
Getting Overheated. Please
Turn Power Off.
The battery has exceeded the
Wait until the temperature drops
or replace the battery.
If the error persists, please
contact the local dealers in your
area.
0
0
0
0
specified temperature.
The power turns off
automatically after about 15
second.
Rec Inhibited
[REC] button is pressed when the Turn off the write-protect switch of
write-protect switch of the SD card the SD card, or insert a recordable
is set.
SD card.
Lost Media Info *
Card is removed while recording Restore the card using this camera
0
0
0
0
0
0
is in progress.
recorder.
Card is removed while
formatting is in progress.
Card is removed while restoring
is in progress.
Card is removed while adding
the OK mark.
Card is removed while writing a
setup file.
Card is removed while deleting a
clip.
(*: A, B)
Error Messages and Actions
237
Error Message
Record Format Incorrect
Status
Action
The video format of the file for
Clip Review is different from the
current [WResolution],
[WFrame Rate], or [WBit Rate]
setting.
0
Set [WResolution], [WFrame Rate]
and [WBit Rate] correctly.
Media Full
No Clips
[REC] button is pressed when Replace the recording media with a
0
0
the media in use has no
remaining space.
new one.
Remaining space ran out during
recording.
No viewable clips are found on the Insert an SD card that contains clips
card for Clip Review.
that can be reviewed.
No Media
No Media
No Clips
When the [REC] button is pressed Insert a recording media.
while a recording media is not
inserted.
No recording media is inserted while Insert a recording media.
in Media mode or when the
thumbnail screen is displayed.
No clips are found in the inserted Insert a recording media that
recording media while in Media
mode or when the thumbnail screen
is displayed.
contains playable clips.
Please review the connected Peripheral devices are connected in Take the necessary actions such as
devices due to over current. an environment that is subject to removing the USB devices that are
high temperature, and overcurrent connected to the camera. The
has occurred as a result.
Memo :
power of the camera may shut down
if you continue using it in this state.
ThebacklightoftheLCDmonitor
may automatically be adjusted
to “Dark” as a form of overcurrent
protection.
0
Error Messages and Actions
238
List of FTP Transfer Errors
If the upload of a recorded clip or download of the metadata setup file (XML format) is not successfully
completed, the following errors are displayed.
Error message
Timeout.
Status
Action
Execute again.
Transfer was discontinued due to
0
0
timeout caused by network
Use a different server.
transmission or server failure.
Media Was Removed.
Adapter Was Removed.
Recording media is removed while Insert the recording media and
FTP transfer is in progress.
execute FTP transfer again.
The USB network device is
removed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Connect the USB network device.
Cannot Connect to Server.
UnabletoconnecttotheFTPserver. Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
Access Denied.
Access is denied.
Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
Invalid Username or
Password.
Authentication for login to the FTP Adjust the Username and Password
server failed.
settings for [Metadata Server] or
[Clip Server].
Invalid Path Was Requested. The path specified for the FTP
server is incorrect.
Adjust the [Clip Server] and [Dir.
Path] settings for [Metadata Server]
or [File Path].
Server Error.
There was an unintended operation Execute again.
of the FTP server.
Use a different server.
Invalid Request.
A bad request is executed for the Execute again.
FTP server.
Error Messages and Actions
239
Error message
Invalid Data Size.
Status
Action
Invalid data size, such as a planning Adjust the planning metadata saved
metadata size that exceeds 4 KB. in the [Metadata Server].
Invalid Data Format.
The XML format of the planning
Adjust the planning metadata saved
metadata is invalid.
in the [Metadata Server].
Transfer Error.
Invalid URL.
Transfer failed due to
communication failure.
Execute again.
The path was deemed invalid by the Adjust the Server and Port settings
FTP server.
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
Media Access Error.
Reading/writing of the recording
media failed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Use a different recording media.
Internal Error.
Other Error.
An internal error has occurred while Adjust the settings and execute
FTP transfer is in progress.
again.
An unknown error or other errors
Adjust the settings and execute
have occurred while FTP transfer is again.
in progress.
Media Read Error.
Reading of the recording media
failed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Use a different recording media.
Error Messages and Actions
240
List of Live Streaming Error Displays
The following error messages are displayed when the live streaming setting is incorrect, or when the
connection is lost during live streaming.
Error message
Invalid Address
Status
The IP address format is
Action
Enter the IP address, host name
or URL of the destination
correctly.
0
0
0
incorrect.
The domain name cannot be
converted into the IP address.
Multicast Is Not Supported
An IP multicast address was set.
Use an IP address that is not a
multicast address.
Cannot Connect to Receiver Establishment of connection with
TCP failed.
Ensure that the recipient’s
device is set to TCP.
0
0
Set Type to “MPEG2-TS/UDP”.
TCP Disconnected
TCP connection is lost.
Check to ensure that there is no
abnormality in the decoder, or
network connection device and
cables, followed by establishing the
connection again.
Not Enough Bandwidth
The communication bandwidth
is narrower than the average bit
rate.
Lower the resolution/picture
quality of the video to be
distributed.
0
0
0
The network bandwidth is
insufficient, and packets are
discarded.
Consider switching to the use of
a stable network, such as wired
LAN.
0
Connection Timeout
Authorization Failed
Connection Error
Timeout for connection via ZIXI.
Set [Destination Address] and
[Destination Port] correctly.
Authentication of connection via
ZIXI failed.
Set [Stream ID] and [Password]
correctly.
Connection via “ZIXI” or “RTMP”
failed.
Check whether a different
camera with an identical stream
ID is connected.
0
Set [Destination URL] and
[Stream Key] correctly.
0
Disconnected
“ZIXI” or “RTMP” connection is lost. Check whether there is abnormality
with the network connection device,
cables, etc., and try to re-establish
the connection.
Error Messages and Actions
241
Blinking of the Tally Lamp
The tally lamp starts blinking when the remaining space on the recording media is running out during
recording or when the battery power is running low.
Blinking Mode
Remaining Battery Power/SD Card Space
Blinks slowly
Battery power is low
0
0
(once every second)
Remaining recording time on recording media is less than 3 minutes
(during recording)
When a malfunction occurred during live streaming
0
Blinks quickly
Remaining battery power is almost zero
Remaining recording time on recording media has reached 0 minutes
(during recording)
0
0
(2 times per second)
Error on the camera recorder
0
Warning Tone
Warning tone is output from the speaker and [PHONE] terminal when the battery level is low.
0
Warning tone is also output when an error occurs in the camera recorder.
Memo :
Whether the sound is to be muted or output when it is at the minimum level can be configured in [Min.
0
ALARM Level].
Error Messages and Actions
242
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Action
Power does not turn on.
Is the AC adapter properly connected?
0
0
0
Is the battery charged?
Is the power turned on immediately after it is turned off?
Make sure to wait for an interval of at least 5 seconds before turning
on the power again.
Unable to start recording.
Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
0
0
0
Is the SD card inserted compatible with the recording format?
Camera image is not output on
the LCD monitor and
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
0
0
0
0
viewfinder screen.
Camera image is not output on
Is the LCD backlight set to “Off”?
the LCD monitor.
Press the [B.LIGHT] button to switch the mode.
Camera image is not output on
the viewfinder screen.
Is the CONTRAST knob on the viewfinder set to the minimum?
Adjust the [CONTRAST] knob on the viewfinder.
Playback does not start after
selecting a clip thumbnail and
pressing the [STATUS/SET]
button (R).
Is the selected clip a playable clip?
Playback is not possible if the clip has a different video format setting.
Images on the LCD monitor
and viewfinder screen appear
dark or blurred.
Readjust the brightness of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Is the [ND FILTER] switch set to “1/64”?
Is the iris closed?
0
0
0
0
0
Is the shutter speed setting too high?
Is the peaking level too low?
For the LCD monitor, adjust the outline with [LCD/VF] B [LCD
Peaking].
For the viewfinder, adjust the outline with the [PEAKING] knob on the
viewfinder. u v
Troubleshooting
243
Symptom
The [CH-1/CH-2] recording
level adjustment knob does
not work.
Action
Is the [AUDIO SELECT CH1/2]-[MANUAL/AUTO] selection switch set
0
0
to “AUTO”?
Is Full Auto enabled?
Is [Camera Function] B [Full Auto] B [Audio] set to “Auto” in Full Auto
mode?
[CH-3/CH-4] audio is not
recorded.
Is the number of recording channels set to “4ch”?
0
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [WAudio]/[YAudio] to “4ch”.
Microphone audio cannot be
heard through the headphone.
Is the audio setting configured to “IFB/RET Only”?
Set [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [IFB/RET Monitor] to “Off”.
0
0
0
SD card cannot be initialized
(formatted).
Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.
Battery alarm appears even
after loading a charged
battery.
Is the battery too old?
The time code and user’s bit
Even in Camera mode or Media mode, the time code and user’s bit
may not be displayed depending to the type of display.
Is [LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [TC/UB] set to “Off”? To display the
date and time, set it to “On”.
0
0
are not displayed.
0
The time is not displayed.
The time is only displayed on the display screen in the Camera mode
(during shooting).
Is [System] B [Record Set] B [Time Stamp] set to “On”? To display
the date and time, set it to “Off”.
0
The actual recording time is
shorter than the estimated
time.
The two camera recorders are
not synchronized even though
the time codes have been
synchronized. (Z on the Slave
device is not displayed.)
The recordable time may be shorter depending on the shooting
0
conditions or the subject.
Is the [TC GEN] switch set to “F-RUN”?
0
0
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B [WFrame Rate]
such that the two camera recorders have the same frame rate.
Cannot connect to wireless
LAN.
Check the mode of connection and method of setting ([SSID] and
0
[Passphrase] in cases other than WPS).
Even if the Passphrase is wrong, “Completed the Setup Wizard.
Please Input the Passphrase into Your Device.” may appear at the
browser setting depending on the type of encryption.
Adjust [Passphrase] again.
0
Set [Network] B [Connection Setup] B [Default Gateway] to a value
other than “LAN”.
0
Troubleshooting
244
Symptom
Action
The View Remote screen turns
The network path is congested.
0
0
black.
Wait a while before refreshing (reloading) the web browser.
Clear the cache in your Web browser.
The screen flickers.
The screen freezes.
Cannot perform remote
operation.
The clips cannot be uploaded
Adjust the [Clip Server] settings.
0
0
0
to the FTP server.
If a file size limit is set in the FTP server, set the size limit such that it
is larger than the maximum size of the recorded clip.
Take necessary action as described in “[List of FTP Transfer Errors]
The wireless LAN is
disconnected.
The wireless LAN may be disconnected depending on the
environment. Change the usage environment.
Connect via wired LAN.
0
0
The images and audio sound
during live streaming are
choppy.
Depending on the connection method to the network and connection
environment, streaming may not be possible with the encoding bit rate
specified. Please reduce the encoding bit rate.
0
GPS signal cannot be
Signal reception from GPS satellites may be affected by buildings or
0
trees.
received. u v
Perform positioning preferably at an unobstructed location with a clear
view.
Radio wave reception may be affected by weather conditions such as
0
0
on a cloudy or rainy day.
The position is not accurate.
The precision error may be up to hundreds of meters if the GPS signal
is weak or reflected off surrounding buildings.
u v
Troubleshooting
245
Terminal Section
Video/Audio
Specifications
General
Item
Description
Item
Power
Description
[HD/SD SDI IN] terminal
When using an external power source:
3G-SDI,
Compliant with SMPTE ST424,
DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V
HD-SDI
Compliant with SMPTE ST292
When using a battery:
3G-SDI,
HD-SDI
Embedded
audio
Compliant with SMPTE ST299,
Compliant with SMPTE ST299
DC 14.4 V (Anton/Bauer, IDX)
Power
Approx. 38 W
consumption
(during single recording at
factory default settings while
using the viewfinder)
standard
[HD/SD SDI OUT 1/2] terminal (480i or 576i: Downconverted
Approx. 33 W
720p/1080i/1080p: embedded audio), BNC (unbalanced)
(When using only the camera
body during single recording at
factory default settings)
3G-SDI,
HD-SDI,
SD-SDI
Compliant with SMPTE ST424,
Compliant with SMPTE ST292,
Compliant with SMPTE ST259
Compliant with SMPTE ST299,
Compliant with SMPTE ST299,
Compliant with SMPTE ST272
Mass
u : Approx. 5.1 kg (*1)
v : Approx. 5.2 kg (*1)
w : Approx. 4.3 kg (*2)
x : Approx. 4.4 kg (*2)
3G-SDI,
HD-SDI,
SD-SDI
Embedded
audio
Allowable operating 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
standard
temperature
[HDMI] output Type A
Allowable operating 30 %RH to 80 %RH
humidity
terminal
[VIDEO OUT]
Composite Video
Allowable storage
-20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F)
terminal (BNC)
1.0 V (p-p), 75 K (unbalanced)
temperature
[VF] terminal
26-pin
Drip-proof
Equivalent to IPX2
performance
[MIC IN] terminal
-50 dBu, 4 kK, XLR (balanced),
+48 V output (phantom power
supply)
(XLR 5-pin)
Built-in wireless IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac
LAN
u v
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz band)
Encryption method: WPA2
[AUDIO INPUT1/INPUT2] terminal (XLR 3-pin)
2.4 GHz Ch1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
u
[MIC]
-60 dBu, 4 kK, XLR (balanced),
+48 V output (phantom power
supply)
5 GHz
Ch36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120,
124, 128, 132, 136, 140, 149,
153, 157, 161, 165
USA
[LINE]
+4 dBu, 10 kK, XLR (balanced)
[AUDIO OUT]
0 dBu, 100 K, XLR (balanced)
5 GHz
Ch36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
terminal
CANADA 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 132,
136, 140, 149, 153, 157, 161,
165
(XLR 5-pin)
[PHONE]
Φ3.5 mm stereo mini jack
terminal
2.4 GHz Ch1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,
v
12, 13
5 GHz
Ch36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
Outside 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120,
Russia 124, 128, 132, 136, 140
5 GHz
Ch36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
Russia 132, 136, 140, 149, 153, 157,
161, 165
*1 Camera body and Viewfinder
*2 Camera body only
Specifications
246
Others
Item
Camera Section
Description
Item
Description
[LAN] terminal 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T
Image pickup
2/3-inch, 2.2 megapixels,
(RJ-45)
device
progressive CMOS x 3
[HOST] terminal USB-A type, network
connection function only
Lens Mount
2/3-inch B4 Bayonet mount
system
[REMOTE]
miniDin 6-pin
Color separation F1.4, 3-color separation prism
terminal
prism
Sensitivity
[TC IN] terminal 1.0 V(p-p) to 4.0 V(p-p) high
impedance
F12, 2000 lx (standard value: 60
Hz)
[TC OUT]
2.0 ± 1.0 V (p-p) low impedance
Sync system
External/Internal
terminal
Synchronization (Built-in SSG)
[LENS] terminal 12pin
ND filter
Gain
CLEAR, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64
[DC INPUT]
XLR 4-pin
-6 dB, -3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9
dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB, 21 dB,
24 dB, 27 dB, 30 dB, Lolux (24
dB, 30 dB, 36 dB,42 dB), AGC
terminal
[DC OUT]
4-pin, DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V, 1.8 A
u w x
4-pin, DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V, 1.5 A
terminal (rear)
Electronic
shutter
LCD Monitor
1/3 to 1/10000, EEI
v
[DC OUT] (LAN) 4-pin, DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V, 0.5 A
3.5-inch LCD QHD (960 × 540)
terminal
u w x
4-pin, DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V, 0.2 A
3.26-inch OLED WVGA (854 ×
Viewfinder u
v
480)
v
[LIGHT] terminal
D-tap (DC 12 V, max. 50 W u
w x)
Storage Section
Item
Description
(DC 12 V, 2 A v)
Supported
SDHC/SDXC
[GENLOCK]
terminal
1.0 V (p-p), 75 K
media
Slots
x 2
Wireless audio UniSlot
slot
2ch, -40 dBu (balanced)
Expansion slot For future expansion
Specifications
247
Item
Description
Video/Audio
HD mode (Exchange (U model) / MP4 (E model):
Item
Description
H.264)
HD mode (MOV/MXF: MPEG-2)
Recording file MP4 File Format
format
Video
Recording file QuickTime File Format (MOV),
format
Video
MXF File Format (MXF)
LP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
HQ mode MPEG-2 Long GOP VBR,
35 Mbps (Max) MP@HL,
1920x1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 50i,
25p
12 Mbps (Max)
1920x1080/59.94p (U model),
1920x1080/50p (E model),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
1280x720/59.94p, 50p
8 Mbps (Max)
1280x720/59.94p (U model)
1280x720/50p (E model)
SP mode MPEG-2 Long GOP CBR,
25 Mbps (Max) MP@H14
Audio
AAC 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit 128
1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
kbps
Audio
LPCM 2ch/4ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
HD mode (High-Speed)
HD mode (MOV: H.264)
Recording file QuickTime File Format
format
Recording file QuickTime File Format
format
Video
Video
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 70 Mbps
70 Mbps (Max), 1920×1080
XHQ mode
(Max) 1920×1080/59.94p, 50p
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 50 Mbps
(Max) 1920×1080/59.94p,
59.94i, 29.97p, 23.98p, 50p,
50i, 25p
119.88/59.94p, 100/50p
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
50 Mbps (Max), 1920×1080
119.88/59.94p, 100/50p,
119.88/29.97p, 100/25p,
119.88/23.98p
XHQ mode
1280×720/59.94p, 50p
XHQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 50 Mbps
XHQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
50 Mbps (Max), 1920×1080
119.88/59.94p, 100/50p,
119.88/29.97p, 100/25p,
119.88/23.98p
UHQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
35 Mbps (Max), 1920×1080
119.88/29.97p, 100/25p,
119.88/23.98p
(Max)
1920×1080/59.94p, 59.94i,
29.97p, 23.98p, 50p, 50i, 25p
UHQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 35 Mbps
(Max)
1920×1080/59.94i, 29.97p,
23.98p, 50i, 25p
1280×720/59.94p, 50p
Audio
LPCM 2ch/4ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit,
Audio
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit, 24 Bit
24 Bit (422 10 bit only)
(422 10 bit only)
Specifications
248
Item
Description
Accessories
SD mode (MOV: H.264)
Accessories
Recording file QuickTime File Format
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
Warranty Card u w
INSTRUCTIONS (BASIC)
Electronic Viewfinder u v
Cold Shoe Unit
format
Video
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
8 Mbps (Max)
720×480/59.94i (U model)
720×576/50i (E model)
Screw (M2)
Audio
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16bit
Wireless LAN Antenna u v
Core filter (large x 1, small x 1)v
Web mode (MOV: H.264)
Recording file QuickTime File Format
*
Eyepiece and body cap are attached to the
format
Video
camera recorder.
HQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
8 Mbps (Max)
720x480/59.94i, 720x576/50i
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
3 Mbps (Max)
960x540/29.97p, 25p, 23.98p
LP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
1.2 Mbps (Max)
480x270/29.97p, 25p, 23.98p
Audio
LPCM 2ch/4ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
(720x480, 720x576)
μ-law 2ch/4ch, 16 kHz
(960x540, 480x270)
Streaming mode
Video
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
1920×1080/59.94p, 50p
24/20/16/12/8 Mbps (Max)
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97p,
25p
20/16/12/8/5/3 Mbps (Max)
1280x720/59.94p, 50p
20/16/12/8/5/3 Mbps (Max)
1280x720/29.97p, 25p
8/5/3/1.5 Mbps (Max)
720x480/59.94i (U model)
720x576/50i (E model)
8/5/3/1.5/0.8/0.3 Mbps (Max)
640x360/59.94p, 50p
3/1.5 Mbps (Max)
640x360/29.97p, 25p
3/1.5/0.8/0.3 Mbps (Max)
AAC 2ch, 128/64 kbps
Audio
Specifications
249
Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)
Wireless LAN antenna and viewfinder are not included in GY-HC900STU and GY-HC900RCHE.
For U Model
96
(VF MOVE)
20
(137.5)
359
137.5
265
244
(S.PAD
MOVE)
40
104
.
For E Model
96
(VF MOVE)
20
(137.5)
137.5
371
265
244
(S.PAD
MOVE)
40
104
.
*
The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement
without prior notice.
Specifications
250
Appendix
Tone Mapping Characteristics for Converting HLG to ITU709 for LCD/VF
.
60%
ITU709
80%
110
100
90
75%
72.5%
50%
ITU709
ITU709
ITU709
ITU709
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
hlg
80%
*3
*1
75%
*4
50%white + KNEE
60%white +_KNEE
72.5%_white + knee
75%_white + knee
80%_white + knee
ITU709_50%
*2
72.5%
60%
*6
*5
50%
0.1
ITU709_60%
ITU709_72.5%
ITU709_75%
ITU709_80%
WHITE POINT
10
0
0
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
INPUT
*1 HLG
*2 White Level
80% converted
*3 White Level
75% converted
*4 White Level
72.5% converted
*5 White Level
60% converted
*6 White Level
50% converted
Appendix
251
W
Z
Index
253
Article 4 Right pertaining to the Licensed
Software
Software License
Agreement
1. Any and all copyrights and other rights pertaining
to the Licensed Software and related documents
shall belong to the Licensor or the original holder of
the right who granted to the Licensor the license or
sublicense for the Licensed Software (hereinafter
the “Original Rightholder”), and the User shall not be
entitled to any right other than the license granted
hereunder, in respect of the Licensed Software and
any related documents.
The software embedded in the Product (hereinafter
the “Licensed Software”) provided by
JVCKENWOOD Corporation (hereinafter the
“Licensor”) is copyrighted to or sublicensable by the
Licensor, and this Agreement provides for the terms
and conditions which Users shall follow in order to
use the Licensed Software. The User shall use the
Licensed Software by agreeing with the terms of this
Software License Agreement. This Agreement shall
be deemed completed at the time the User
2. The User shall, whenever the User uses the
Licensed Software, comply with any laws relating to
the copyright and other intellectual property rights.
(hereinafter the “User”) initially used the Product in
which the “Licensed Software” is embedded.
The Licensed Software may include the software
which has been licensed to the Licensor directly or
indirectly from any third party. In such case, some
third parties require the Users to follow their
Article 5 Indemnification of Licensor
1. Neither the Licensor nor the Original Rightholder
shall be liable for any damage incurred by the User
or any third party due to the exercise of the license
granted to the User under this Agreement, unless
otherwise restricted by law.
conditions for use separately from this Software
License Agreement. Such software shall not be
subject to this Agreement, and the Users are urged
2. The Licensor will offer no guarantee for the
merchantability, convertibility and consistency with
certain objective of the Licensed Software.
Article 6 Liability to Third Party
Article 1 General Provision
If any dispute has arisen with any third party due to
an infringement upon a copyright, patent or any other
intellectual property right that was caused by the
User’s use of the Licensed Software, the User shall
settle such dispute at the User’s own cost and hold
the Licensor and the Original Rightholder harmless
from any inconvenience it may cause.
The Licensor shall grant to the User a non-exclusive
and non-transferable (other than the exceptional
case referred to in Article 3, Paragraph 1) licensed
to use the Licensed Software within the country of
the User (the country where the User bought the
Product (hereinafter the “Country”)).
Article 7 Confidentiality
Article 2 License
The User shall keep the confidentiality of such
portion of the Licensed Software, related documents
thereof or any other information to be granted under
this Agreement, as well as the conditions of this
Agreement as has not yet entered the public domain,
and shall not disclose or divulge the same to any third
party without approval of the Licensor.
1. The license granted under this Agreement shall be
the right to use the Licensed Software in the Product.
2. The User shall not duplicate, copy, modify, add,
translate or otherwise alter, or lease the Licensed
Software and any related documents, whether in
whole or in part.
3. The use of the Licensed Software shall be limited
to personal purpose, and the Licensed Software
shall not be distributed, licensed or sub-licensed
whether it is for commercial purpose or not.
4. The User shall use the Licensed Software
according to the directions described in the
operation manual or help file, and is prohibited to use
or duplicate any data in a manner violating the
Copyright Law or any other laws and regulations by
applying whole or a part of the Licensed Software.
Article 8 Termination
In case the User falls under any of the events
described in the following items, the Licensor may
immediately terminate this Agreement or claim that
the User compensates for the damage incurred by
the Licensor due to such event:
(1) when the User violated any provision of this
Agreement; or
(2) when a petition has been filed against the User
for an attachment, provisional attachment,
provisional disposition or any other compulsory
execution.
Article 3 Conditions for Grant of License
1. When the User transfers the Product, it may also
transfer the license to use the Licensed Software
embedded in the Product (including any related
materials, updates and upgrades) on condition that
no original, copies or related materials continue in
the possession of the User, and that the User shall
cause the transferee to comply with this Software
License Agreement.
2. The User shall not carry out reverse engineering,
disassembling, decompiling or any other code
analysis works in connection with the Licensed
Software.
Software License Agreement
254
Article 9 Destruction of the Licensed Software
The Licensed Software covers those corresponding
to free software, and, as a condition of distribution of
the software component in executable format which
is based on the license granted under the GNU
General Public License or Lesser General Public
License (hereinafter “GPL/LGPL”), it requires an
availability of the source code for the relevant
component. Please refer to the following URL
concerning the distribution of the source code;
If this Agreement is terminated pursuant to the
provision of Article 8, the User shall destroy the
Licensed Software, any related documents and
copies thereof within two (2) weeks from such date
of termination.
Article 10 Export Restriction
1. The User shall understand that the Licensed
Software shall be subject to the export restrictions
adopted by the country of User and any other
countries.
2. The User shall agree that the software will be
subject to any and all applicable international and
domestic laws including the export control regulation
of the country of User and any other countries, and
any restrictions concerning the end-users, the use
by end-users and importing countries to be provided
by the country of User and any other countries, and
any other governmental authorities.
Please note that we are unable to answer any inquiry
relating to the contents, etc. of the source code. In
addition, the Licensed Software includes the
software developed or created independently by
JKC and there exists an ownership of JKC in such
software and any accompanying documents, which
is protected by the Copyright Law, any international
treaties and other applicable laws. As to matters
concerning the handling by JKC of the software
components, please refer to the “Software License
Agreement” attached hereto. Please note that any
software component licensed under “EULA” which
is not subject to “GPL/LGPL”, and those developed
or created independently by JKC shall not be subject
to the requirement for provision of the source code.
The software component distributed under “GPL/
LGPL” shall be licensed to users without charge,
and, therefore, no warranty is given for such software
component, either express or implied, within the
scope of the applicable laws and regulations. Unless
otherwise permitted by applicable laws and
3. If the User is an agency of the United States of
America (the “Government”), the User acknowledge
Licensor’s representation that the Licensed
Software is a “Commercial Item” as defined in
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) part 2.101(g)
consisting unpublished “Commercial Computer
Software” as those items are used at FAR part
12.212 and is only license the User with the same
use right Licensor grants all commercial end users
pursuant to the terms of this Agreement.
Article 11 Miscellaneous
1. In the event any part of this Agreement is
invalidated by operation of law, the residual
provisions shall continue in force.
2. Matters not stipulated in this Agreement or any
ambiguity or question raised in the construction of
this Agreement shall be provided or settled upon
good-faith consultation between the Licensor and
the User.
regulations or agreed in written form, none of the
owners of the copyright or persons entitled to alter or
redistribute the software component under the said
license shall have any liability for any type of damage
or loss resulting from the use of or inability to use
such software component. For further details of the
conditions of use of such software component or
matters required to be complied with, please refer to
the relevant “GPL/LGPL”.
3. The Licensor and the User hereby agree that this
Agreement is governed by the laws of Japan, and
any dispute arising from, and relating to the rights
and obligations under, this Agreement shall be
submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Tokyo
District Court for its first instance.
Users are urged to read the details for the relevant
license carefully before using the software
component covered by “GPL/LGPL” and embedded
in the Product. Since the terms and conditions of
individual licenses are provided by parties other than
JKC, the original English version will be displayed by
the Product.
Important Notice
concerning the Software
Software License Attached to the Product :
Turn on the power.
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
A
The Software embedded in the Product is composed
of several independent software components, and in
each of such individual components (hereinafter the
“Licensed Software”), a copyright of either
JVCKENWOOD Corporation (hereinafter “JKC”) or
a third party subsists.
B
C
Select [System]
B
[System Information]
B
[Open
Source License].
The Product uses the software component
designated in the End-User License Agreement that
was executed between JKC and a third party
(hereinafter “EULA”).
Software License Agreement
255
.
B5A-2755-10
© 2021 JVCKENWOOD Corporation
|